UNIVERSITY   OF   CALIFORNIA 


DEPARTMENT  OF  EDUCATION 

•  - 

>36 


GIFT  OF 


No.  /  7  ^^  Received  /  f  tf  ^ 


LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA, 

GIFT    OF 


LATIN 


PROSE    COMPOSITION 


BV 


HENRY  CARR   PEARSON,  A.B.,  HARVARD 

HORACE  MANN    SCHOOL,   TEACHERS   COLLEGE,   NEW   YORK 


NEW  YORK-:- CINCINNATI  •:•  CHICAGO 

AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


COPYRIGHT,  1903,  BY 
HENRY  CARR  PEARSON. 

ENTERED  AT  STATIONERS'  HALL,  LONDON 


PEARSON.      LATIN    PROSE. 
W.   P.   I 


PREFACE 

THIS  book  has  been  prepared  in  response  to  the  numer- 
ous requests  I  have  received  from  those  teachers  who  are 
using  my  Greek  Prose  Composition.  It  is  an  attempt 
(i)  to  combine  a  thorough  and  systematic  study  of  the 
essentials  of  Latin  syntax  with  abundant  practice  in  trans- 
lating English  into  Latin ;  and  (2)  to  afford  constant  prac- 
tice in  writing  Latin  at  sight. 

Part  I  contains,  in  graded  lessons,  the  principal  points 
of  Latin  syntax,  the  unusual  and  non-essential  being  pur- 
posely omitted.  These  lessons  are  designed  for  use  at 
the  beginning  of  the  second  year's  study  of  Latin,  thereby 
serving  as  a  partial  review  of  the  first  year's  work  and  as 
an  introduction  to  the  composition  work  in  connection 
with  the  prose  authors  read  subsequently. 

Part  II  contains  short,  simple  English  sentences  based 
on  Books  I-IV  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  In  Books  I  and 
II  short,  model  sentences  and  phrases  are  selected  from 
the  Latin  text,  so  as  to  direct  the  student's  attention  more 
forcibly  to  the  actual  Latin  usages. 

Part  III  presents  disconnected  English  sentences  based 
upon  Cicero's  Catiline,  I,  and  connected  English  based 
upon  Cicero's  Catiline,  II-IV,  Pompey's  Military  Com- 
mand, Archias,  Marcellus,  and  Ligarius.  There  are  also 
carefully  graded  exercises  for  general  review  preparatory 
to  college  entrance  examinations. 


22*1781 


4  PREFACE 

At  intervals  in  Parts  I  and  II  review  lessons  are  intro- 
duced, containing  each  a  list  of  the  important  words  and 
an  enumeration  of  the  principal  constructions  used  in  the 
preceding  sections.  The  instructor  is  urged  to  form  origi- 
nal sentences  for  his  class  to  translate  at  sight  into  Latin 
based  upon  these  words  and  constructions.  While,  strictly 
speaking,  this  is  not  sight  work,  yet  it  enables  the  student 
to  make  definite  preparation  for  this  kind  of  work,  and 
gives  him  valuable  practice  in  the  offhand  use  of  words 
and  principles  of  grammar. 

The  sentences  at  the  beginning  of  Part  III  are  com- 
paratively easy,  so  that  Part  II  may  be  omitted,  if  the 
instructor  has  not  time  enough  to  complete  the  entire 
book.  The  best  results,  however,  will  be  obtained  from 
a  completion  of  all  the  work  here  given. 

I  take  this  occasion  to  thank  Albert  I.  Oliver,  Instructor 
in  Latin,  Kent's  Hill  Seminary,  Maine,  and  W.  S.  Burrage, 
Ph.D.,  of  Cambridge,  Massachusetts,  for  reading  the  manu- 
script of  Part  I.  I  am  especially  indebted  to  Miss  Emeline 
B.  Bartlett,  Instructor  in  Latin  and  Greek  in  this  school, 
for  the  valuable  criticism  and  assistance  that  she  lias  given 
me  throughout  the  preparation  of  this  book. 

HENRY   CARR   PEARSON. 


CONTENTS 
PART   I 

LESSON  PAGE 

1.  Agreement  of  Nouns,  Adjectives,  Verbs         ....  7 

2.  The  Accusative  Case 10 

3.  The  Genitive  Case         .         .         .         .         .         .         »  "     .  12 

4.  The  Dative  Case 16 

5.  The  Ablative  Case         ........  19 

6.  Review  and  Sight  Practice    . 24 

7.  Pronouns  :  Demonstrative,  Personal,  Reflexive,  Possessive    .  25 

8.  Pronouns  (contimted}  :  Relative,  Indefinite,  Correlatives       .  30 

9.  Questions:  Answers:  Connectives 35 

10.  The  Participle :  Its  Uses  and  Tenses     .         .                  •         •  39 

11.  Gerund   and   Gerundive.      The   Periphrastic   Conjugations. 

Supine   ..........  44 

12.  Review  and  Sight  Practice    .         .    - 47 

13.  Tenses  of  Indicative,  Subjunctive,  and  Infinitive.     Delibera- 

tive Subjunctive.     How  to  express  "Ought,"  "Must"     .  49 

14.  Commands,  Exhortations,  Prohibitions.      How   to   express 

"  May,"  "  Can,"  "  Might,"  etc 53 

15.  Conditions  and  Wishes 56 

16.  Sequence   of  Tenses.      Indirect   Questions.      Construction 

after  Verbs  of  Fearing  and  Doubting      ....  60 

17.  Review  and  Sight  Practice 64 

18.  Subjunctive  of  Purpose  and  Result.     Object  Clauses     .         ,  65 

19.  Construction  after  Verbs  of  Hindering  and  Refusing.     Tem- 

poral Clauses          ........  69 

20.  Indirect  Discourse.     Simple  Sentences          .  ~       .         .         •  73 

21.  Indirect  Discourse.     Complex  Sentences       ....  78 

22.  Concession.     Proviso.     Cause.     Characteristic.     Review  of 

Relative  Clauses     ........  82 

23.  Review  and  Sight  Practice 86 

5 


CONTENTS 


PART   II 

PAGE 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  I 87 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  II 118 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  III 146 

Exercises  based  on  Caesar,  Book  IV  .         .         .         .         .         .159 


PART   III 

First  Oration  against  Catiline       .         .         .         .         .         .  175 

Second  Oration  against  Catiline 187 

Third  Oration  against  Catiline     .         .         .         .         .         .  195 

Fourth  Oration  against  Catiline    .         .         .  .         .         .201 

Pompey's  Military  Command        .......  207 

The  Citizenship  of  Archias  ........  220 

The  Oration  for  Marcellus   ........  226 

The  Oration  for  Ligarius      .         .         .         .         .         .         .    '    .  229 

Exercises  for  General  Review       .......  232 

ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 239 

GRAMMATICAL  INDEX 255 


PART  I 

LESSON    i 

AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES,  VERBS 

1.  Apposition.  —  A  noun  in  apposition  with  another  noun 
agrees  with  it  in  case,  and,  when  it  is  possible,  in  gender  and 
number. 

Servius  rex,  Seruius  the  king. 

quattuor   hie   prlmum  omen   equos  vidl,  here  I  saw  four 
horses,  the  first  omen. 

2.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  a  possessive  pronoun  or 
adjective  may  be  in  the  genitive,  because  the  possessive 
implies  a  genitive. 

nomen  meum  absentis,  my  name  in  my  absence  (i.e.  the 
name  of  me  absent). 

3.  A  noun  in  apposition  is  often  expressed  in  English 
by  a  clause  of  time,  cause,  etc. : 

litteras  Graecas  senex  didici,  /  learned  Greek  when  an  old 
man. 

4.  A  predicate  noun  is  one  connected  with  the  subject 
by  some  form  of  the  verb  sum  or  a  similar  verb  (i.e.  fio, 
become;   videor,  seem;   maneo,   remain;  creor,   be  elected; 
appellor,  be  called;-  habeor.  be  held,  regarded)'. 

7 


8  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

Cicero  orator  fuit,  Cicero  was  an  orator. 
Numa  creatus  est  rex,  Numa  was  elected  king. 
Orestem  se  esse  dlxit,  he  said  tJiat  he  was  Orestes. 

AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS,  SECTIONS  1-4 

[H.  393-  i>  5>  6,  8 ;  (362,  363)  ;  LM.  475  ;  A.  184,  185  ;  G.  320-325  ; 
B.  167-169.] 

5.  An  attributive  adjective  belonging  to  two  or  more 
nouns  regularly  agrees  with  the  nearest : 

pater  tuus  et  mater,  your  father  and  mother. 

6.  A  predicate  adjective   is   generally  plural  when   it 
modifies  two  or  more  singular  subjects ;  it  is  masculine  if 
the  subjects  are  living  beings  of  different  genders,  and 
neuter  if  the  subjects  are  things.     If  the  subjects  repre- 
sent both  living  beings  and  things,  there  is  no  fixed  rule : 

pater  sororque  occisi  sunt,  father  and  sister  ivere  killed. 
labor  voluptasque  inter  se  sunt  iuncta,  labor  and  delight  are 
bound  together. 

7.  Sometimes   an    adjective   or   a    participle   does   not 
agree  with  a  noun  according  to  strict  grammatical  form, 
but  according  to  the  sense  or  natural  gender  of  the  noun : 

hominum  milia  sex  perterriti,  six  thousand  men  were  'badly 
frightened. 

AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES,  SECTIONS  5-7 

[H.  394,  395  ;  (438,  439)  ;  LM.  476-481  ;  A.  186, 187  ;  G.  286,  290  ; 
B.  234,  235.] 

8.  When  a  verb  has  two  or  more  singular  subjects,  the 
verb  is  either  (a)  plural,  or  (b)  singular,  in  agreement  with 
the  nearest  subject :, , 


AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES,  VERBS  9 

pater  et  avus  mortui  sunt,  his  father  and  grandfather  are 

dead. 
senatus  populusque  Romanus  voluit,  the  senate  and  people 

of  Rome  ordained. 

9.  A  collective  noun  commonly  takes  a  verb  in  the 
singular,  but  the  plural  is  often  used  when  individuals  are 
thought  of : 

senatus  haec  intellegit,  the  senate  is  aware  of  this. 
cum  tanta  multitude  lapides  conicerent,  when  such  a  crowd 
was  throwing  stones. 

10.  When  the  subjects  differ  in  person,  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second,  and  with  the 
second  rather  than  the  third  : 

si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus,  if  you  and 
Tullia  are  well,   Cicero  and  I  are  well. 

AGREEMENT  OF  VERBS,  SECTIONS  8-10 

[H.  389,  392;  (461,  463);  LM.  469-474;  A.  205;  G.  211,  287; 
B.  254,  255.] 

11.  Translate  : 

1.  When  a  girl,  she  was  considered  wise. 

2.  You 1  and  I  will  do  this. 

3.  A  part  of  the  soldiers  were  put  to  flight. 

4.  Your  sister  and  brother  have  come. 

5.  They  gave  it  to  Caesar,  the  consul. 

6.  The  boy  and  his  sister  were  very  brave. 

7.  I  heard  of2  your  bravery  when  a  youth. 

8.  Zeal  and  patience  have  been  called  virtues. 

9.  Two  thousand  men  had  been  seen  in  the  town. 
10.  A  multitude  of  soldiers  were  on  the  wall. 

1  See  example  under  10  for  order  of  pronouns.  2  de  with  ablative. 


10  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION— PART  I 

LESSON   2 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  CASE 

12.  The  direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the 
accusative : 

librum  scrlpsit,  he  wrote  a  book. 

13.  The  meaning  of  a  verb,  even  of  one  ordinarily  in- 
transitive, may  be  emphasized  or  more  exactly  defined  by 
adding  an  accusative  of  kindred  derivation.     This  is  called 
the    Cognate   accusative,    and    is  usually    modified    by   an 
adjective : 

tutam  vltam  vivere,  to  lead  a  secure  life. 

14.  Many  verbs  of  making,  choosing,  calling,  showing, 
and  the  like,  may  take  two  accusatives,  —  one  of  the  per- 
son or  thing  affected,  the  other  a  predicate  accusative : 

urbem  Romam  vocavit,  he  called  the  city  Rome. 

15.  Some   verbs  of   asking,    demanding,    teaching,   and 
concealing  may  take  two  accusatives  —  one  of  the  person, 
and  one  of  the  thing  : 

pacem  te  poscimus,  we  demand  peace  of  yon. 

i.  Some  of  these  verbs  may  take  the  ablative  of  the 
person  with  a  preposition  instead  of  the  accusative.  So, 
generally,  peto  (ab),  seek  (from)]  postulo  (ab),  demand 
(of);  quaere  (ab,  de,  ex),  ask  (of): 

quaerit  ex  solo   ea,  he  asks   him    in  private  about  those 

things. 
pacem  a  vobis  petimus,  we  implore  peace  from 


THE  ACCUSATIVE  CASE  II 

16.  The  accusative  is  used  to  express  the  duration  of 
time  or  the  extent  of  space : 

fossas  quindecim  pedes  latas,  trenches  fifteen  feet  broad. 
quadraginta  annos  vixit,  he  lived  forty  years. 

i.    Emphasis  is  sometimes  given  by  using  the  preposition 
per,  as : 

ludl  per  decem  dies,  games  for  ten  days. 

17.  Proper  names  of  towns  and  of  small  islands  or  pen- 
insulas are  put  in  the  accusative  to  denote  the  end  or  limit 
toward  which  the  motion  of  the  verb  is  directed : 

miss!  legatl  Athenas  sunt,  ambassadors  were  sent  to  Athens. 

1.  The  accusatives  domum  and  rus  are  used  like  proper 
names  of  towns : 

domum  reductus  est,  he  was  conducted  home. 
ego  rus  ibo,  /  sJiall  go  into  the  country. 

2.  Other  designations  of   place  than  those   mentioned 
above  require  a  preposition  (in  or  ad)  to  denote  the  limit 
of  motion : 

in  Italiam  venit,  he  came  into  Italy. 

legiones  ad  urbem  adducit,  he  is  leading  the  legions  to  (or 
toward}  the  city. 

3.  When  domum  is  modified  in  any  way,  except  by  a 
possessive  pronoun  or  a  genitive,  the  preposition  in  is  com- 
monly used : 

in  illam  domum,  into  that  house. 
domos  suas,  to  their  homes. 

18.  An  exclamation,  if  limited  by  an  adjective  or  a  geni- 
tive, may  be  expressed  by  the  accusative  : 


12  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION— PART  I 

me  miserum,  ah,  wretched  me  !  or  dear,  dear  me  ! 
6  fallacem  spem,  oh,  deceptive  hope  ! 

REFERENCES  FOR  ACCUSATIVE 

[H.  403-421;  (370-381);  LM.  495-524;  A.  237-240,  258;  G.  329- 
343;  B.  172-185.] 

19.  Translate : 

1.  Caesar  asked  them  for  grain. 

2.  They  will  choose  him  consul. 

3.  Dear  me,  I  am  going  to  Rome  ! 

4.  We  will  demand  of  them  fifty  ships. 

5.  She  remained  in  the  city  for  ten  days. 

6.  They  made  a  wall  fifteen  feet  high. 

7.  He  set  out  for  his  home. 

8.  For  many  days  he  concealed  the  deed  from  his  father. 

9.  The  enemy  marched  into  Italy. 
10.  The  boy  and  his  mother  were  free. 

LESSON    3 

THE  GENITIVE  CASE 

20.  The  genitive  is  ordinarily  used  to  express  the  de- 
pendence of  one  noun  upon  another.      This  relation  is 
often,  but  not  always,  expressed  in  English  by  of  or  's  or  j' : 

Alexandrl  equus,  Alexander  s  horse,  or  the  horse  of  Alexander. 

21.  If  a  noun  of  action  or  feeling  is  limited  by  another 
noun,  the  dependent  genitive  expresses  either 

I.   the  subject  of  the  action  or  feeling,  and  is  called  the 
subjective  genitive : 

amor  patris,  the  love  of  a  father,  or  a  father's  love  (i.e.  the 
love  felt  by  a  father} ;  or 


THE  GENITIVE  CASE  13 

2.    the  object  of  the  action  or  feeling,  called  the  objective 

genitive  : 

amor  patris,  love  for  father  (i.e.  the  love  toivard  a  father]. 

22.  The  genitive  is  used  to  denote  quality,  but  only 
when  the  limiting  noun  is  modified  by  an  adjective : 

vir  summae  virtutis,  a  man  of  the  highest  courage. 

i.  If  the  noun  expressing  the  quality  is  not  modified, 
the  idea  of  quality  is  expressed  by  an  adjective  rather  than 
a  genitive.  For  example,  "  a  man  of  courage  "  is  not  to  be 
rendered  vir  virtutis,  but  vir  fortis. 

23.  Genitive  of  the  Whole,  or  Partitive  Genitive.  —  The 

genitive  is  used  to  express  the  whole  of  which  a  part  is  taken : 

duo  mllia  peditum,  tivo  thousand  foot  soldiers. 
minus  dubitationis,  less  hesitation. 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  common  words  followed 
by  this  construction  : 


plus,  more. 
plurimum,  most. 
multum,  much. 
minus,  less. 
paulum,  little. 


nihil,  nothing. 
satis,  enough. 
parum,  not  enough. 
quod,  quid,  which,  what. 
aliquid,  something. 


i.  Numerals  and  quidam  are  generally  followed  by  ex 
or  de  and  the  ablative,  rather  than  a  partitive  genitive. 
Also  occasionally  other  words : 

unus  ex  militibus,  one  of  the  soldiers. 

paucl  de  nostrls  cadunt,  a  few  of  our  men  fall. 

24.  The  genitive  is  used  with  many  adjectives  to  limit 
tJic  extent  of  their  application.  Such  adjectives  are  those 


14  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   I 

signifying  desire,  knowledge,  familiarity,  memory,  partici- 
pation, power,  fullness,  and  their  opposites  :• 

peritus  belli,  skilled  in  war. 

cupidus  rerum  novarum,  eager  for  revolution. 

Some  of  the  common  adjectives  of  this  class  are : 


cupidus,  eager,  desirotis. 
conscius,  conscious,  aware. 
peritus,  experienced,  skillful. 
insuetus,  unaccustomed,  inex- 
perienced. 
plenus,  /////. 


memor,  mindful,  remember- 
ing. 

expers,  having .  no  part,  free 
from. 

potens,  ruling,  controlling. 

particeps,  sharing. 


25.  Verbs  of  remembering  and  forgetting — meminl,  re- 
miniscor,  and  obliviscor  —  generally  take 

1 .  the  genitive  when  referring  to  persons : 

oblitus  sum  mel,  /  have  forgotten  myself. 

2.  sometimes  the  genitive,  and  sometimes  the  accusative, 

when  referring  to  things.     The  object  is  jregularly 
accusative  when  it  is  a  neuter  pronoun : 

meministlne  nomina,  do  you  remember  the  names  ? 
reminiscere  veteris  incommodi,  remember  the  former  disaster. 
haec  meminl,  /  remember  this. 

26.  Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  condemning,  and  ac- 
quitting, take  the  genitive  to  express  the  charge : 

accusatus  est  proditionis,  he  was  charged  with  treason. 

27.  The  impersonal  verbs  paenitet,  repent ;  miseret,  pity  ; 
taedet,  be  weary ;  pudet,  be  ashamed ;  piget,  disgusts,  take 
the   accusative   to   express   the  person  affected,    and    the 


THE  GENITIVE   CASE  15 

genitive  to  express  the  person  or  thing  toward  ^v/iom  the 
feeling  is  directed: 

tui  me  miseret,  /  pity  you  (literally,  it  pities  me  of  you). 
eum  taedet  vltae,  he  is  tired  of  life. 

i.    misereor  also  governs  the  genitive : 

misereminl  sociorum,  pity  the  allies. 

28.  interest  and  refert,  it  interests  or  concerns  take  the 
genitive   of   the   person   concerned ;    but   in  the  case   of 
the   personal  pronoun  the  ablative   singular   feminine   of 
the  possessive  is  generally  used : 

patris  interest,  it  concerns  the  father. 

magis  rel  publicae  interest  quam  mea,  //  concerns  the  public 
welfare  more  than  me. 

29.  A  few  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity  are  put  in  the 
genitive  with  verbs  of  valuing  to  denote  the  amount  of 
estimation.     Such  genitives  are  : 

magnl,    pluris,    pluriml ;    parvl,   minoris,   minimi ;    tanti, 
quanti. 

The  common  verbs  with  which  these  genitives  are  used 
are  :   aestimo,  facio,  puto,  habeo,  and  sum  : 

ea  magnl  aestimantur,  those  things  are  highly  valued  (liter- 
ally, those  things  are  estimated  of  great  (value)). 

est  mini  tanti,  //  is  worth  my  while  (literally,  it  is  of  so 
much  to  me). 

REFERENCES  FOR  GENITIVES 

[H.  437-4S8  ;    (393-4io)  ?   LM.  549~592  i  A-  213-222  ;  G.  360-382  ; 
B.  194-211.] 


1 6  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

30.  Translate : 

1.  They  were  very  skillful  in  military  affairs.1 

2.  He  forgot  his  name. 

3.  Love  for  his  country  made  him  brave. 

4.  They  asked  him  his  brother's  name. 

5.  He  was  a  man  of  great  size,  but  not  of  courage. 

6.  She  has  enough  money. 

7.  Five  of  the  soldiers  went  to  Athens. 

8.  She  pities  them. 

9.  How  valuable  is  that  book  ? 
10.  This  interests  him  very  much. 

LESSON   4 

THE  DATIVE  CASE 

31.  Indirect  Object.  —  The  dative  is  used  to  express  the 
object  that  is  indirectly  affected  by  the  action  of  the  verb  : 

hanc  pecuniam  mihi  dat,  he  gives  me  this  money  (pecuniam 
is  the  direct,  and  mihi  the  indirect  object). 

i.  With  certain  verbs  that  imply  motion  it  is  often 
difficult  to  distinguish  between  the  dative  of  the  indirect 
object  and  the  accusative  of  the  limit  of  motion  (cf.  17). 
Generally  the  accusative  (with  or  without  a  preposition)  is 
used  when  the  idea  of  motion  prevails : 

litteras  quas  ad  Pompeium  scrips!,  the  letter  which  I  have 

written  (and  sent)  to  Pompey. 
mihi  litteras  mittere,  to  send  a  letter  to  me. 

32.  Most  verbs  signifying  to  favor,  help,  please,  trust, 
and  their  contraries ;  also  to  believe,  persuade,  command, 

1  res  militaris. 


THE  DATIVE  CASE  I/ 

obey,  serve,  resist,  envy,  threaten,  pardon,  and  spare,  take 
the  dative. 

Some  of  the  more  common  of  these  verbs  are : 


persuadeo,  persuade. 
pareo,  obey. 
parco,  spare. 
.impero,  order. 
resisto,  resist. 
fldo,  confide,  trust. 
licet,  it  is  permitted. 


credo,  believe,  trust. 
faveo,  favor. 
placeo,  please. 
ignosco,  pardon. 
invideo,  envy. 
noceo,  harm. 
studeo,  be  eager  for. 


cur  mini  invides,  why  do  yoti  envy  me  ? 
huic  imperat,  he  orders  him. 

1.  Some  verbs  apparently  of  the  same  meaning  govern 
the  accusative ;  such  as  iubeo,  order;  delecto,  please;  iuvo, 
adiuvo,  help  ;  laedo,  injure. 

2.  If  these  verbs  are  used  in  the  passive,  the  dative  is 
retained  and  the  verbs  are  impersonal : 

nobls  persuadetur,  we  are  persuaded. 

33.  Most  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter, 
ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  and  sometimes  circum,  govern 
the  dative  case.     If  transitive,  such  verbs  may  take  an 
accusative  besides : 

consilils  obstare,  to  oppose  plans. 

pecuniae  pudorem  anteponit,  he  puts  honor  before  money. 

34.  Dative  of  Possession.  —  The  English  verb  have  is 
often  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  dative  and  some  form  of 
sum.     The  possessor  is  expressed  by  the  dative,  and  the 
object  possessed  is  the  subject  of  sum. 

LATIN  PROSE  COMI'.  — 2 


1 8  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   I 

The  English  sentence,  "  The  master  has  a  book,"  may 
be  expressed  in  either  of  the  following  ways: 

1.  magistro  est  liber. 

2.  magister  habet  librum. 

35.   The  dative  is  used  with  many  adjectives  of  fitness, 
nearness,  likeness,  service,  inclination,  and  their  opposites. 

Some  of  the  more  common  adjectives  are : 


similis,  like. 
dissimilis,  unlike. 
adversus,  opposite. 
inlquus,  not  equal  to. 
proximus,  next  to. 
utilis,  useful  to. 
idoneus,  suitable  for. 


aptus,  suitable  for. 

par,  equal  to. 

aequus,  equal  to. 

amicus,  friendly. 

cams,  dear. 

familiaris,  friendly  to. 

alienus,    unfavorable,  for- 


eign. 

castris  idoneum  locum,  a  place  suitable  for  a  camp. 
filius  patrl  similis,  a  son  like  his  father. 

i.   Similis  and  a  few  others  also  sometimes  govern  the 
genitive  (cf .  24). 

36.  Dative  of  Reference.  —  The  dative  is  used  to  denote 
the  person  to  whom  the  thought  of   the  sentence  is  of 
special  interest.      This  dative  is  translated  into   English 
in  a  variety  of  ways : 

laudavit  mini  fratrem,  he  praised  my  brother,  (mihi 
shows  that  it  was  out  of  regard  for  me,  while  meum 
would  imply  no  such  motive.) 

nobis  divites  esse  volumus,  we  wish  to  be  rich  for  ourselves. 

37.  Dative  of  Purpose   or  End.  —  The   dative   is  often 
used  to  denote  the  purpose,  use,  or  result  of  a  thing,  often 


THE  ABLATIVE  CASE  19 

with  another  dative  of  the  person  for  whom.     This  con- 
struction is  most  common  with  the  verb  sum : 

magno  usui  nostris  fuit,  it  was  a  great  help  to  our  men 
(literally,  it  was  for  a  great  help  to  our  men). 

tertiam  aciem  nostris  subsidio  mlsit,  he  sent  the  third  line 
as  a  relief  to  otir  men. 

The  datives  most  frequently  used  are :    usul,  subsidio, 
praesidio,  auxilio,  curae,  munerl,  odio,  bono,  impediments. 

REFERENCES  FOR  DATIVES 

[H.  422-436;  (382-392);  LM.  525-548;  A.  224-236;  0.344-359; 
B.  186-193.] 

38.  Translate : 

1.  You  and  your  sister  gave  him  this. 

2.  The  soldiers  obey  the  general. 

3.  He  wrote  a  letter  to  his  mother. 

4.  Caesar  was  persuaded. 

5.  The  wall  will  be  a  great  hindrance  to  the  enemy. 

6.  He  put1  an  officer  in  charge  of  the  legion. 

7.  The  farmer  had2  fertile  fields. 

8.  There  was  a  hill  opposite  the  town. 

9.  My  3  brother  went  to  Corinth. 

10.    He  took  the  lead  of  all  his  friends. 

LESSON    5 

THE  ABLATIVE  CASE 

39.  Verbs   indicating   separation   or  privation   take   an 
ablative  to  denote  the  thing  from  which  the  separation 
takes  place.     A  preposition,  ab  or  ex,  is  often  used  with 

1  Put  in  charge  of—  praeficio.  2  Do  not  use  the  verb  habeo. 

8  Do  not  use  meus;   express  the  idea  in  another  way. 


20  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   I 

these  verbs,  and   regularly  when   the  ablative   denotes  a 
person  : 

magno  me  metu  liberabis,  you  will  free  me  from  great  fear. 
secernantur  a  nobls,  let  them  be  separated  from  us. 
auxilio  eget,  he  needs  help. 
de  provincia  decedere,  to  withdraw  from  one  s  province. 

40.  The  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition,  de,  ex, 
or  ab,  is  used  to  denote  the  source  from  which  a  thing  is 
derived,  or  the  material  of  which  it  consists. 

Source  —  amplissimo  genere  natus,  born  of  an  influential 
family. 

Material  (ex  is  regularly  used)  —  pocula  ex  auro,  cups 
of  gold.  An  adjective  could  also  be  used,  as  pocula  aurea. 
Also  a  genitive  of  material,  pocula  aurl. 

41.  The  ablative  with  a  or  ab  is  used  with  passive  verbs 
to  denote  \ho.  personal  agent ; 

ab  his  fit  initium,  a  beginning  is  made  by  them. 

42.  An  ablative  may  be  used  with  a  comparative  instead 
of  quam,  than,  and  a  nominative  or  accusative : 

patria  mihi  vita  carior  est,  my  country  is  dearer  to  me  than 
life  (quam  vita  could  be  used  instead  of  vita). 

tui  studiosior  sum  quam  illlus,  /  am  fonder  of  you  than  of 
him  (here  the  ablative  could  not  be  used). 

43.  The  ablative  may  denote  the  cause,  means,  or  instru- 
ment : 

f  ortuna  amicl  gaudeo,  /  rejoice  at  the  good  fortune  of  my 

friend  (i.e.  on  account  of,  etc.). 
lacte  atque  pecore  vlvunt,  they  live  upon  milk  and  flesh 

(i.e.  by  means  of  milk  and  flesh). 


THE  ABLATIVE  CASE  21 

i.  The  ablative  of  the  agent  (which  requires  a  or  ab) 
must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  ablative  of  means 
or  instrument,  which  uses  no  preposition.  See  41. 

44.  The  deponent  verbs  utor,  use  ;  fruor,  enjoy  ;  f ungor, 
perform ;  potior,  get  possession  of;  vescor,  eat ;  and  their 
compounds,  govern  the  ablative : 

vita  fruitur,  he  enjoys  life. 

45.  The  ablative,  with  or  without  cum,  may  be  used  to 
express  the  manner  of  an  action.     If  the  noun  is  modified 
by  an  adjective,  cum  is  often  omitted,  otherwise  cum  is 
regularly  used. 

Allobroges  magna  cum  cur  a  suos  finis  tuentur,  the  Allobroges 
guard  their  own  territory  with  great  care.  (Note  the  posi- 
tion of  cum  ;  magna  cura  would  also  mean  with  great  care.) 

cum  celeritate  venit,  he  came  with  speed  (speedily). 

i.  Some  nouns  that  are  unmodified  express  manner 
without  cum : 

iure,  rightly. 

iniuria,  wrongly. 

vl,  by  force,  forcibly. 

consilio,  on  purpose. 

casu,  by  chance. 

consuetudine,  more,  according  to  custom. 

46.  To  denote  accompaniment,  the  ablative  is  used  with 
cum.     But  cum  is  often   omitted  in  military  expressions 
where  an  adjective  is  used  : 

cum  comitatibus  profectus  est,  he  set  out  with  his  attendants. 


22  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

47.  Ablative  of  Specification.  —  The  ablative  is  used  with 
nouns,  verbs,  and  adjectives  to  show  that  in  respect  to  which 
the  statement  applies : 

reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  they  excel  the  rest  of  the 

Gauls  in  courage. 
claudus  pede,  lame  in  his  foot. 

1.  Note  the  phrases: 

minor  natu,  jj/<??/;z£rr  (literally,  less  in  respect  to  age  or  birth). 
maior  natu,  older. 

2.  On  this  principle  the  adjectives  dignus  and  indlgnus 
govern  the  ablative : 

digni  honore,  worthy  of  honor. 

48.  Ablative  of  Degree  of  Difference.  —  With  words  ex- 
pressing  comparison  the  ablative  is  used  to  denote  the 
amount   or    degree   of    difference    between    the    objects. 
Especially  common  are  the  ablatives  paulo,  little ;  multo, 
much;  tanto,  quanto,  hoc,  quo. 

tribus  pedibus  altior,  three  feet  higher  (literally,-  higher  by 

three  feef}. 
multo  me  vigilare  acrius,  that  I  watch  much  more  sharply 

(literally,  more  sharply  by  much). 

49.  Ablative  of  Quality.  —  The  ablative,  modified  by  an 
adjective  or  genitive,  is  used  to  denote  quality : 

summa  virtute  adulescens,  a  youth  of  the  highest  worth. 

i.    The  genitive  case  likewise  may  describe  a  noun,  or 
express  quality.     See  22. 

50.  The  Ablative  of  Price.  —  The  definite  price  of  a  thing 
is  expressed  by  the  ablative : 


THE  ABLATIVE  CASE  23 

servum  quinque  minis  emit,  he  bought  the  slave  for  five 
minae. 
i .    For  the  genitive  of  indefinite  price,  see  29. 

51.  Ablative  of  Time.  —  The  ablative  is  used  to  express 

1 .  Time  when  an  action  takes  place : 

postero  die  movet  castra,  on  the  next  day  he  moves  his  camp. 

2.  Time   within   which   an   action   takes   place.      The 
preposition  in  is  sometimes  used : 

his  paucls  diebus,  within  these  few  days. 
i.    For  the  accusative  of  the  duration  of  time,  see  16. 

52.  The  ablative  absolute  is  explained  in  the  lesson  on 
the  participle.     See  89. 

REFERENCES  FOR  ABLATIVE 

[H.  459-487;  (411-429);  LM.  596-655;  A.  242-253;  0.384-408; 
B.  213-226.] 

53.  Translate : 

1.  Rome  was  much  larger  than  Corinth. 

2.  For  five  days  they  refrained  from  battle. 

3.  She  was  born  of  a  German  family. 

4.  It  is  very  important1  for  me  to  remember  this. 

5.  He  performed  his  task  very  carefully. 

6.  On  the  third  day,  through  the  bravery  of  his  troops, 

Caesar  got  possession  of  the  town. 

7.  This  river  is  two  feet  wider  than  that  one.2 

8.  Aspasia  was  famous  for  her  wisdom. 

9.  Our  ancestors  were  men  of  great  ability. 

10.    He  was  slain  by  a  sword  by  one  of  the  soldiers. 

1  See  29.  a  Omit. 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   I 


LESSON  6 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE 

54.  Review  the  principles  of  syntax  in  sections  1-51. 

55.  Learn   thoroughly  the   meanings  of  the  following 
words : 


i.  facio. 

25.  peto. 

2.  fugo.1 

26.  rus. 

3.  soror. 

27.  mitto. 

4.  frater. 

28.  postulo. 

5.  habeo. 

29.  murus. 

6.  miles. 

30.  maneo. 

7.  do. 

31.  proficlscor. 

8.  studium. 

32.  satis. 

9.  video. 

33.  parum. 

10.  opus. 

34.  miseret. 

11.  celo. 

35.  pudet 

12.  frumentum. 

36.  persuadeo. 

13.  peritus. 

37.  credo. 

14.  cupidus. 

38.  impero.  ~ 

15.  memim.2 

39.  delecto. 

1  6.  reminlscor. 

40.  llbero. 

17.  obllviscor. 

41.  egeo. 

1  8.  similis. 

42.  fungor. 

19.  praesidium. 

43.  potior. 

20.  usus. 

44.  finis. 

21.  mille.3 

45.  adulescens. 

22.  creo. 

46.  nascor. 

23.  posco. 

47.  clarus. 

24.  quaero. 

48.  nanciscor. 

1  Do  not  confuse  this  with  fugio. 

2  Perfect  in  form,  but  present  in  meaning.         3  Look  up  its  decle 

PRONOUNS  25 

56.  Memorize  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  in  55. 

57.  Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  English  from   the  words  in  55,  illustrating  the  gram- 
matical principles  of  1-51.     These  sentences  may  be  given 
for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 

LESSON   7 

PRONOUNS:   DEMONSTRATIVE,   PERSONAL,   REFLEXIVE, 
POSSESSIVE 

58.  Demonstrative  pronouns   point  out  what  object  is 
referred  to,  and  show  whether  it  is  here  or  there. 

They  are : 

1.  hie,  this  (i.e.  the  object  that  is  near  where  I  am). 

2.  iste,  that  (that  near  you). 

3.  ille,  that  (that  yonder,  over  there,  not  near  the  speaker}. 

59.  Hie  is,  therefore,  called  the  demonstrative  of  the 
first  person.     It  is  used  as  follows  : 

1.  To  point  out  the  object  that  is  near  the  speaker  (in 
time,  place,  thought,  or  on  the  written  page). 

2.  To  refer  to  the  present  as  contrasted  with  \\\Q  past: 

haec  tempora,  modern  times,  present  times. 

3.  To  refer  to  what  follows  : 

eius  belli  haec  fuit  causa,  the  cause  of  this  war  was  as 
follows. 

4.  Sometimes  to  refer  to  what  precedes  : 

his  Caesar  ita  respondit,  to  them  (the  persons  just  men- 
tioned) Caesar  thus  replied. 

5.  In  reference  to  two  objects  previously  mentioned, 
hie  generally  refers  to  the  latter  one,  and  is  translated, 


26  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

the  latter.      Ille  refers  to  the  former,  and  is  translated, 
the  former. 

[H.  505-507;  (450);  LM.  1049-1055;   A.  102,  a,  b;  G.  305-307 ; 
B.  246.]1 

60.  Iste  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  per- 
son.    It  often  implies  contempt,  as  : 

iste  Manlius,  that  (fellow)  Manlius  of  yours. 
[H.  507,  3  ;   (450)  ;  LM.  1053 ;  A.  102,  c ;  G.  306 ;  B.  246,  4.] 

61.  Ille  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  third  per- 
son.    It  is  often  translated : 

1.  The  former  [see  59,  5]. 

2.  That  well-known,  that  notorious,  that  famous,  etc.  : 

Magnus  ille  Alexander,  that  famous  Alexander  the  Great. 
(Note  the  position  of  ille.) 

62.  Learn  the  following  adverbs  of  place : 


PLACE  WHERE 
hie,  here. 
istlc,  there. 
illic,  there. 


PLACE  TO  WHICH 
hue,  hither. 
istuc,  thither. 
illuc,  thither. 


PLACE  FROM  WHICH 
hinc,  hence. 
istinc,  thence. 
illinc,  thence. 


63.    The  determinative  pronoun  is,  ea,  id,  that,  is  not  as 
strong  as  ille.     It  is  used 

i.    As  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  meaning  Jie,  she,  it, 

they,  when  one  needs  to  be  expressed.     See  64. 
As  an  antecedent  of  the  relative,  is  qui,  he,  ivho,  etc. 

1  Grammatical  reference  will  now  be  given,  as  far  as  is  possible,  after  each 
section. 


PRONOUNS  27 

2.  The  English  expression  "  that  of  "  is  not  expressed  by 

is  and  a  genitive,  but  by  a  genitive  alone  or  by  the 
repetition  of  the  noun  to  which  "that"  refers  : 

in  exercitu  Sullae  et  postea  in  Crassl  fuerat,  he  had  been  in 
the  army  of  Sulla,  and  afterwards  in  tJiat  of  Crassus. 

3.  Is  has  often  the  force  of  talis,  such : 

non  sum  is  qui  terrear,  /  am  not  such  a  person  as  to  be 

frightened. 
[H.  508;  (451);  LM.  1056-1058;  A.  102,  d;  6.308;  6.247.] 

64.  The  personal  pronouns  ego,  /;  tu,  you;  is,  ea,  id, 
he,  she,  it,  are  used  as  subjects  only  to  show  emphasis  or 
avoid  ambiguity ;  te  voco,  /' m  calling  you  ;  but  ego  te  voco, 
/  (emphatic)  am  calling  you  (such  emphasis  might  be  ex- 
pressed in  English  by  the  translation,  "  It  is  I  who  am 
calling  you  "). 

1.  The  genitive  forms  mel,  tul,  sul,  vestri,  nostri,  are 
chiefly  used  as  objective  genitives.     See  21,  2.     The  geni- 
tive plural  forms  in  -urn  (nostrum,  vestrum)  are  generally 
used  as  partitive  genitives : 

deslderium  vestri,  longing  for  you. 
nemo  vestrum,  no  one  of  you. 

2.  Never  express  my,  your,  our,  etc.,  by  the  genitive 
of   the  pronoun.      Use  the   proper   possessive   adjective. 
See  67. 

[H.  500;  (446,  N,  3)  ;  LM.  456,  1041  ;  A.  194;  G.  304;  B.  242.] 

65.  A  reflexive  pronoun   refers  to  the   subject  of   the 
sentence.     There  are  two  uses_. 

i.    It  may  refer  to  the  subject  of  the  clause  in  which  it 
stands  (direct  reflexive) : 

se  videt,  he  sees  himself. 


28  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

2.  It  may  be  used  in  a  subordinate  clause  and  refer, 
not  to  the  subject  of  its  own  clause,  but  to  the  subject  of 
the  principal  clause  (indirect  reflexive) : 

cum  intellegeret  sibi  bellum  gerendum,  when  he  perceived 
that  he  must  wage  war.  (Sibi  refers  to  the  subject  of 
intellegeret.) 

66.  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  per- 
son  are  also  used  as  reflexives.      But  there  is  a  special 
reflexive  for  the  third  person  : 

sul,  etc.,  himself,  herself,  itself ;   (plural)  themselves. 

[H.  174,  502;  (448,  449);  LM.  1042-1046;  A.  196;  0.309,  520, 
521 ;  B.  244.] 

67.  The  possessive  pronouns  are  : 

meus,  my,  mine;  noster,  our,  ours ;  tuus,  your,  yours ; 
vester,  your,  yours  (plural) ;  suus,  his,  hers,  its,  their,  theirs 
(reflexive). 

Note  the  following : 

• 

1.  They  are  all  declined  like  adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  declension,  and  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case 
with  the  noun  to  which  they  belong,  and  not  with  the  noun 
to  which  they  refer : 

suam  matrem  occldit,  he  slew  his  own  mother. 

2.  They  are  generally  not  expressed  in   Latin,  except 
for  the  purpose  of  clearness  : 

video   patrem,   /  see  my  father.      (To  express  /  see  your 
fatJier'\\.  would  be  necessary  to  use  video  tuum  patrem.) 

3.  The    possessive   pronouns   of   the    third    person    in 
English,  his,  hers,  its,  their,  may  refer  either  to  the  subject 
of  the  verb  (i.e.  be  reflexive),  or  refer  to  some  other  person 


PRONOUNS 


than   the   subject.     When   reflexive,  suus  must  be  used, 
otherwise  use  the  genitive  of  is  : 

laudavit  suum  f  ratrem,  he  praised  his  brother,    (eius  f  ratrem 
would  mean  his  brother,  but  some  one  else's  brother.) 

[H.  176,  501,  502,  503,  i  ;  (447,  449,  i.  i)  ;  LM.  271, 1048  ;  A.  196,  h, 
197;  0.309,312;  B.  243,  86.] 

68.  Reciprocal   Pronouns.  —  The   Latin   has   no   special 
reciprocal  pronoun  (each  other,  one  another].     The  recipro- 
cal idea  is  expressed  by  the  phrases  inter  nos,  inter  vos, 
inter  se.     See  73,  2. 

obsides   inter  se  dederunt,  they  gave  one  another  hostages 
(literally,  they  gave  hostages  among  themselves]. 
[H.  502,  i ;   (448,  N.)  ;  LM.  1047 ;  A.  196,  f  ;  G.  221  ;  B.  245.] 

69.  Summary  of  personal,  reflexive,  and  possessive  pro- 
nouns : 


PERSONAL 

REFLEXIVE 

POSSESSIVE 

FIRST 
PERSON 

ego 

me!1 

meus,  -a,  -um,  my,  mine. 
noster,  nostra,  nostrum, 

our,  ours. 

SECOND 
PERSON 

tu 

tul1 

tuus,  -a,  -um,  your,  yours 
(sing.). 
vester,  vestra,  vestrum, 
your,  yours  (pi.). 

THIRD 
PERSON 

is,  ea,  id 

sui1 

suus,  -a,  -um,  his,  Jiis 
oiun,  hers,  her  own, 
etc.  (reflexive). 
When  not  reflexive,  use 
genitive  of  is,  ea,  id. 

Why  is  there  no  nominative  form  for  reflexives  ? 


30  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

70.  Translate : 

1.  You  have  convinced  yourselves. 

2.  He  praised  his  own  friends,  but  blamed  his. 

3.  I  am  the  one1  that  is  doing  this. 

4.  We  love  each  other. 

5.  They  saw  her  mother  on  the  street. 

6.  The  former  is  his  friend,  the  latter  my  enemy. 

7.  She  said  that 2  they  would  obey  her. 

8.  Many  of  us  will  be  freed  from  fear. 

9.  He  sold  her  house  and  that  of  his  brother. 
10.  The  following  are  my  reasons. 

LESSON    8 
PRONOUNS   (CONTINUED).     CORRELATIVES 

71.  Relative  Pronouns.  —  The  relative  pronoun  qui,  quae, 
quod,  who,  which,  that,  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender 
and  number,  but  its  case  depends  upon  the  construction  of 
the  clause  in  which  it  stands : 

pecunia  quam  habeo,  the  money  that  I  have.  (Here  quam  is 
accusative  because  it  is  the  direct  object  of  habeo.) 

gladius  quo  pugnabat,  the  sword  with  wJiich  he  fought.  (Here 
quo  is  ablative  because  it  expresses  the  instrument.) 

1.  The  relative  generally  agrees  in  gender  and  number 
with  a  predicate  noun  of  its  own  clause,  rather  than  with 
an  antecedent  of  different  gender  and  number : 

Celtae,  quae  est  tertia  pars,  the  Celts,  ivho  are  the  third  part. 

2.  Sometimes  the  relative  takes  its  gender  and  number 
from  the  real  meaning  of  its  antecedent,  rather  than  its 
actual  form : 

1  See  64.        2  that  .  .  .  obey :  use  accusative  and  future  infinitive. 


PRONOUNS.    CORRELATIVES  31 

nostra  qui  adsumus  salus,  the  safety  of  us  who  are  present. 
(Here  qui  agrees  with  nostrum  implied  in  nostra.) 

3.  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  is  sometimes  omitted, 
especially  if  it  is  indefinite  : 

sunt  qui,  etc.,  there  are  men  who. 

4.  In   English   the  relative  is  sometimes   omitted,  but 
never  in  Latin.       Thus,  the  book  I  have  must  be  expressed 
in  Latin  liber  quern  habeo. 

5.  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  is  often  incorporated 
in  the  relative  clause  : 

urbem  quam  statuo  vestra  est,  the  city  which  I  am  building 
is  yours  (literally,  what  city  I  am  building  is  yours). 

6.  A  relative  is  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  or 
clause,  where  in  English  a  demonstrative  or  personal  pro- 
noun would  be  used : 

quae  cum  ita  sint,  since  these  things  are  so. 
quo  f actum  est,  from  this  it  resulted. 

7.  A  relative  clause  in   Latin  is  often  used  when  the 
corresponding  construction  is  not  employed  in  English : 

the  'bystanders,  qui  adsunt  (literally,  those  who  are  present), 
the  standard  bearer,  qui  aquilam  ferebat  (literally,  he  who 

carried  the  eagle), 
the  existing  laws,  leges  quae  nunc  sunt  (literally,  the  laws 

which  now  exist  \are~\). 
the  plaintiff,  ille  qui  petit  (literally,  he  who  sues}. 

[H.  396,  510  ;  (445)  ;  LM.  820-827 ;  A.  198,  199,  201  ;    G.  610-616; 
B.  250,  251.] 

72.    Indefinite  pronouns  are  used  to  indicate  that  some 
person  or  thing  is  referred  to,  without  indicating  just  what 


32  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

one.  They  vary  in  degree  of  indefiniteness.  Quis  is  the 
least  definite,  and  quidam  the  most  definite.  The  mean- 
ings of  the  following  indefinite  pronouns  should  be  thor- 
oughly learned  : 

quis  (generally  used  only  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  num),  some  one, 

any  one. 

aliquis,  some  one,  any  one. 
quisquam,  any  one  (used  chiefly  in  negative  and  conditional 

sentences). 

qulvls    ) 

\  any  one  you  please. 
quihbet  j 

quisque,  each. 
quidam,  a  certain,  a. 

1.  Quis,  some,  any,  is  never  the  first  word  in  its  clause  : 
si  quid  his  ...  accidat,  if  anything  should  happen  to  these. 

2.  Quisque,  each,  should  be  distinguished   from  omnis, 
every.     It  is  not  often  used  in  the  plural,     quisque  regularly 
follows  the  word  to  which  it  belongs. 

3.  Quisque  is  often  used  with  the  superlative: 

optimus  quisque,  all  the  best  (literally,  each  best  one). 

[H.  512;    (455-458);  LM.  1064-1072  ;    A.  202;   0.313-318;  B.  252.] 

73.   Alius,  other  (of  more  than  two),  and  alter,  other  (of 
two  only),  are  used  idiomatically  as  follows : 

1.  In    pairs,   alius  .  .  .  alius,   one  .  .  .  another ;   alter, 
alter,  the  one  .  .  .  the  other;  alter  exercitum  perdidit,  alter 
vendidit,  one  ruined  the  army,  the  other  sold  it. 

2.  When  repeated  in  different  cases  or  when  used  with 
the  corresponding  adverb,   they  express  in  a  condensed 
form  various  idiomatic  phrases: 


PRONOUNS.    CORRELATIVES  33 

alius  alium  incusat,  one  accuses  one,  another  another 
(literally,  another  accuses  another,  i.e.  each  one  accuses 
some  one  else). 

alii  aliam  inpartem,  (they  fled}  some  in  one  direction,  others 
in  another. 

[H.  516;  (459)  I  LM.  1047;  A.  203;  G.  319;  B.  253.] 

74.  Ipse,  self,  emphasizes  the  substantive  with  which  it 
is  used.  Do  not  confuse  it  with  the  reflexive  (65,  66). 
"  Self  "  in  English  may  be  either  intensive  or  reflexive,  while 
the  Latin  has  a  special  word  for  each : 

se  videt,  he  sees  himself  (reflexive). 

ipse  puerum  videt,  he  himself  sees  the  boy  (intensive). 

Note  the  following  uses  and  meanings  of  ipse  : 

1.  very,  'mere,  in  person,  own  accord,  etc. 

eo  ipso  die,  on  that  very  day. 
ipsa  audacia,  by  mere  audacity. 
ipse  aderat,  he  was  present  in  person. 

valvae  se  ipsae  aperuerunt,  the  doors  opened  of  their  own 
accord. 

2.  When  it  emphasizes  a  reflexive,  it  is  put  in  the  nom- 
inative rather  than  in  agreement  with  the  reflexive : 

se  ipse  continere  non  potest,  he  cannot  contain  himself  (not 
se  ipsum). 

3.  It  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  an  indirect  reflexive: 

legates  mlsit  qul  ipsi  vltam  peterent,  he  sent  messengers  to  beg 
life  for  himself  (here  ipsi  is  used  instead  of  sibi). 

[H.  509;  (452)  ;  LM.  1060-1062;  A.  195,  f-1;  G.  311 ;  B.  249.] 

LATIN  PROSE  COMP.  —  3 


34  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   I 

75.  The  interrogative  pronoun  is  quis  (qui),  quae,  quid 
(quod),  who,  which,  what?     The  forms  qui  and  quod  are 
generally  used  as  interrogative  adjectives : 

qui  locus  est,  what  place  is  there  ? 

Quis  and  quid  are  generally  used  as  pronouns  (i.e.  no 
noun  is  expressed): 

quis   clarior   Themistocle,  who  is  more  famous  than  The- 
mistocles  ? 

[H.  511  ;  (454)  ;  LM.  285;  A.  104;  G.  106;  B.  90.] 

76.  Idem,  the  same,  is  often  equivalent  to  the  English 
likewise,  at  the  same  time,  also,  yet  : 

quod  idem  mihi  contigit,  which  like^vise  (or  also)  happened 

to  me  (literally,  which,  the  same  thing}. 
quidquid  honestum  est,  idem  est  utile,  whatever  is  honorable 

is  at  the  same  time  advantageous. 
cum  .  .  .  dicat,  negat  idem,  although  he  says,  etc.,  yet  he 

denies,  etc.  (literally,  he,  the  same  man,  denies]. 

i.    For  idem  atque  (ac),  the  same  as,  see  82,  3. 
[H.  508  ;  (451,  3,  5)  ;  LM.  1059  5  A-  19S>  e ;  G-  3*°  5  B-  248-] 

77.  Translate : 

1.  I  witnessed  those  deeds  with  my  own  eyes. 

2.  What  road  did  he  fortify  ? 

3.  The  boy,  whose  book  I  have,  is  not  here  to-day. 

4.  He  blamed  himself  for  his  laziness. 

5.  The  Rhine,  which  is  a  river  in  Europe,  is  one  hun- 
dred feet  wide. 

6.  All  the  houses  I  had  were  burned. 

7.  Some  did  one  thing,  others  another. 


QUESTIONS.     NEGATIVE  CONNECTIVES  35 

8.  The  perpetrators l  of  the  crime  have  left  the  city. 

9.  That  also  belongs  to  me.2 

10.    Each  one  fled  to  the  very  gates  of  the  city. 


LESSON  9 

QUESTIONS.     NEGATIVE  CONNECTIVES 

78.  Direct  questions  in  Latin  are  not  distinguished  by 
the  order  of  the  words,  as  in  English.     They  are  introduced 
by  the  following  special  words  : 

1.  -ne.     This  is  an  enclitic,  and  is  added  to  the  emphatic 
word,  generally  the  first  word.      Such  a  question  merely 
asks  for  information : 

mansitne  Romae  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  ? 

2.  nonne.     This  particle  implies  that  the  answer  "  yes  " 
is  expected : 

nonne  mansit  Romae  ?  didnt  he  stay  at  Rome,  or  he  staid 
at  Rome,  didnt  he?  (answer  "yes  "  expected). 

3.  num.     This  particle  implies  the  answer  "no." 

num  mansit  Romae  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  ?  or  he  didn't 
stay  at  Rome,  did  he  ?  (answer  "  no  "  expected). 

[H.378;  (351,  N.  1-3);  LM.  697-701  ;  A.  210;  0.454-456;  B.  162,2.] 

79.  Direct  questions  that  are  introduced  by  the  various 
interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  such  as  quis,  qui,  ubi, 
qualis,  quot,  etc.,  are  like  the  corresponding  English  ques- 
tions, and  involve  no  difficulties.     See  75. 

1  What  does  this  noun  really  mean  ? 

2  belongs  to  me  —  is  mine. 


36  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

80.  In    double    or    alternative    questions,    utrum,   -ne, 
whether,  or  occasionally  no  particle  at  all,  is  used  in  the 
first   member;    in   the   second,    ah,    or,  is   used.      If   the 
second  member  is  negative,  annon  (less  often  necne),  or 
not,  is  used. 

The  following  table  summarizes  the  various  forms : 

FIRST  MEMBER  SECOND  AND  SUBSEQUENT 

MEMBERS 

utrum,  whether.  an,  or. 

-ne.  an. 

an. 

EXAMPLES : 

utrum  bonum  an  malum  est  ?  "] 
bonumne  an  malum  est  ?  >  is  it  good  or  bad? 

bonum  an  malum  est  ? 

mansitne  Romae  annon  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  or  not  f 
[H.  380 ;   (353)  ;  LM.  705  ;  A.  21 1  ;  G.  458  ;  B.  162,  4.] 

81.  Answers.  —  Latin  has  no  words  meaning  exclusively 
"  yes  "  or  "  no."     Answers  are  expressed  as  follows  : 

1.  By  repeating  the  verb  : 

mansitne  Romae  ?  did  he  stay  at  Rome  ?    mansit,  yes  (or 
non  mansit,  no). 

2.  By  the  following  adverbs  and  phrases : 
For  "yes," 

ita,  so,  true,  etc. 

ita  est,  it  is  so,  etc. 

etiam,  even  so,  yes,  etc. 

sane,  surely,  no  doubt,  etc. 

vero,  in  truth,  true,  no  doubt,  etc. 

certe,  certainly,  unquestionably,  etc. ;  and  others. 


QUESTIONS.    NEGATIVE  CONNECTIVES  37 

For  "no," 

non,  not  (so). 

minime,  not  at  all. 

nullo  modo,  by  no  means. 

non  quidem,  certainly  not ;  why,  no  ;  etc. ;  and  others. 

[H.  379;   (352)  ;  LM.  703,  704;  A.  212;  G.  471  ;  B.  162,  5.] 

82.    Connectives.  —  Note  the  following  facts  about  the 
connection  of  coordinate  words  .and  clauses : 

1.  et  is  the  most  common  particle  of  connection,  and 
unites  likes  and  unlikes. 

2.  -que  (enclitic)  unites  more  closely  than  et.     It  com- 
bines things   that   belong  closely  to  each   other,   and   is 
appended  to  the  first  word  of  its  clause  (unless  that  word 
is  a  preposition  of  one  syllable). 

perlculls  insidilsque,  dangers  and  plots. 

3.  atque  (ac)  generally  emphasizes  the  second  of  the 
two  things  mentioned,  as  the  English  "  and  also,"  "  and 
in   fact,"   "and    indeed."      After  words   of   likeness   and 
difference,  atque   (ac)   may  have   the   force   of   as,    than. 
Ac  never  stands  before  vowels  or  h. 

intra  moenia  atque  in  sinu  urbis  sunt  hostes,  within  the 
walls,  and,  in  fact,  m  the  heart  of  the  city  are  the 
enemies. 

ego  idem  sentio  ac  tu,  /  think  the  same  as  you. 

4.  etiam,  even,  still,  emphasizes  the  word  to  which  it 
belongs,   and  which  it  generally  precedes. 

5.  quoque,  also,  immediately  follows  the  word  to  which 
it  belongs. 


38  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

6.  When  three  or  more  words   are   to   be   connected, 
either  (i)  connect  all  by  et,  or  (2)  omit  all  conjunctions, 
or  (3)  connect  the  last  two  by  -que. 

uxores,  et  Hberl,  et  bona,  1 

uxores,  liber! ,  bona,  >  wives,  children,  and  property. 

uxores,  liberl,  bonaque,    J 

7.  Instead  of  et  and  the  negative,  neque  (nee)  and  the 
positive  is  generally  used  in  Latin.      Such  combinations 
give  us  the  following  phrases : 

and  not,  neque  (nee),  literally,  nor, 

and  no,  neque  ullus,  nor  any, 

and  never,  neque  umquam,  nor  ever, 

and  no  one,  neque  quisquam,  nor  any  one, 

and  nothing,  neque  quidquam,  nor  anything. 

8.  Two  adjectives  belonging  to  one  noun  are  connected 
by  et,  and  generally  follow  the  noun  : 

vir  clarus  et  f  ortis,  a  famous  brave  man. 
[H.  314,  315;  (310);  LM.  755-761;  A.  156;  0.475-480;  3.341.] 

83.    Translate : 

1.  He  will  go  to  Rome,  will  he  not  ? 

2.  They  had  many  fields,  buildings,  and  cattle. 

3.  Whose  book  is  that  on  the  table  ? 

4.  He  was  a  general,  and  no  one  obeyed  him. 

5.  Do  you  remember?     No. 

6.  Will  he  not  use  his  sword  ? 

7.  Did  he  fight  or  stay  in  camp  ? 

8.  Will  you  free  us  from  danger  ?     No,  indeed. 

9.  A  Roman  is  a  brave,  faithful  soldier. 

10.    The  Gauls  plundered  the  houses,  and,  indeed,  the 
very  temples  of  Rome. 


THE   PARTICIPLE— ITS   USES  AND  TENSES  39 

LESSON    10 

THE  PARTICIPLE  — ITS  USES  AND  TENSES 

84.  The  participle  is  a  verbal  adjective.  As  a  verb,  it 
may  govern  a  case ;  as  an  adjective,  it  agrees  with  a  sub- 
stantive. The  tenses  of  the  participle  denote  time,  not 
absolutely,  as  in  the  indicative  mood,  but  with  reference  to 
tfie  time  of  the  verb  of  the  clause  in  which  it  stands.  The 
participle  has  the  following  tenses  : 

Present:  representing  an  action  as  in  progress  at  the  time 
indicated  by  the  tense  of  the  verb  : 

video  eum  id  agentem,  /  see  him  as  he  DOES  it  (literally,  him 

doing  if). 

videbam  eum  id  agentem,  /  saw  him  as  he  WAS  DOING  //. 
videbo  eum  id  agentem,  /  shall  see  him  as  he  WILL  BE  DOING 

it. 

Note  that  the  participle  in  these  examples  expresses  no 
absolute  time.  It  describes  an  action  that  is  going  on  at 
the  time  of  the  main  verb. 

Perfect :  representing  an  action  as  completed  at  the  time 
indicated  by  the  tense  of  the  verb : 

cohortatus  suos  abiit,  he  ENCOURAGED  his  troops,  and  went 

away  (literally,  having   encouraged  his   troops,  he  went 

away). 
cohortatus  suos  abit,  he  ENCOURAGES  his  troops,  and  goes 

away. 
cohortatus  suos  abibit,  he  WILL  ENCOURAGE  his  troops,  and 

then  go  away. 

Note  again  in  these  examples  the  various  meanings  of 
the  perfect  participle,  yet  they  all  express  action  that  is 
completed  before  the  action  of  the  main  verb  begins. 


40  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   I 

Future :    expressing  subsequent  action  : 

videbam  eum  id  acturum,  I  saw  him  when  he  was  intending 
to  do  it. 

[H.  636,  640;  (548,550);  LM.  1009-1011  ;  A.  289,  290;  G.  282. 
283;  8.336.] 

85.  The  following  outline  shows  how  the  tenses  of  the 
participle  may  be  formed  from  the  stems  obtained  from 
the  principal  parts  : 

Present  stem.   Perf.  act.  stem.    Perf.  pass.  stem. 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. — ago,      age  re  eg|l  act|us 


TENSE 

ACTIVE  VOICE 

PASSIVE  VOICE 

PRESENT 

pres.  stem  +  ns 

wanting 

FUTURE 

perf  .  pass,  stem  +  urus 

Gerundive.    Pres.  stem 
-+-  ndus 

PERFECT 

wanting 

the  last  onex>f  the  prin- 
cipal parts 

1.  Deponent  verbs  have  the  participles  of  both  voices. 

2.  The  missing  perfect  active  participle  is  supplied  by 
the  perfect  passive  participle  of  the   deponent  verbs;    if 
there  is  no  deponent  verb  with   the   necessary  meaning, 
clauses  with  cum,  postquam,  etc.,  may  be  used : 

having  done  this,  he  went  away,  cum  id  fecisset,  abiit. 


3.    The  missing   present  passive  participle  is  supplied 
by  clauses  with  dum,  cum,  or  quod. 


THE   PARTICIPLE  — ITS   USES   AND  TENSES  41 

4.    The  perfect  participles  of  some  deponents  are  used 
practically  like  our  present  participle  : 

usus,  using. 
secutus,  following. 
arbitratus,  ratus,  thinking. 
solitus,  accustomed. 
ausus,  daring. 

And  some  others. 

[H.  222,  i,  640,  i,  4,  5;    (231,   550,  N.  4  and   5)  ;   LM.  393-401  ; 
A.  135,  a.  290  b.  c.  d. ;  G.  128,  585  R.  ;  B.  112,  a.  336,  5,  356,  2.] 

86.  Form  all  the  participles  (giving  the  English  mean- 
ings) of  the  following  verbs  : 

do,  dare,  dedl,  datus,  give. 
video,  videre,  vldl,  visus,  see. 
facio,  facere,  feel,  factus,  make,  do. 
sequor,  sequl,  secutus  sum,  follow. 
munio,  munire,  munlvl,  munltus,  fortify. 

87.  Participles  are  used  in  Latin  more  extensively  than 
in   English.      They,  may   express   time,    condition,   catise, 
manner,  means,  concession,  circumstance. 

Study  carefully  the  following  examples  which  show  the 
various  relations  that  the  participle  expresses : 

1 .  Time. 

mllites  cohortatus  .  .  .  proell  committendl  signum  dedit, 
after  he  had  encouraged  his  soldiers,  he  gave  the  signal  to 
begin  battle. 

2.  Condition. 

damnatum  poenam  sequl  oportebat,  if  condemned,  the  punish- 
ment must  follow. 


42  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   I 

3.  Cause. 

horum  auctoritate  finitiml  adductl  retinent,  since  tlieir 
neighbors  were  influenced  by  their  authority,  they  retained. 

4.  Manner. 

Romanl  gratulantes  Horatium  accipiunt,  the  Romans  receive 
Horatius  witJi  congratulations  (congratulating). 

5.  Means. 

sol  oriens  diem  conficit,  the  sun,  by  its  rising,  makes  the  day. 

6.  Concession. 

repulsus  in  oppidum,  tamen  .  .  .  impetravit,  although  he 
had  been  driven  back  into  tlie  town,  yet  he  gained,  etc. 

It  will  be  seen  from  these  examples  that  clauses  beginning 
with  "if,"  "when,"  "after,"  "although,"  "since,"  "while," 
etc.,  and  relative  clauses  may  often  be  rendered  in  Latin  by 
the  participle. 

[H.  637-639;  (549)  ;  LM.  1017;  A.  292;  G.  664-668;  B.  337,  2.] 

88.  When  a  verb  in  English  is  coordinate  (connected  by 
"and")  with  another  verb,   it  may  often  be  rendered  in 
Latin  by  a  participle  in   agreement  with  the  subject  or 
object  of  that  verb : 

copias  eductas  ex  castrls  instruxerunt,  they  led  their  troops 
out  of  camp  and  drew  them  up  (literally,  they  drew  up 
their  troops  HAVING  BEEN  LED  out  of  camp}. 

89.  Ablative   Absolute.  —  A   noun    or  pronoun   in  the 
ablative,  with  a  participle  agreeing  with  it,  may  be  used  to 
express  any  of  the  relations  mentioned  in  87.     The  word 
"  absolute  "  means  that  this  construction  can  be  used  only 


THE   PARTICIPLE  — ITS   USES  AND  TENSES  43 

when  the  noun  has  no  grammatical  connection  with  the 
rest  of  the  sentence : 

armls  obsidibusque  acceptls  Crassus  .  .  .  profectus  est,  after 
arms  and  hostages  had  been  received,  Crassus  set  out,  etc. 

The  student  will  notice  that  it  is  possible  to  use  the  abla- 
tive absolute  in  the  above  example  because  armls  .  .  . 
acceptls  has  nothing  to  do  grammatically  with  the  main 
clause,  Crassus  set  out. 

1.  The  ablative    absolute  is   often  used  to  supply  the 
lack  of  a  perfect  active  participle  [85,  2].     If  we  wished  to 
express  Caesar  having'  done  this,  we  must  say  quo  facto 
Caesar  (this  having  been  done,  Caesar). 

2.  The  participle  is  sometimes  omitted,  and  two  sub- 
stantives, or  a  substantive  and  an  adjective,  are  used  in  the 
ablative  absolute  construction  : 

duce  Bruto,  ttnder  the  leadership  of  Brutiis. 
[H.4895  (430;  LM.  638-642;  A.  255  ;  0.409,4103  B.  227.] 

90.    Translate  : 

1.  When  they  had  performed  these  deeds,  they  set  out 
for  Rome. 

2.  Though  he  was  wounded,  he  fought  for  many  hours. 

3.  I  heard  her  while  she  was  speaking. 

4.  He  took  1  the  town  and  killed  the  inhabitants. 

5.  He  received  the  gifts  that  had  been  sent. 

6.  When   Cicero  had   been   elected2  consul,  he   drove 
Catiline  from  Rome. 

7.  When    Cicero    had    been    elected2    consul,    Catiline 
formed  a  conspiracy. 

8.  We  become  better  citizens  by  doing  3  our  duty. 

9.  If  he  is  killed,  we  shall  all  mourn. 

1  Use  potior.  2  Use  facio.  8  Use  fungor. 


44  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

LESSON    n 

GERUND  AND   GERUNDIVE.      THE  PERIPHRASTIC  CONJUGA- 
TIONS.    SUPINE 

91.  The  gerund  is  a  verbal  noun.  It  has  only  the 
oblique  cases  of  the  singular,  i.e.  genitive,  dative,  accusa- 
tive, and  ablative.  As  a  noun  the  gerund  may  itself  be 
governed  by  other  words  ;  as  a  verb  it  may  take  an  object. 

Examples  of  its  use  in  different  cases : 

Genitive. 

ars  Vivendi,  art  of  living. 

agendl  causa,  for  the  sake  of  doing. 

cupidus  videndl,  desirous  of  seeing. 

Dative. 

aqua  utilis  est  bibendo,  water  is  usefiil  for  drinking. 
The  dative  is  not  often  used. 

Accusative. 

This  case  is  used  only  with  ad  (sometimes  in)  to  denote 
purpose. 

nulla  res  tantum  ad  dicendum  proficit,  etc.,  nothing  is  as 
profitable  for  speaking,  etc. 

Ablative. 

deterrere  a  scrlbendo,  to  deter  from  writing. 
mens  disCendo   alitur  et  cogitando,  tJie  mind  groivs  by  learn- 
ing and  reflection. 

NOTE.  —  As  a  rule,  the  gerund  takes  a  direct  object  only  when  used 
in  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  (without  a  preposition). 

[H.  624-631  ;  (541-542)  ;  LM.  989,  990  ;  A.  295-301  ;  G.  425~433  ? 
B.  338-] 


GERUND  AND   GERUNDIVE  45 

92.  The  gerundive  is  a  verbal  adjective  and  is  passive  in 
its  literal  meaning.     See  85.     Therefore,  being  an  adjec- 
tive, it  always  agrees  with  a  substantive : 

consilia  urbis  delendae,  plans  for  destroying  the  city  (literally, 

plans  of  the  city  to  be  destroyed). 
ad   pacem   petendam   venerunt,    they  came    to   seek  peace 

(literally,  they  came  for  peace  to  be  asked). 

93.  Gerundive  Construction  used  instead  of  the  Gerund.  - 

When  the  genitive  or  ablative  of  the  gerund  would  have  a 
direct  object,  the  gerundive  is  generally  used  instead.  See 
91,  note. 


GERUND  CONSTRUCTION 


(preferable) 

cupidus  pacem  petendl,  desir- 


ous of  seeking  peace. 


GERUNDIVE  CONSTRUCTION 


cupidus  pads  petendae. 


scribendo  epistulas,  by  writing 

letters  scribendls  epistulls. 

1.  The  gerundive  is  always  used  to  avoid  using  a  direct 
object  with  the  dative  of  the  gerund,  or  with  a  case  de- 
pendent upon  a  preposition.     91,  note. 

aptum  tegendls  corporibus,  suited  to  the  defense  of  the  body. 
ad  pacem  petendam  venerunt,  they  came  to  seek  peace. 
Brutus  in  llberanda  patria  est  interfectus,  B  nit  us  was -slain 
in  freeing  his  country. 

2.  When  the  genitives  mei,  tul,  sul,  nostrl,  vestrl,  are 
used  in  the  gerundive  construction,  the  gerundive  regularly 
ends  in  dl,  regardless  of  the  gender  and  number  of  the 
pronoun : 

nostrl  servandl  causa,  for  the  sake  of  saving  ourselves. 

[H.  625-631;    (543,  544);   LM.  987-1003;  A.  296-301;   G.  427- 
433 ;  B.  339.] 


46  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

94.  Active  Periphrastic  Conjugation.  —  This  is  formed 
by  the  future  active  participle  and  the  auxiliary  verb  sum. 
It  expresses  the  idea  conveyed  by  the  English  phrases 
"  I  am  about  to,"  "  I  am  going  to,"  "  I  intend  to  "  : 

amaturus  est,  he  is  about  to  love. 
[H.  236;  (233);  LM.  355;  A.  129;  G.  247;  B.  115.] 

]/  95.   Passive  Periphrastic  Conjugation.  —  This  is  formed 
by  the  gerundive  and  the  auxiliary  verb  sum.    It  expresses 
obligation  or  necessity,,  and  in  its  literal  meaning  is  passive. 
The  agent  is  expressed  by  the  dative  case. 
Note  the  following  points  : 

1.  Since  the  conjugation  is  passive,  all  active  English 
sentences  must  be  recast  into  the  passive  voice  before  they 
can  be  literally  translated  in  Latin.     Thus :  "  I  must  give 
the  signal "  (active)  =  "The  signal  must  be  given  by  me" 
(passive)  =  signum  mini  est  dandum. 

2.  Intransitive   verbs   of    this    conjugation   are  always 
used  impersonally  in  Latin.     Thus  :  "  We  ought  to  come  " 
=  "  It  ought  to  be  come  by  us  "  =  nobls  veniendum. 

[H.  237 ;  (234)  ;  LM.  991,  992  ;  A.  129 ;  G.  251  ;  B.  115.] 

96.   Supine. 

1.  The  form  ending  in  -urn  is  used  chiefly •  to  express 
purpose  after  verbs  of  motion  : 

ad  Caesarem  gratulatum  convenerunt,  they  came  to  Caesar 
to  congratulate  him. 

2.  The  form  in  -u  is  used  as  an  ablative  of  specification 
with  various  adjectives : 


REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE  47 

hoc  est  optimum  factu,  this  is  best  to  do  (literally,  this  is 

best  in  respect  to  doing). 
mirabile  dictu,  wonderfjd  to  say. 

[H.  633,  635;  (546,  547);  LM.  1004-1008;  A.  302,  303;  G.  435, 
436;  B.  340.] 

97.   Translate : 

i.    She  was  fitted  to  rule. 

>  2.    You  must  remain  here. 

>  3.    Ambassadors  came  to  seek  peace.1 

>  4.    Since  Crassus  is  their  leader,  they  ought  to  fight 
bravely. 

5.  They  formed2  the  plan  of  renewing  the  war. 

6.  We  will  flee  for  the  sake  of  saving  ourselves. 

7.  No  time  was  given  the  Romans  to3  arm  themselves. 
*  8.  That  is  easy  to  do. 

^  9.    Caesar  had  to  recall  the  soldiers. 
10.    By  giving  and  aiding  we  enjoy  life. 


LESSON    12 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE 

98.  Review  the  principles  of  syntax  in  58-96. 

99.  Learn  thoroughly  the  meanings  of   the  following 
words : 


1.  hinc. 

2.  illlc. 

3.  hue. 

4.  culpo,  /  blame. 

5.  inimlcus,  hostis. 


6.  pareo. 

7.  vendo.* 

8.  domus. 

9.  soleo. 
10.  quisque. 


1  Express  in  two  ways.  2  capio.  8  ad  and  ace. 


48 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 


11.  quisquis. 

1 2.  quisquam. 

13.  quidam. 

14.  relinquo. 

15.  porta. 

1 6.  portus. 

1 7.  etiam. 

1 8.  vero. 

19.  ager. 

20.  ago. 

21.  cohortor.* 

22.  audeo.* 

23.  audio. 

24.  obses. 

25.  dives. 

26.  aptus. 

27.  trado. 

28.  salus. 

29.  adsum. 

30.  peto. 


3 1 .  aperio. 

32.  munio. 

33.  pigritia,  ae,  laziness. 
34-  PCS. 

35.  minima. 

36.  quidem,  ne-quidem. 

37.  quoque. 

38.  aedificium. 

39.  castra. 

40.  perlculum. 

41.  fidelis. 

42.  conficio. 

43.  instruo. 

44.  interficio.* 

45.  consilium. 

46.  iuvo. 

47.  statuo. 

48.  constituo. 

49.  consisto. 


100.  Memorize  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  given 
above,   and   write   out   all   the   participles   of   those   that 
are  starred. 

1 01.  Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  English  from  the  words  in  99,  illustrating  the  gram- 
matical  principles    of    58-96.     These   sentences   may   be 
given  for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 


TENSES  OF   INDICATIVE,   SUBJUNCTIVE,   INFINITIVE  49 

LESSON    13 

TENSES  OF  INDICATIVE,  SUBJUNCTIVE,  AND  INFINITIVE. 
DELIBERATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE.  HOW  TO  EXPRESS  "OUGHT," 
«  MUST  " 

102.  Present  Indicative.  —  Aside  from  its  regular  mean- 
ings, the  following  uses  should  be  noted : 

I.  It  is  used  to  describe  past  actions  and  events  which 
the  writer  imagines  to  be  now  going  on  before  his  eyes. 
It  is  then  called  the  Historical  Present,  and  is  generally 
translated  by  a  past  tense  : 

Caesar  Aeduls  obsides  imperat,  Caesar  demanded  hostages 
of  the  Aeduans. 

\j  2.  When  dum,  while,  is  used  with  the  present  tense, 
the  verb  is  generally  translated  as  if  it  were  imperfect : 

dum  haec  geruntur,  while  these  things  WERE  GOING  ON. 

^  3.  In  combination  with,  iam,  now :  iam  diu,  now  for  a 
long  time;  iam  pridem,  now  long  since,  and  similar  words, 
the  present  is  used  with  the  force  of  the  English  perfect. 

iam  diu  cupio  te  visere,  /  have  for  a  long  time  wished  to 
visit  you  (i.e.  /  now  wish  and  have  long  wished). 

103.  Imperfect  Indicative.  —  This   tense  represents  the 
action  as  taking  place  in  past  time. 

1.  It   sometimes  represents  an  action  as  customary  or 
repeated: 

epulabatur  more  Persarum,  he  USED  TO  BANQUET  in  the 
Persian  style. 

2.  With  iam,  iam  diu,  iam  dudum,  etc.  [see  102,  2], 
the  imperfect  has  the  force  of  the  English  pluperfect : 

LATIN  PROSE  COM  P.  —  4 


5O  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

iam  diu  cupiebam  te  vlsere,  /  had  for  a  long  time  wished  to 
visit  you. 

104.  Future   Indicative.  —  The  Latin  uses   the   future 
much  more  exactly  than  the  English.     We  often  use  the 
present   tense   to  refer   to   future   time,    the    Latin   very 
seldom.     Thus : 

If  he  comes,  I  shall  see  him,  si  veniet  (literally,  will  come), 
eum  videbo. 

105.  Perfect    Indicative. — Note  its   two   meanings  (i) 
amavl,  /  have  loved,  called  the  present  perfect  or  perfect 
definite ;  (2)  amavl,  /  loved,  called  the  historical  perfect  or 
perfect  indefinite. 

106.  Note  these  perfects  that  have  a  present  meaning. 
Their  pluperfect  forms  have  the  force  of  the  imperfect : 

novl,  I  know. 

memini,  I  remember. 

odl,  /  hate. 

consuevl,  /  am  accustomed. 

107.  Future-perfect  Indicative.  —  Note   again  (see  104) 
how  exactly  the  Latin  uses  its  tenses : 

When  I  reach  Rome,  I  will  write,  Romam  cum  venero 
(literally,  shall  have  reached),  scrlbam. 

REFERENCES  FOR  USE  OF  TENSES  OF  INDICATIVE 

[H.  532-540  ;    (466-473)  ;  LM.  73°-748 ;   A.  276-281  ;  G.  227-244; 
B.  259-264.] 

108.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  present,  past, 
or  future  time  not  absolutely,  but  with  reference  to  the  time 
of  the  verb  on  which  they  depend.     The  significance  of  the 


TENSES  OF  INDICATIVE,   SUBJUNCTIVE,   INFINITIVE       51 


tenses  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  tenses  of  the  participle. 
Review  84,  with  the  examples  given,  very  carefully. 
[H.  617  ;  (537)  ;    LM.  978  ;  A.  288 ;  G.  529,  530  ;  B.  270.] 

109.    The  following  outline  shows  how  the  tenses  of  the 
infinitive  may  be  formed.     Review  85. 

INFINITIVES 


TENSE 

ACTIVE  VOICE 

PASSIVE  VOICE 

PRESENT 

second  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal parts 

change  final  e  of  pres- 
ent active  infinitive 
to  1,  except  in  third 
conjugation,  which 
changes  ere  to  1 

FUTURE 

future  active  parti- 
ciple and  esse 

supine  and  irl 

PERFECT 

perfect  active  stem 
+  isse 

perfect  passive  parti- 
ciple and  esse 

i.  Deponent  verbs  substitute  the  future  active  _fpr  the 
future  jDassive  infimtiye.  A^UJ^^&W**  ^^^^  J^S^" 

Form  all  the  infinitives  of  the  following  verDsTj^A 

vinco,  vincere,  vlcl,  victus,  conquer. 
sentio,  sentire,  sensl,  sensus,  perceive. 
proficlscor,  proficisci,  profectus,  set  out. 

1 10.  Deliberative  Subjunctive.  —  The  subjunctive  is  used 
in  questions  that  are  asked,  not  to  receive  information,  but 
to  indicate  (i)  doubt,  indignation,  or  (2)  an  impossibility 


52  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

of  the  thing's  being  done.    The  negative  is  non.     They  are 
most  common  in  the  first  person. 

quid  agam,  iudices  ?  what  am  I  to  do,  judges  ? 

quid  dlcerem  ?  what  was  I  to  say  ?  or  what  could  I  say  f  . 

[H.  559,  4 1  (484,  V)  ;  LM.  723  ;  A.  268  ;  G.  265  ;  B.  277.] 

in.  English  expressions  that  employ  the  auxiliary  verbs 
ought  or  must,  such  as  you  ought  to  go,  he  must  do  this,  are 
expressed  in  Latin  in  several  ways : 

1.  The  passive  periphrastic  conjugation.     Review  95. 

2.  debeo  and  the  infinitive. 

3.  oportet  (an  impersonal  verb)  with  the  infinitive,  or 
the  subjunctive  (without  ut)  : 

te  oportet  virtus  trahat,  virtue  ought  to  attract  you  (literally, 

it  ought  (to  be)  that  virtiie  attract  you). 
legem  brevem  esse  oportet,  a  law  ought  to  be  brief. 

EXAMPLES : — 

id  mini  faciendum  est,  1  T        .         ,     . . 

I  ought  to  do  this, 
debeo  id  facere, 

me  oportet  id  facere,      f  T 

...        .  I  must  do  this. 

oportet  id  faciam, 

[H.  564,  II,  i  ;  (502,  i);  LM.  694,  782;  A.  331,  i;  G.  535,  R.  2; 
B.  295,  6,  8.] 

112.    Compare  these  two  English  sentences; 

"  I  ought  to  do  this." 

"  I  ought  to  have  done  this." 

In  changing  to  past  time,  the  infinitive  changes,  and 
not  the  main  verb  "ought."  This  is  because  the  verbs 
"ought"  and  "must"  are  defective  in  English.  In  the 


[  /  ought  to  do  this. 

j  J 


COMMANDS,   EXHORTATIONS,   PROHIBITIONS  53 

following  Latin  examples,  note  that  the  main  verb  changes 
to  a  past  tense,  and  not  the  infinitive : 

debeo  id  facere, 
oportet  me  id  facere 

debui  id  facere,  \  .. 

>  I  ought  to  have  done  this. 
oportuit  me  id  facere,  J 

[H.  618,  2  ;  (537,  i)  ;  LM.  980  ;  A.  288,  a  ;  G.  254,  R.  I  ;  B.  270,  2.] 

113.  Translate: 

>  i .   We  have  been  living  in  the  city  for  many  years. 

2.  Shall  I  tell  him  this  ? 

3.  She  ought  to  work  more  diligently. 

4.  While  the  city  was  being  fortified,  the  enemy  ar- 
rived. 

5.  He  had  been  in  command  of1  the  army  a  long  time. 

>  6.  You  ought  not  to  have  written  that  letter. 

7.  He  hates  them  on  account  of  their  laziness. 

8.  Caesar  had  to  fortify  his  camp. 

9.  What  w.as  I  to  do  ? 

10.    He  never  used  to  obey  his  parents. 

LESSON    14 

COMMANDS,  EXHORTATIONS,   PROHIBITIONS;    HOW  TO 
EXPRESS   "MAY,"   "CAN,"   "MIGHT,"   ETC. 

114.  The  present  imperative  is  used  to  express  a  direct 
positive  command  in  the  second  person.     The  future  tense 
is  used  chiefly  in  legal  phrases  : 

da  mihi  hoc,  give  me  this. 

[H.  560 ;  (487)  ;  LM.  725  ;  A.  269 ;  G.  266;  ^B.  281.] 
1  Be  in  command  of  =  praesum. 


54 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


115.  The  first  and  third  persons,  which  are  missing  in 
the  imperative,  are  supplied  by  the  subjunctive  (negative 
ne).  The  tense  is  usually  present.  The  subjunctive  then 
expresses  an  exhortation  or  an  entreaty  : 

amemus  patriam,  let  us  love  our  country. 

secernant  se  a  bonls,  let  them  separate  themselves  from  the 


good. 


[H.  559,  1,560;  (484.11);  LM.7i3;  A.  266;  G.263, 


i,  3;  B.  274,  275.] 

116.  A  direct  command  in  the  second  person,  when 
negative,  is  called  a  prohibition.  They  are  expressed  in 
Latin  as  follows : 

1.  Noll  (plural  nolite),  be  unwilling,  with  the  infinitive. 
This  is  the  common  expression  :  noli  hoc  facere,  do  not  do 

,  this  (literally,  be  unwilling  to  do  this). 

2.  Ne  with  the  second  person  of  the  perfect  subjunctive, 
or  cave,  cave  ne,  fac  ne,  take  care  not,  see  that  not,  with  the 
second  person  of  the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive.     These 
expressions,  however,  are  less  common. 

CAUTION.  —  Do  not  express  prohibition  by  ne  or  non  and 
the  imperative.  [H>  ^  If  2;  (488_489) .  m.  ?28,  ?29; 

A.  269,  a,  b;  G.  271,  2,  272,  2;   B.  276.] 

SUMMARY 


PERSON 

POSITIVE 

NEGATIVE 

FIRST 

hoc  faciamus,  let  us  do 
this 

ne  hoc  faciamus,  let  us 

not  do  tJiis 

SECOND 

hoc  fac,  do  this 

noli  (nolite)  hoc  facere, 

do  not  do  this 

THIRD 

hoc  faciat,  let  him  do 

this 

ne  hoc  faciat,  let  him 
not  do  this 

COMMANDS,   EXHORTATIONS,   PROHIBITIONS  55 

117.  The  English  auxiliaries,  may,  might,  could,  would, 
should,  are  not  always  used  with  the  same  force.     When 
used  with  their  full  force  of  possibility,  or  power,  they  are 
expressed  by  corresponding  Latin  verbs.     Thus,  licet,  it  is 
permitted,  gives  the  idea  of  may,  might ;  possum,  /  am 
able,  the  idea  of  could;  volo,  /  am  willing,  the  idea  of  would. 
When  these  English  auxiliaries  are  less  forceful,  that  is, 
are   not   used  with    their   full   literal   meaning,    they  are 
represented  in  Latin  by  the  subjunctive  mood. 

118.  Potential  Subjunctive.  —  This  expresses  an  action 
as  possible  or  conditional,  not  as  real.     It  often  represents 
an  action  as  dependent  upon  some  implied  condition.     The 
negative  is  non.     This  subjunctive  is  generally  represented 
in  English  by  may,  should,  would: 

quispiam  quaerat,  some  one  may  ask. 

velim,  /  should  wish,  or  /  should  like  (more  polite  than 

volo,  /  wish). 
dlceres,  you  would  say,  or  would  have  said. 

[H.  552-556;  (485,  486)  ;  LM.  717-720;  A.  311,  a,  b;  G.  257,  258; 
B.  280.] 

119.  When  may  or  might  emphasize  the  idea  of  permis- 
sion, use  licet.     It  is  used  as  follows  : 

1.  Followed  by  subjunctive. 

2.  Followed  by  infinitive. 

EXAMPLES : 

licet  eum  (el)  venire,  }    .  ,.       .  •JJ\ 

[  he  may  (i.e.  is  permitted  to)  come. 
licet  veniat,  J 

[H.  564,  II,  i,  615  ;  (501,  i,  536,  2,  (3)  )  ;  LM.  693,  782 ;  A.  331,  i, 
N-  3  ;  G.  535,  553,  4 1  B.  295,  6,  327,  i .] 


56  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

120.  Translate: 

1.  Let  them  free  us  from  danger. 

2.  He  ought  to  have  remained  here. 

3.  Don't  leave  the  city. 

4.  Let  us  all  enjoy  life. 

5.  What  can  that  fellow  do  ? 

6.  Let  us  not  be  afraid  of  work. 

7.  I  should  like  to  do  that. 

8.  You  may1  do  it  if  you  wish. 

9.  Some  one  may 1  ask  you  for  that  book. 

10.    Any  one  would  have  fought  for2  his  country. 

LESSON    15 

CONDITIONS  AND   WISHES 

121.  Conditional  sentences  are  complex  sentences  con- 
sisting of  two  parts,  the  condition  (or  protasis)  introduced 
by  "  if,"  "if  not,"  "  unless,"  and  the  conclusion  (or  apodosis). 

For  convenience,  they  may  be  arranged  in  these  classes : 

I.    Conditions  referring  to  present  or  past  time. 

1.  Simple. 

2.  Contrary  to  Fact  (Non-fact). 

II.    Conditions  referring  to  future  time. 

1.  Vivid  Future. 

2.  Less  Vivid  Future. 

122.  Simple.  —  In  this  class  the  condition  (or  protasis) 
simply  states  a  present  or  past  supposition  of  fact,  without 

1  Does  "  may  "  mean  "  is  permitted  "  ? 

2  Do  not  use  the  dative. 


CONDITIONS  AND   WISHES  57 

implying  whether  or  not  it  is  true.  The  present  and  past 
tenses  of  the  indicative  are  used  in  both  condition  and 
conclusion : 

si  hoc  faciunt,  bene  est,  if  they  do  this,  it  is  well. 

si  hoc  fecerunt,  bene  fuit,  if  they  did  this,  it  was  well. 

[H.  574 ;  (508)  ;  LM.  933  ;  A.  306 ;  G.  595  ;  B.  302.] 

123.  Contrary-to-fact  Conditions. — When  the  condition 
states  a  present  or  past  supposition,  implying  that  the  con- 
dition is  not  or  was  not  fulfilled  (i.e.  is  contrary  to  the  actual 
facts  of  the  case),  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive 
are  used  in  both  condition  and  conclusion.     The  imperfect 
expresses  present  time,  the  pluperfect  past  time : 

si  hoc  facerent,  bene  esset,  if  they  ^vere  (now)  doing  this 
(implying  that  they  are  not),  it  would  be  well. 

si  hoc  fecissent,  bene  f uisset,  if  they  had  done  this,  it  would 
have  been  well. 

i.  Expressions  of  ability,  obligation,  or  necessity  (such 
as  debeo,  oportet,  decet,  possum,  the  periphrastic  conjugation, 
etc.),  when  used  in  the  conclusion,  are  often  in  the  imper- 
fect, perfect,  or  pluperfect  indicative,  instead  of  the  sub- 
junctive : 

si  Romae  privatus  esset,  tamen  is  erat  deligendus,  if  he  were 
a  private  citizen  at  Rome,  yet  he  ought  to  be  appointed. 

[H.  579,  i,  583;  (510,  511,  2)  ;  LM.  938,  940;  A.  308,  a,  c;  G.  597, 
3,  (a)  ;  B.  304,  i,  3.] 

124.  Vivid  Future  Condition.  — When  a  supposed  future 
case  is  stated  distinctly  and  vividly  (as  in  English,  "  if  I 
shall  go,"  or  "  if  I  go  "),  the  future  or  future-perfect  indica- 
tive is  used  in  both  condition  and  conclusion : 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 


si  hoc  facient,  bene  erit,  if  they  do  (i.e.  will  do]  this,  it  will 
be  well. 

CAUTION.  —  Remember  that  the  present  tense  in  English 
often  refers  to  future  time.     See  104. 

[H.  574;  (508)  ;  LM.  933  ;  A.  307,  a;  G.  595  ;  B.  302.] 

125.  Less  Vivid  Future  Condition.  —  When  a  supposed 
future  case  is  stated  in  a  less  distinct  or  vivid  form  (as  in 
English,  "  if  I  should  go  "),  the  present  (less  often  the  per- 
fect) subjunctive  is  used  in  both  condition  and  conclusion : 

si  hoc  faciant,  bene  sit,  if  they  should  do  this,  it  would  be 
well. 

This  form  of  condition  may  be  recognized  in  English  by 
the  auxiliaries  should 'or  would,  in  both  parts  of  the  condition. 

[H.  576;   (509)  ;  LM.  936;  A.  307,  b;  G.  596;  B.  303.] 

126.  Summary  of  conditions  : 

I.    Present  or  past  time. 

1.  Simple.      Present    or   past   tenses   of 

indicative  in  both  parts. 

2.  Contrary  to  fact. 

(1)  Present  time — imperfect  subjunc- 

tive in  both  parts. 

(2)  Past   time  —  pluperfect  subjunc- 

tive in  both  parts. 
II.    Future  time. 

1.  Vivid  future.      Future  or  future  per- 

fect indicative  in  both  parts. 

2.  Less  vivid  future.     Present  or  perfect 

subjunctive  in  both  parts. 


CLASSES 

OF 

CONDITIONAL 
SENTENCES. 


CONDITIONS  AND   WISHES  59 

127.  Condition  omitted.     The  condition  (or  protasis)  is 
sometimes  contained  in  a  participle,  or  implied  from  the 
sense  of  the  sentence. 

llberatus  Romam  ibit,  if  he  is  set  free  (literally,  having  been 
liberated},  Jie  ^vill  go  to  Rome.  See  potential  subjunc- 
tive, 1 1 8. 

128.  Wishes  may  be  divided  into  two  classes  : 

1.  Those  that  refer  to  the  future  as,  "  may  he  do  this," 
or  "  O  that  he  may  come." 

2.  Those  that  refer  to  present  or  past  time,  and  that 
wish  for  something  which  (it  is  implied)  is  not  or  was  not 
attained.       They    are    sometimes    called    contrary-to-fact 
wishes.      Thus,  "  O  that  this  had   happened "  (implying 
that  it  did  not  happen),  or  "would  that  he  were  not  here  " 
(implying  that  he  is  here  now). 

129.  The  subjunctive,  usually  with  utinam,  is  used  to 
express  a  wish.     The  negative  is  ne.     The   force  of  the 
tenses  is  as  follows  : 

1 .  The  present  tense,  often  with  utinam,  refers  to  future 
time,  and  denotes  the  wish  as  possible. 

2.  The  imperfect  tense,  regularly  with  utinam,  expresses 
a  wish  that  is  contrary  to  fact  in  present  time. 

3.  The  pluperfect,  regularly  with  utinam,  represents  a 
wish  as  contrary  to  fact  in  past  time. 

EXAMPLES : 

1 .  utinam  hoc  f aciat,  may  he  do  this  !  (possible). 

2.  utinam  hoc  faceret,  would  that  he  were  doing  this  ! 
(contrary  to  fact  in  present  time,  implying  that  he  isn't  do- 
ing this). 


60  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

3.   utinam  hoc  ne  fecisset,  would  that  he  had  not  done 
this  !   (contrary  to  fact  in  past  time). 

[H.  558,   i,  2  ;    (483);    LM.  710-712;   A.  267,  b;   G.  260,  261  ; 
B.  279.] 

130.   Translate : 

1.  I  wish  he  would  not  come ! 

2.  If  he  should  leave  the  city,  we  would  all  be  glad. 

3.  Let  us  not  surrender  to  the  enemy. 

4.  Would  you  have  remained,  if  I  had  come  ? 

5.  O  that  the  famous1  Alexander  were  now  alive  ! 

6.  Even  if  he  gives  the  signal,  we  will  not  advance. 

7.  Would  that  we  had  not  persuaded  him  ! 

8.  You  would  not  have  done  so.2 

9.  If  she  is  at  home,  I  am  glad. 


LESSON    16 

SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES.  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS.  CONSTRUC- 
TION AFTER  VERBS  OF  FEARING  AND  VERBS  OF  DOUBT- 
ING 

131.  When  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  a  dependent 
clause,  the  choice  of  the  tense  to  be  used  depends  upon 
the  time  of  the  principal  or  leading  clause. 

All  tenses  are  divided  into  two  classes :  primary  ^prin- 
cipal) and  secondary  (historical). 

i.  The  primary  or  principal  tenses  include  all  forms 
that  express  present  or  future  time.  They  are  the  present, 
future,  and  future-perfect  indicative,  the  present  and  per- 
fect subjunctive,  and  the  present  and  future  imperative. 

1  See  61.  2  Is  a  condition  implied  ? 


SEQUENCES  OF  TENSES  6 1 

2.  The  secondary  or  historical  tenses  are  those  that 
express  past  time.  They  are  the  imperfect,  perfect,  and 
pluperfect  indicative,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive. 

(a)  The  historical  present  [102,  i]  is  sometimes  consid- 
ered a  primary  tense,  although  more  often  a  secondary. 

132.  Rule  for  Sequence  of  Tenses.  —  Whenever  the  sub- 
junctive is  used  in  a  subordinate  or  dependent  clause,  the 
tense  that  should  be  used  is  determined  by  the  following 
rule: 

A  primary  tense  in  the  main  clause  is  followed  by  a 
primary  tense  in  the  dependent  clause ;  a  secondary  tense 
is  followed  by  a  secondary  tense. 

133.  In  applying  this  rule  for  the  sequence  of  tenses, 
the  student  should  notice  (i)  whether  the  verb  of  the  main 
clause  is  primary  or  secondary ;   (2)  whether  the  depend- 
ent verb  denotes  (a)  time  that  is  present  or  future  with 
reference  to  the  time  of  the  main  verb  (i.e.  whether  it 
denotes  incomplete  action),  or  (b)  time  that  is  past  with 
reference  to  the  main  verb  (i.e.  completed  action). 

1.  If  the  main  verb  is  primary,  the  dependent  subjunc- 
tive must  be  present  tense  if  the  action  is  incomplete,  and 
perfect  if  it  denotes  complete  action. 

2.  If  the  main  verb  is  a  secondary  tense,  the  dependent 
subjunctive  must  be  imperfect  if   it  denotes  incomplete 
action,  and  pluperfect  if  it  denotes  completed  action. 

Examples  of  sequence  of  tenses  : 

1.  Video  quid  faciat,  1     ,  ^  both  these  examples 

.  the  dependent  clause  ex- 

/  see  What  he  is  doing.  I    presses  incomplete  action, 

2.  vidi  quid  f aceret,  f  because  th«  doin*  was  ^ 

ing  on  at  the  same  time  as 

/  saw  ivhat  he  was  doing.  J  the  seeing. 


62 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   I 


3-    Video  quid  fecerit,  Here  the  dependent 

I  see  what  he  did  (or  has  done).  clauses  denote  comPleted 

7  y  action,  because  the  doing 

4.  vldl  quid  fecisset, 


was     finished    before    the 
an. 


/  saw  what  he  did  (or  had  done).  J  seeins  beg 
OUTLINE  FOR  USE  OF  SUBJUNCTIVE  TENSES 


PRINCIPAL  OR  MAIN  VERB 

TENSE  USED  IN  SUBJUNCTIVE 

INCOMPLETE  TIME 

COMPLETED  TIME 

Present 
Future 
Future  perfect 
Imperative 

Present 

Perfect 

Perfect 
Pluperfect 
Imperfect 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

REFERENCES  FOR  SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES 

[H.  543-545  ;  (49^-495)  5  LM.  802-809;  A.  285,  286;  G.  509-511  ; 
B.  266,  267.] 

134.  Indirect  Questions. — When  a  question  is  not  asked 
directly,  but  depends  upon  some  introductory  verb,  the 
subjunctive  is  used : 

scio  quis  ille  sit,  /  know  who  he  is.    (The  direct  question 
was,  quis  ille  est?  who  is  kef) 

Indirect  questions  may  be  recognized  in  English  by  the 
fact  that  some  interrogative  word  follows  the  main  or 
introductory  verb. 

[H.  649,  II;  (529,  I)  ;  LM.  810;  A.  334;  G.  467  5  B.  300.] 


SEQUENCES  OF  TENSES  63 

135.  A  clause  dependent  upon  a  verb  or  expression  of 
fearing  may  be  expressed  by  ut  or  ne  and  the  subjunctive. 
Ne  is  affirmative,  and   means  that ;    ut  is  negative,  and 
means  that  not : 

t;imeo  ne  hoc  faciat,  I  fear  that  he  will  do  this  (or  I  fear 

that  he  is  doing  this}. 
timebam  ut  hoc  faceret,  1  feared  that  he  would  not  do  this. 

i.   ne  non,  that  .  .  .  not,  is  occasionally  used  instead  of 
ut,  and  regularly  so  when  the  verb  of  fearing  is  negative  : 

non  vereor  ne  hoc  non  fecerit,  /  am  not  afraid  that  he  has 
not  done  this. 

[H.  567,  i  ;  (498,  HI)  ;  LM.  897  ;  A.  331,  f ;  G.  550,  2  ;  B.  296,  2.] 

136.  Verbs  of  doubting,  when  negative  or  in  the  form 
of  a  question  that  implies  a  negative  answer,  are  followed 
by  qum,  that,  but  that,  and  the  subjunctive : 

non  erat  dubium  qum  plurimum  possent,  there  was  no  doubt 
that  they  had  very  great  power. 

quis  dubitat  quln  in  virtute  dlvitiae  sint  ?  who  doubts  (im- 
plying that  no  one  does)  that  there  are  riches  in  virtue? 

i.   Dubito  also  means  hesitate,  and  is  regularly  followed 
by  the  infinitive : 

non  dubitem  dlcere,  etc.,  /  should  not  hesitate  to  say,  etc. 

[H.  595,  I;  (504,  505,  I,  4);   LM.  913,  914;  A.  332,  g,  R.  N.  2  ; 
G.  555,  2,  R.  3  ;  B.  298,  b.] 

137.  Translate : 

1.  Do  not  tell  me  where  you  went. 

2.  May  he  not  hesitate  to  fight  bravely  ! 

3.  I  have  not  asked  who  she  is. 


64 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


4.  I  was  afraid  that  they  had  not  returned  home. 

5.  Would  any  one  doubt  that  he  was  a  good  soldier? 

6.  Let  us  not  fear  that  the  enemy  will  come. 

7.  What  has  that  fellow l  told  you  ? 

8.  Caesar  ought  not  to  have  killed  all  the  inhabitants. 


LESSON    17 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT  PRACTICE 

138.  Review  the  principles  of  syntax  in  102-136. 

139.  Learn  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 

words : 

1.  vinco. 

2.  vincio. 

3.  vivo.* 

4.  cognosce.        (UlAl 

5.  oportet. 

6.  debeo.* 

7.  fmitimus. 

8.  parens. 

9.  epistula,  littera., 

10.  secerno. 

1 1 .  quaero. 

12.  iter. 

13.  licet. 

14.  vereor. 

15.  timeo. 

1 6.  terreo. 

17.  queror.* 

Write  all  the  infinitives  of  the  starred  verbs. 


18. 

incola. 

19. 

consuesco. 

20. 

traho. 

21. 

brevis. 

22. 

lex. 

23- 

laboro. 

24. 

munus. 

25. 

odi.~ 

k         26. 

gero.* 

27. 

fides. 

28. 

gaudeo.* 

29. 

cupio. 

SO- 

gratia. 

SI- 

scio. 

32. 

dubito. 

33- 

nemo. 

34- 

scelus. 

1  See  60. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  OF   PURPOSE  AND   RESULT  65 

140.  Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  English  from  the  words  in  139,  illustrating  the  gram- 
matical principles  of  102-136.  These  sentences  may  be 
given  for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 


LESSON    18 

SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  PURPOSE  AND   RESULT.     OBJECT  CLAUSES 

141.  A  purpose  clause  is  one  which  expresses  the  end  or 
purpose  of  the  action  of  a  verb. 

In  English,  purpose  is  indicated  in  a  variety  of  ways. 
In  the  sentence,  "  He  came  to  see  me,"  the  purpose  clause 
"  to  see  me  "  may  be  expressed  "  in  order  that  he  might 
see  me,"  or  "for  the  purpose  of  seeing  me,"  or  "in  order 
to  see  me,"  etc. 

142.  In  Latin,  also,  there  are  many  ways  of  expressing 
purpose.     In  previous  lessons  these  have  been  considered. 

1.  The  genitive  of  the  gerundive  construction  followed 
by  causa.     See  91,  second  example,  and  93. 

2.  The  genitive  of  the  gerund  followed  by  causa.     See 
91,  second  example. 

3.  ad  and  the  accusative  of  the  gerundive  construction. 
See  93,  i,  second  example. 

4.  ad  and  the  accusative  of  the  gerund.     See  91,  accusa- 
tive.    This  construction  is  not  used  with  transitive  verbs. 
See  93,  i. 

5.  Supine  in  -um  after  verbs  of  motion.     See  96,  i. 

143.  A  clause  of  purpose  is  most  commonly  expressed 
by  ut,  that,  in  order  that,  and  ne,  in  order  that  not,  lest,  and 
the  subjunctive : 

LATIN  PROSE  COMP.  —  5 


66  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

veni  ut  meum  amicum  viderem,  /  came  that  I  might  see  my 

friend  (or  to  see  my  friend). 
portas  clausit,  ne  quam  oppidanl   iniuriam   acciperent,   he 

closed  the  gates,  lest  the  townsmen   should   receive  any 
injury. 

1.  A  relative  pronoun  is  used  with  the  subjunctive  to 
express  purpose.     There  must,  of  course,  be  an  antecedent 
of  the  relative,  expressed  or  understood,  in  the  main  clause  : 

qul  cognoscerent  mlsit,  he  sent  men  to  find  out,  etc.  (literally 
he  sent  those  who  should  find  out). 

2.  quo  (the  ablative  of  the  relative)  is  often  used  with 
the  subjunctive  to  express  purpose  when  the  purpose  clause 
contains  a  comparative : 

carlnae  aliquanto  planiores  quam  nostrarum  navium,  quo 
facilius  vada  excipere  possent,  the  bottoms  of  the  ships 
(were)  considerably  flatter  than  tJiose  of  our  vessels,  so  that 
they  might  be  able  to  stand  the  shoals  more  easily. 

[H.  568  ;  (497)  ;  LM.  835,  899,  908  ;  A.  317  ;  G.  544,  R.  2  ;  B.  282.] 

CAUTION.  —  Do  not  express  purpose  in  Latin  by  the 
infinitive.  This  is  used  in  English,  but  not  in  classical 
Latin. 

QUERY.  —  In  how  many  ways  may  purpose  be  expressed 
in  Latin  ? 

144.  The  student  should  notice  carefully  the  difference 
between  a  purpose  and  a  result  clause.  A  result  clause 
expresses  the  result  or  outcome  of  the  action  of  a  verb. 
Observe  the  difference  as  shown  in  these  two  examples : 

"They  shouted  so  that  he  might  hear."     (Purpose.) 
"They  shouted  so  that  he  heard."     (Result.) 


SUBJUNCTIVE  OF   PURPOSE  AND   RESULT  6/ 

Some  word  or  phrase  like  so,  such,  in  such  a  way,  etc.,  is 
often  used  in  the  sentence  before  the  result  clause  to  lead 
up  to  it,  and  to  show  that  such  a  clause  is  to  follow. 

145.  A  result  clause  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  ut,  that,  so 
that,  and  ut  non,  so  that  not,  and  the  subjunctive : 

tanta  subito  malacia  exstitit  ut  se  movere  non  possent,  such  a 

calm  suddenly  arose  that  they  could  not  move. 

i.  A  relative  and  the  subjunctive  also  often  express 
result : 

nemo  est  tarn  senex  qui  se  annum  non  putet  posse  vlvere, 

nobody  is  so  old  as  not  to  think  that  he  can  live  a  year. 

Note  that  a  negative  purpose  clause  is  introduced  by  ne, 
a  negative  result  clause  by  ut  non. 

[H.  570;  (500)  ;  LM.  905  ;  A.  319;  G.  552;  B.  284.] 

146.  After  many  Latin  verbs  the  object  clause  is  ex- 
pressed by  ut  or  ne  and  the  subjunctive,  whereas  in  English 
the  corresponding  construction  employs  the  infinitive : 

(Latin.)  huic  persuadet  uti  ad  hostis  transeat  (the  object 
of  persuadet  is  the  clause  uti  .  .  .  transeat). 

(English.)  he  persuaded  him  to  go  over  to  tJie  enemy  (the 
object  of  persuaded  is  the  infinitive  clause,  to  go  over  to 
the  enemy). 

Because  of  this  difference  in  idiom  it  is  necessary  to 
know  what  Latin  verbs  are  followed  by  an  object  clause  in 
the  subjunctive. 

147.  The  subjunctive  introduced  by  ut  or  ne  is  used  as 
the   object   of  verbs  signifying  to  ask,  command,  advise, 
resolve,  urge,  persuade,  permit,  strive,  decree. 


68  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

monet  ut  omnis  susplciones  vitet,  he  advises  (or  warns)  him 

to  avoid  all  suspicion. 
Helvetils  persuasit  ut  exirent,  he  persuaded  the  Helvetians 

to  march  forth. 
suls  imperavit  ne  quod  omnino  telum  in  hostis  reicerent,  he 

ordered  his  men  not  to  throiv  back  at  the  enemy  any  weapon 

at  all. 
te  rogo  ut  eum  iuves,  /  beg  you  to  aid  him. 

The  following  verbs  are  some  of  the  most  common  that 
take  this  construction : 


persuadeo,  persuade. 

impero,  mando,  order. 

rogo,  ask. 

oro,  beg. 

postulo,  demand. 

moneo,  advise. 

peto,  quaero,  reqtiest,  entreat. 


cohortor,     hortor,     encourage, 

urge. 

concede,  permitto,  allow. 
censeo,  propose,  move. 
decerno,  resolve,  decree. 
operam  do,  take  pains. 
negotium  do,  employ,  charge. 
laboro,  contendo,  strive. 


[H.  565  ;    (498,  I,  II)  ;    LM.  893-895  ;  A.  331  ;    G.  546,    and  N.   i  ; 
3.295,1,2,4,5.] 

148.    There  are  many  exceptions  to  the  principle  stated 
in  147,  of  which  note  the  following  : 

1 .  lubeo,  order,  and  veto,  forbid,  are  regularly  followed 
by  the  infinitive : 

Helvetios  oppida  restituere  iussit,  he  ordered  the  Helvetians 
to  rebuild  their  towns. 

2.  Conor,  try,  strive,  regularly  takes  the  infinitive  : 
si  transire  conarentur,  if  they  should  try  to  cross. 


VERBS  OF   HINDERING  AND   REFUSING  69 

3.  The  following  verbs  are  followed  either  by  (i)  the 
infinitive,  or  (2)  ut  and  ne  and  the  subjunctive.  Yet  the 
infinitive  is  more  common. 


patior,  sino,  allow. 
constituo,  determine. 
statuo,  resolve  upon. 
volo,  wish,  be  willing'. 


nolo,  be  unwilling. 
malo,  prefer. 
cupio,  desire. 
studeo,  be  eager  for. 


149.  Translate : 

1.  They  sent  a  man  to  see  her.     (Express  in  six  differ- 
ent ways  in  Latin.) 

2.  They  were  persuaded  1  to  do  this. 

3.  Caesar  asked  Labienus  to  occupy2  the  mountain  and 
wait  for  his  men. 

4.  I  ordered  him  to  be  bound  2  and  led  to  me. 

5.  We  should  like  to  go  to  Athens. 

6.  He  was  so  lazy  that  he  would  not  fight. 

7.  I  am  not  the  man  to  desert  a  friend. 

LESSON    19 

CONSTRUCTION    AFTER  VERBS    OF    HINDERING    AND    REFUS- 
ING.   TEMPORAL  CLAUSES 

150.  Object  clauses  dependent  upon  verbs  of  hindering, 
preventing,  and  refusing  are  expressed  as  follows  : 

(i)  By  ne  or  quominus  and  the  subjunctive,  if  the  main 
clause  is  affirmative. 

Caesar  deterrere  potest  ne  maior  multitude  Germanorum 
Rhenum  traducatur,  Caesar  can  prevent  a  greater  multi- 
tude of  Germans  from  being  led  across  the  Rhine. 

1  were  persuaded :  see  32,  2.          2  Use  a  participle  to  express  this  verb. 


70  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

i.    Prohibeo  regularly  takes  the  infinitive. 

Germanos  transire  prohibebant,  they  kept  the  Germans  from 
crossing. 

(2)  By  quin  (less  often  quominus)  and  the  subjunctive,  if 
the  main  clause  is  negative. 

neque  recusant  quin   armis   contendant,   and  they  do  not 

refuse  to  contend  in  arms. 
retinerl  non  potuerant  quin  tela  conicerent,  they  could  not 

be  restrained  from  hurling  their  weapons. 

[H.  566,  568,  8,  595,  2  ;  (504,  4,  505.  n)  ;  LM.  898  ;  A.  331,  e,  2, 
332>  g;  G.  548,  549,  554,  555  ;  B.  295,  3,  a.] 

151.  The  time  of  the  action  of  a  verb  may  be  defined 
by  ( i )  a  noun,  or  (2)  a  clause.     As,  "  At  six  o'clock  he  went 
home."     "  When  it  was  dark  he  went  home." 

Review  51. 

152.  Temporal    clauses   introduced   by   the   following 
particles  take  the  indicative.      The  tense  is  generally  per- 
fect_pr  historical  present. 

utj>rimum, 

cum  primum, 

simul  atque,     \  as  soon  as. 

sTmuTac, 

simul, 


postquam  (posteaquam),  after. 
ubi,  when. 
utT  as.  when. 


postquam  Caesar   pervenit,  obsides   poposcit,    after   Caesar 

arrived,  Jie  demanded  hostages. 
Pompeius  ut  equitatum  suum  pulsum  vidit,  acie  excessit, 

when  Pompey  saw  his  cavalry  beaten,  he  left  tJie  army. 

[H.  602;   (518);  LM.  881;  A.  324;  G.  561;  6.287,  i.] 


VERBS  OF   HINDERING  AND   REFUSING  71 

153.  Temporal  clauses  introduced  by  cum,  when,  while, 
after,  take : 

1.  The  indicative,  if  the  tense  is  present,  perfect,  future, 
or  future-perfect. 

2.  The  subjunctive,  if  the  tense  is  imperfect  or  pluperfect. 
The  imperfect  or  pluperfect  indicative  is  very  rare  in 

classical  Latin. 

cum   id   nuntiatum    esset,  maturat,   when   this  had    been 

reported,  he  hastened. 
cum  Caesar  in  Galliam  venit,  ^vhen  Caesar  came  into  Gaul. 

Review  87,  I,  89. 

[H.  600,  60 1  ;  (521)  ;  LM.  854-858 ;  A.  325  ;  G.  580,  585  ;  B.  288,  i.] 

154.  antequam  and  priusquam,  before,  until,  are  used  as 
follows : 

(1)  With  the  indicative  to  express  an  actual  fact.     The 
tense  is  generally  perfect,  future-perfect,  or  present. 

(2)  With  the  subjunctive  when  the  action  is  viewed  as  an- 
ticipated.   The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  are  generally  used. 

nee  prius  respexl  quam  venimus,  and  I  did  not  look  back 
until  we  arrived. 

priusquam  telum  adicl  posset,  omnis  acies  terga  vertit,  be- 
fore a  spear  could  be  hurled,  the  whole  army  fled. 

1 .  Antequam  and  priusquam  are  often  divided  into  their 
two  elements,  ante  .  .  .  quam,  prius  .  .  .  quam,  and  the 
first  part  put  in  the  main  clause,  the  second  in  the  temporal 
clause.     See  first  example  given  above. 

2.  Antequam  and  priusquam  mean  until  after  a  negative 
clause.     See  first  example. 

[H.  605, 1,  II ;  (520)  ;  LM.  877-880  ;  A.  327  ;  G.  574-577  I  B.  291, 
292.] 


72  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   I 

155.  Dum,  quoad,  or  quam  diu,  as  long  as,  so  long  as, 
take  the  indicative.     For  dum,  while,  see  102,  2. 

quoad  potuit,  restitit,  lie  resisted  as  long  as  he  could. 
[H.  603,  I;  (519^);  LM.  918;  A.  328,  2;  G.  569;  B.  293,  I,  II.] 

156.  Dum  and  quoad,  until,  are  used  as  follows : 

1 .  With  the  indicative  to  denote  an  actual  event.     This 
will  be,  in  general,  when  the  reference  is  to  a  past  action. 
In  this  sense  dum  is  used  less  often  than  quoad. 

nostrl  non  finem  sequendl  fecerunt,  quoad  equites  praecipitls 
hostis  egerunt,  our  men  did  not  give  up  the  pursuit  until 
the  cavalry  drove  the  enemy  headlong. 

2.  With    the    subjunctive    to    denote    anticipation    or 
expectancy.      This  will  be,  in  general,  when  the  "  until " 
clause  refers  to  future  time  with  reference   to   the  main 
verb : 

expectas  dum  dlcat,  you  are  waiting  until  he  speaks. 

dum  naves  convenlrent,  in  ancorls  expectavit,  he  waited  at 

anchor  for  the  skip  to  assemble  (literally,  until  the  ships 
should  assemble]. 

[H.  603,  II,  i,  2  ;  (519,  II)  ;  LM.  921,  922 ;    A.  328 ;  G.  571,  572 ; 
B.  293,  III,  i,  2.] 

157.  Translate : 

1.  I  enjoyed  my  books  as  long  as  I  remained  there. 

2.  Just1  as  soon  as  they  saw  the  enemy,  they  fled. 

3.  When  he  had  been  informed  of  this,  they  started  for 
Rome. 

4.  You  ought  to  have  gone  before  they  came. 

5.  While  he  was  delaying  near2  the  city,  he  met  many 
of  his  friends. 

1  This  word  merely  emphasizes  "  as  soon  as."         2  ad  and  ace. 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE.     SIMPLE  SENTENCES  73 

6.  Caesar  waited  for  the  soldiers  to  gather. 

7.  We  will  prevent  them  from  going  away. 

8.  He  did  not  leave  the  city  until  he  had  seen  her. 

9.  They  did  not  refuse  to  believe  me. 


LESSON   20 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.     SIMPLE  SENTENCES 

158.  The  words  or  thoughts  of  any  person  may  be 
quoted  either  directly  or  indirectly.  A  direct  quotation 
(i.e.  direct  discourse)  is  one  which  gives  the  exact  words 
or  thoughts  of  the  original  speaker  or  writer.  An  indirect 
quotation  (i.e.  indirect  discourse)  is  one  in  which  the  origi- 
nal words  or  thoughts  are  stated  in  the  words  of  another, 
and  conform  to  the  construction  of  the  sentence  in  which 
they  stand. 

The  English  sentence,  /  am  present,  when  quoted  di- 
rectly, is  stated:  he  said,11 1  am  present."  When  quoted 
indirectly,  it  assumes  this  form  :  he  said  that  he  was  present, 
or,  after  a  present  tense  of  the  verb  of  saying,  he  says  tJiat 
he  is  present.  An  indirect  statement,  then,  is  generally 
introduced  in  English  by  the  word  "that,"  although  this 
may  be  omitted,  as,  he  says  (that)  he  is  coming. 

CAUTION.  —  The  English  word  "that"  should  be  care- 
fully examined.  It  may  (i)  introduce  an  object  clause,  a 
purpose  or  result  clause,  being  rendered  in  Latin  by  ut, 
ne,  quin,  quominus ;  (2)  be  the  relative  pronoun,  as  "  the 
book  that  I  saw,"  and  be  expressed  by  the  proper  form  of 
qul;  (3)  be  the  demonstrative  pronoun,  as  "that  book  is 
mine,"  and  be  expressed  by  ille ;  (4)  be  used  to  introduce 
a  clause  in  indirect  discourse,  as  "  I  know  that  he  is  here." 
In  this  case  there  is  no  corresponding  word  in  Latin. 


74 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   I 


159.    Examine  carefully  these  examples  : 


DIRECT  DISCOURSE 
/  am  coming,  venio. 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 
he  says  that  lie  is  coming, 
dicit  se  venire. 
/  came,  venl.  he  said  tJiat  he  had  come, 

dixit  se  venisse. 
Note  (i)  that  the  English  expresses  the  indirect  state- 
ment by  a  clause  introduced  by  "that";  (2)  that  the  Latin 
changes  the  verb  of  the  direct  statement  to  the  infinitive, 
with  its  subject  in  the  accusative;  (3)  that  there  is  no 
word  in  Latin  to  correspond  to  the  "that"  in  English. 
Hence  never  write  dico  ut,  etc.,  /  say  that,  etc. 

1 60.   Rule  for   Main  Verbs  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  In 

changing  from  direct  to  indirect  discourse,  the  main  verb 
of  a  declaratory  sentence  becomes  infinitive  with  its  sub- 
ject in  the  accusative. 

Verbs  and  expressions  of  knowing,  thinking,  telling,  and 
perceiving  are  used  to  introduce  a  sentence  when  it  is 
quoted  indirectly. 

Some  of  the  more  common  verbs  are : 


dico,  sayt  tell, 
nuntio,  announce. 
refero,  report. 
certiorem  facio,  inform. 
polliceor,  promise. 
nego,  say  that  .  .  .  not. 
narro,  relate. 
respondeo,  reply. 
scrlbo,  write. 
memini,  remember. 


scio,  know. 

cognosce,  learn,  find  out. 

sentio,  perceive. 

audio,  hear. 

video,  see. 

comperio,  find  out. 

puto,  think. 

iudico,  judge. 

spero,  hope. 

confldo,  trust. 


[H.  642  ;  (523,  I)  ;  LM.  1020-1023  ;  A.  336,  1,2;  G.  527 ;  B.  314, 
i,33i,  I-] 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE.     SIMPLE  SENTENCES 


75 


161.  Review  carefully  108  and  109.  The  tenses  of  the 
infinitive  do  not  follow  the  tense  of  the  introductory  verb. 
They  only  denote  time  relative  to  that  of  the  main  verb. 
The  present  infinitive  describes  an  action,  as  going  on  at 
the  time  of  the  main  verb ;  the  perfect  as  prior  or  com- 
pleted ;  the  future  as  subsequent. 

The  student  will  be  aided  in  deciding  what  tense  of  the 
infinitive  to  use  in  a  given  indirect  statement,  if  he  will 
imagine  what  tense  was  used  in  the  direct  statement.  A 
present  indicative  in  the  direct  statement  becomes  present 
infinitive  in  the  indirect ;  an  imperfect,  perfect,  or  pluper- 
fect indicative  become  perfect  infinitive;  a  future  tense 
becomes  future  infinitive,  or  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  and 
the  subjunctive. 

Study  carefully  these  examples  : 


TENSE 

DIRECT  DISCOURSE 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 

(Present) 

videt  me  venire,  he  sees  that 

PRESENT 

venio,  /  am  coming. 

I  am  coming. 

(Past) 

vldit  me  venire,  he  saw  that 

I  was  coming. 

(Present) 

IMPERFECT 

veniebam,     /     was 

videt   me  venisse,  he  sees 

coming. 

that    I   came,    or    Jiavc 

PERFECT 

veni,   /  Jiave   come, 

come. 

or  /  came. 

(Past) 

PLUPERF. 

veneram,  I  had  come. 

vldit   me  venisse,  he  saw 

that  I  came,  or  had  come. 

76 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   I 


TENSE 

DIRECT  DISCOURSE 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 

(Present) 

videt  me  venturum  (esse), 

or  videt  fore  ut  veniam, 

FUTURE 

veniam,  I  shall  come. 

Jie  sees  tJiat  I  will  come. 

(Past) 

vldit  me  venturum  (esse), 

or  vldit  fore  ut  venlrem, 

he  saw  that  I  vvould  come. 

1.  If  a  verb  has  no  perfect  passive  participle,  its  future 
infinitive  must  be  represented  by  fore  ut  and  subjunctive. 

2.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  should  never  be  omitted 
in  Latin. 

162.  When  the  main  verb  in  the  direct  discourse  is  used 
in  any  one  of  the  following  constructions,  it  becomes  sub- 
junctive in  indirect  discourse,  and  not  infinitive. 

(1)  A  direct  question,  asked  for  an  answer: 

(Direct.)  cur  in  meas  possessiones  venis  ?  wJiy  do  you  come 
into  my  domain  ? 

(Indirect.)  Ariovistus  Caesari  respondit,  cur  in  suas  pos- 
sessiones venlret?  Ariovistus  replied  to  Caesar,  why  did 
he  come  into  his  domain  ? 

(2)  Any  imperative  form  : 

(Direct.)  noli  Aeduls  bellum  inferre,  do  not  make  war  upon 
the  Aeduans. 

(Indirect.)  postulavit,  ne  Aeduls  bellum  Inferret,  he  de- 
manded that  Jie  should  not  make  war  upon  the  Aeduans. 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.     SIMPLE   SENTENCES  77 

(Direct.)  cum  legione  veni,  come  with  a  legion. 

(Indirect.)  scrlbit  Labieno  cum  legione  veniat,  he  writes  to 

Labienus  to  come  (literally,  tJiat  he  should  come}  with  a 

legion. 

(3)  A  subjunctive  of  exhortation  (i  1 5),  or  wish  (128,  129), 
or  deliberation  (no),  remains  subjunctive  in  indirect  dis- 
course.' 

[H.  642,  3,  4 ;  (523,  II,  i,  HO  I  LM.  1023  ;  A.  338-339  I  G.  651,  652 ; 
B.  3i5»  '>  3>  3i6.] 

163.  If  the  direct  discourse  is  in  the  form  of  a  rhetorical 
question  (i.e.  one  that  is  asked  for  effect,  and  implies  its 
own  answer),  the  main  verb  becomes  infinitive  in  indirect 
discourse : 

(Direct.)  num  recentium  iniuriarum  memoriam  deponere 
possum  ?  can  I  lay  aside  the  memory  of  recent  wrongs  ? 

(Indirect.)  Caesar  respondit,  num  recentium  iniuriarum 
memoriam  se  deponere  posse  ?  Caesar  replied,  could  he 
lay  aside  tJie  memory  of  recent  wrongs  ? 

i.  It  is  often  hard  to  distinguish  between  a  real  and 
rhetorical  question.  It  often  depends  merely  on  the 
writer's  point  of  view. 

[H.642,2;  (523,11,2);  LM.  1024;  A.  338 ;  G.  651,  R.  i  ;  8.315,  2.] 

164.  Translate : 

1.  I  could  not  leave  the  city. 

2.  Quote  sentence  i  indirectly  after  dlxit. 

3.  We  told  him  not  to  wage  war  on  them. 

4.  Give  the  direct  discourse  of  sentence  3. 

5.  He  thought  that  he  was  going  home. 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 

6.  Caesar  replied  asking  what  did  he  intend l  to  do  ? 

7.  I  saw  who  was  coming. 

8.  Caesar  was  informed  that  the  enemy  would  not  flee. 

9.  He  trusted  that  I  would  not  be  able  to  come. 


LESSON   21 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.    COMPLEX   SENTENCES 

165..  A  complex  sentence  is  one  consisting  of  a  principal 
clause  and  one  or  more  dependent  clauses ;  as  "  if  he  comes, 
I  shall  go";  "we  waited  until  we  saw  her";  "the  man 
whom  I  saw  is  a  German."  The  dependent  verbs  are 
italicized. 

1 66.  When  a  complex  sentence  is  indirectly  quoted,  its 
principal  or  main  verb  follows  the  rules  stated  in  160,  162, 
163.     Its  dependent  verb  follows  this  law  : 

Each  dependent  verb  becomes  subjunctive.  Its  tense  de- 
pends upon  the  tense  of  the  introductory  verb  of  saying, 
thinking,  etc.,  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  sequence 
of  tenses  (131). 

[H.  643;  (524)  ;  LM.  1026;  A.  336,  2,  336,  B;  G.  650,  654;  B.  314, 
1,318.] 

167.  Pronouns  in  Indirect  Discourse.  —  In  changing  from 
direct  to  indirect  discourse,  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second 
persons  are  generally  changed  to  pronouns  of  the  third 
person.     The*  reflexive  pronouns  (65,  i,  2,  66)  refer  either 
to  the  subject  of  the  introductory  verb,  or  to  the  subject  of 
the  verb  of  their  own  clause. 

1  Intend '=  volo,  or  in  animo  habeo. 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE.     COMPLEX   SENTENCES 


79 


vir  quern  vldi  meus  amlcus 
est,  the  man  whom  I  saw 
is  my  friend. 


168.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  changes  of  a 
dependent  clause : 

DIRECT  DISCOURSE  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 

(Present) 

dlcit  virum  quern  vlderit 
suum  amicum  esse,  he  says 
that  the  man  whom  he  saw 
is  his  friend. 

(Past) 

dixit  virum  quern  vidisset 
suum  amicum  esse,  he  said 
that  the  man  whom  he  saw 
(or  had  seen}  was  his 
friend. 

169.  When  conditional  sentences  are  quoted  indirectly, 
the  following  facts  should  be  noted : 

(1)  The  condition  (or  protasis),  being  a  dependent  clause, 
is  always  subjunctive. 

(2)  The  conclusion  (or  apodosis),  being  a  main  clause, 
becomes  the  infinitive,  unless  it  is  in  the  form  that  would 
change  to  the  subjunctive  (162). 

(3)  The    conclusion    of    a    less   vivid    future    condition 
becomes  the  ftitnre  infinitive.     Hence  it  is  impossible  to 
distinguish  vivid   and   less  vivid   future  conditions  when 
quoted  indirectly. 

(4)  The  condition  of  a  contrary-to-fact  condition  never 
changes  its  tense. 

(5)  The  conclusion  of  a  contrary-to-fact  condition  be- 
comes, 

1.  if  active,  the  infinitive  form  obtained  by  combining  the 

participle  in  -urus  with  fuisse. 

2.  if   passive,  or  without  a  supine  stem,  the   periphrase 

futurum  fuisse  ut  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 


8o 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART    I 


EXAMPLES  OF  CONDITIONS  IN  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 


KIND  OF 

CONDITION 

DIRECT  DISCOURSE 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 

(Present) 

dlcit,  si  hoc  faciant,  bene 

si  hoc  faciunt,  bene 

esse,  he  says  that,  if  they 
do  this,  it  is  well. 

SIMPLE 

est,    if   tJiey   do 

this,    it   is  well. 

(Past) 

dixit,  si  hoc  facerent,  bene 

esse,  he  said  that,  if  they 

did  this,  it  was  zvell. 

(  Present) 

dicit,   si  hoc  faciant,  bene 

futurum,  he  says  that,  if 

si  hoc  facient,  bene 

they   do  this,   it  ivill  be 

VIVID 

erit,    if  they  do 

well. 

FUTURE 

this,    it  will  be 

(Past)  - 

well. 

dixit,  si  hoc  facerent,  bene 

futurum,  he  said  that,  if 

they  did  this,  it  ^cvould  be 

well. 

si  hoc  f  aciant,  bene 

LESS  VIVID 

sit,  if  they  should 

Latin  same  as  that  of  vivid 

FUTURE 

do  this,  it  would 

future  condition. 

.be  well. 

INDIRECT  DISCOURSE.     COMPLEX   SENTENCES  8 1 


EXAMPLES  OF  CONDITIONS  IN  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 


KIND  OF 
CONDITION 


DIRECT  DISCOURSE 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 


CONTRARY 
TO  FACT 


(Present  time) 

si  hoc  f  acerent,  bene 
esset,  if  they 
were  (now)  doing 
this,  it  would  be 
well. 


(Past  time) 

si  hoc  f  ecisset,  bene 
fuisset,  if  they 
had  done  this,  it 
would  have  been 
well. 


dlcit  (or  dlxit),  si  hoc  face- 
rent,  bene  f  uturum  fuisse 

(rarely  esse),  he  said  (or 
says)  that,  if  they  were 
doing  this,  it  would  be 
well.  (The  tense  of  the 
verb  of  saying  does  not 
affect  the  condition.) 
dlcit  (or  dlxit),  si  hoc  fecis- 
sent,  futurum  fuisse  ut 
bene  esset,  he  says  (or 
said}  that,  if  they  had 
done  this,  it  would  have 
been  well. 


[H.  646,  647;    (527);   LM.  1034-1040;   A.  337;   G.  656-659;   B. 
3I9-32L] 

170.    Translate : 

1.  He  said  he  would  do  it,  if  I  would  help  him. 

2.  Wait  until  the  enemy  arrive. 

3.  Quote  sentence  2  indirectly  after  dixit. 

4.  I  think  that  I  know  what  you  did. 

5.  If  Caesar  had  been  present,  we  would  not  have  been 
defeated. 

6.  Quote  sentence  5  indirectly  after  scio. 

7.  He  hoped  that  we  would  refrain  from  injuring  her. 

LATIN   PROSE   COM1'.  —  6 


82  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

8.  He  replied  that,  if  we  needed  help,  we  ought  to  have 
come  to  him. 

9.  They  informed  Caesar  that  they  had  been  sent  to 
learn  about  this  very  thing. 

LESSON    22 

CONCESSION.     PROVISO.     CAUSE.     CHARACTERISTIC.     REVIEW 
OF  RELATIVE  CLAUSES 

171.    Clauses  of  concession,  introduced  in   English  by 
although,  are  generally  expressed  in  Latin  by 

1.  Quamquam,  although,  and  the  indicative,; 

2.  Quamvis,  cum,  although,  and  the  subjunctive; 

3.  Etsl,  etiamsl,  tametsi,  even  if,  with  the  same  construc- 

tion as  si.     The  indicative4s~Biare  common. 


EXAMPLES : — 
quamquam  f  estlnas,  non  est  mora  longa,  although  you  are  in 

haste,  the  delay  is  not  long. 
quamvls  sis  molestus,  numquam  te  esse  confitebor  malum, 

altJiougJi  you  may  be  troublesome,  I  shall  naver  confess 

that  you  are  an  evil. 
cum  primi  ordines  concidissent,  tamen  acerrime  reliqui  re- 

sistebant,  although  the  first  ranks  had  fallen,  still  the 

others  resisted  vigorously. 

[H.  585,  586,  I,  II;  (515);  LM.  872,  875;   A.  313;  G.  603-606; 
B.  309.] 

172.   Dum,  modo,  dummodo,  if  only,  provided  that,  intro- 
ducing a  proviso,  take  the  subjunctive  : 
oderint,  dum  metuant,  let  them  hate,  provided  (if  only)  they 
fear. 

[H.  587;  (513,!);  LM.  920;  A.  314;  0.573;  B.  310.] 


CONCESSION.    PROVISO.    CAUSE.    CHARACTERISTIC,  ETC.     83 

DIFFERENT  USES  OF  DUM 
Review  102,  2,  156. 

'  =     while,          present  indicative. 

(  ( i)  Indicative  to  denote  actual  event. 

-     until,        \  (2)  Subjunctive  to  express  anticipa- 
dum  -\ 

I  tion  or  expectancy. 

f  provided.  1 

-\    -r      i       f  subjunctive. 
\ifonly,     j 

173.    A  clause  that  denotes  cause  may  be  expressed  as 
follows : 

1.  By  quod,  quia,   quoniam,   and   the  indicative,   when 
the  reason  is  that  of  tJie  writer  or  speaker ;  with  the  sub- 
junctive, when  the  reason  is  regarded  as  that  of  another. 

Aedui  Caesar!  gratias  egerunt,  quod  se  perlculo  llberavisset, 

the  Aedui  thanked  Caesar  becazise  he  had  delivered  them 
from  danger.  (The  subjunctive,  llberavisset,  shows  that 
the  reason  is  that  of  the  Aedui,  not  the  writer's  reason.) 
quoniam  supplicatio  decreta  est,  celebratote  illos  dies,  since 
a  thanksgiving  has  been  decreed,  celebrate  those  days. 
(The  reason  is  that  of  the  writer.) 

2.  By  cum  and  the  subjunctive  : 

quae  cum  ita  sint,  perge,  since  these  things  are  so,  proceed. 

3.  Sometimes  by  the  participle.     See  87,  3. 

4.  By  a  relative  and  the  subjunctive. 

6  fortunate  adulescens,  qui  tuae  virtutis  Homerum  praeco- 
nem  inveneris,  O  fortunate  youth,  since  you  Jiave  found 
a  Homer  as  tJie  herald  of  your  valor. 

[H.  588,  598;  (516,517);   LM.  851,  863;  A.  321,326;  0.538-541; 
B.  286.] 


84  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART  I 

174.  Relative  of  Characteristic.  —  The  simplest  use  of 
a  relative  clause  is  to  state  a  fact  about  the  antecedent,  as : 
puer,  quern  vldl,  adest,  the  boy,  whom  I  saw,  is  Jiere.     The 
indicative  mood  is  then  used.     When,  however,  the  relative 
clause  expresses  an  essential  quality  or  characteristic  of  an 
indefinite  antecedent,  the  subjunctive  is  used,  as  nemo  est 
qul  dicat,  there  is  nobody  who  says,  etc. 

The  relative  clause  of  characteristic  is  necessary  to  complete  the 
meaning  of  the  sentence ;  therefore,  to  leave  it  out  would  destroy  the 
sentence.  A  relative  with  the  indicative,  however,  merely  expresses 
an  additional  fact  about  the  antecedent ;  therefore,  it  may  be  omitted 
and  a  complete  statement  still  remains.  Compare  the  two  examples 
just  given.  In  the  first,  leave  out  "whom  I  saw,"  and  a  complete  state- 
ment "the  boy  is  here"  remains.  In  the  second,  omit  "who  says," 
and  the  rest  of  the  sentence  "there  is  nobody"  seems  incomplete,  as 
we  naturally  expect  a  clause  to  fill  out  the  meaning.  This  test,  then, 
will  often  help  the  student  to  determine  whether  a  given  relative  clause 
expresses  an  essential  characteristic  : 
quae  civitas  est  quae  non  everti  possit  ?  what  state  is  there  which  can- 

not  be  overthrown? 

The  relative  of  characteristic  is  especially  common  after  such  expres- 
sions as : 

sunt  qui,  there  are.  some  who. 
multi  sunt  qui,  there  are  many  who. 

nemo  est  qui,    1 

'     .   \  there  is  no  one  who. 
nullus  est  qui,  J 

quis  est  qui,  who  is  there  who  f 
s51us  est  qui,  he  is  the  only  one  who. 

And  others. 

i.    Dignus,  worthy ;  indignus,.  unworthy ;   aptus,  fit ;   idoneus,  suit- 
able, are  often  followed  by  a  relative  and  the  subjunctive, 
idoneus  qui  impetret,y£/  to  obtain. 

[H.  591,  i,  5,  6,  7  5    (503)  5   LM.  836-838  ;  A.  320,  a,  b,  f  ;   G.  631, 
i,  2;  B.  283,  i,  2;  282,  3.] 

175.  Relative  clauses  are  more  frequent  in  Latin  than 
in  English.     Their  various  uses  are  mentioned  below : 


CONCESSION.     PROVISO.     CAUSE.     CHARACTERISTIC,   ETC.      85 

1 .  With  the  indicative  to  state  a  descriptive  fact  about 
the  antecedent.     See  174. 

2.  With  the  subjunctive  to  express  the  essential  charac- 
teristic.    See  174. 

3.  With  the  subjunctive  to  denote  purpose.    See  143,  i. 

4.  With  the  subjunctive  to  denote  result.     See  145,  i. 

5.  With   the   subjunctive  to  express  cause  and  conces- 
sion.    See  173,  4. 

6.  A  relative  pronoun  may  be  used  instead  of  si,  if,  to 
form  the  protasis  of  any  one  of  the  four  classes  of  con- 
ditional sentences.     See  126. 

(Simple.)  qulcumque  hoc  facit,  errat,  whoever  does  this  makes 
a  mistake,     (qulcumque  =  si  quis,  if  any  one.) 

(Contrary  to  fact.)  qulcumque  hoc  fecisset,  errasset,  whoever 
had  done  this  would  have  made  a  mistake. 
Such  sentences  are  called  conditional  relative  sentences. 

176.    Translate: 

1.  I  sent  a  messenger  to  inform  him. 

2.  Since  you  think  it  is  best,  I  will  go. 

3.  He  was  put  to  death,  because  (they  said)  he  had  be- 
trayed his  country. 

4.  Cicero  was  worthy  *  of  being  elected  consul. 

5.  He  went  into  the  front  ranks  although  he  had  no 
shield. 

6.  There  are  many  soldiers  who  like  to  linger  around 
the  camp. 

7.  He  came  to  help  me  in  spite  of  the  fact  that 2  he  was 
my  enemy. 

8.  The  Gauls  with  whom  Caesar  fought  were  very  brave. 

9.  I  will  do  it,  provided  you  help  me. 

iSee  174,  i. 

2  in  spite  of  the  fact  that.     What  conjunction  expresses  this  idea? 


86 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  I 


LESSON    23 

REVIEW  AND   SIGHT.  PRACTICE 
177.    Review  the  grammatical  principles  of  141-175. 


178.    Learn  thoroughly  the 
words : 

1.  claudo. 

2.  facilis. 

3.  transeo. 

4.  rogo. 

5.  telum. 

6.  cohortor. 

7.  patior. 

8.  sino. 

9.  credo. 

10.  piger. 

1 1 .  desero. 

12.  posco. 

13.  resisto. 

14.  praeceps. 

15.  exspecto. 

1 6.  polliceor. 

17.  finis. 

1 8.  impetro. 

19.  iuvo. 


meanings  of  the  following 

20.  mando. 

21.  iubeo. 

22.  porta. 

23.  port  us. 

24.  vlto. 

25.  subito,  repente. 

26.  moneo. 

27.  iacio. 

28.  conor. 

29.  constituo. 

30.  prohibeo. 

3 1 .  recuso. 

32.  frumentum. 

33.  morof. 

34.  morior. 

35.  spero. 

36.  fldo,  confldo. 

37.  idoneus. 

38.  prodo. 


179.  Let  the  instructor  form  several  original  sentences 
in  English  from  the  words  in  178,  illustrating  the  gram- 
matical principles  of  141-175.  These  sentences  may  be 
given  for  oral  drill  or  a  written  exercise. 


PART    II 

CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 

BOOK  I 

NOTE.  The  student  should  not  depend  on  the  English-Latin  vocabulary  for  the 
Latin  words.  The  Latin  text  upon  which  each  exercise  is  based  should  always 
be  consulted  for  the  proper  words  or  phrases. 


1 80 


CHAPTER   I 


a.  hi  lingua  inter  se  differunt. 

b.  proximl  Germanls. 

c.  minime  .  .  .  saepe. 

d.  initium  capit  a. 


a.  these  differ  from  one  another 

in  language. 

b.  nearest  the  Germans. 

c.  very  seldom. 

d.  begins  at. 


1.  There  are  three  parts  in  Gaul  as  a  whole. 

2.  All  of  us  differed  from  one  another  in  many  ways.1 

3.  The  Belgae  are  nearest  the  Rhine. 

4.  The   Gauls   very   seldom    surpass   the   Germans   in 
bravery. 

5.  It  has  been  said  that  Gaul  begins  at  the  river  Rhine. 


181 


CHAPTER   II 


a.  civitati  persuasit  ut  exirent. 

b.  his  rebus  fiebat. 

c.  una  ex  parte. 


a.  he   persuaded   the   state  to 

go  forth. 

b.  the  result  of  this  was. 

c.  on  one  side. 


1  wa^s  =  things. 
87 


88 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


1.  Orgetorix  persuaded  the  Helvetians  to  get  possession 
of  Gaul. 

2.  The  Rhine  bounds  the  Helvetians  on  one  side. 

3.  It  was  very  easy  to  form1  a  conspiracy. 

4.  The  result  of  this  was  that  Caesar  waged  war  on  the 
Helvetians. 


182 


CHAPTER    III 


a.  quam  maximas. 

b.  ad  eas  res  conficiendas. 


c.  non  esse  dubium  quin 
plurimum  Helvetii  pos- 
sent. 


a.  as  great  as  possible. 

b.  to  accomplish  these  things, 

or,  for  the  purpose 
of  carrying  out  these 
plans. 

c.  that  there  was  no  doubt  that 

the  Helvetians  were  the 
most  powerful. 


1.  They  got  together  as  many  carts  as  possible. 

2.  Orgetorix  was  chosen  to  undertake  this  embassy. 

3.  He   persuaded   them   to   exchange2   an   oath-bound 
pledge. 

4.  There   is   no   doubt   that   the    Helvetians   are   very 
powerful. 


183 


CHAPTER   IV 


a.  poenam  sequi  oportebat. 

b.  ne  causam  diceret  se  eripuit. 


c.  neque  abest  suspicio  quin 
ipse  sibi  mortem  con- 
sciverit. 


a.  punishment  must   (had  to) 

follow. 

b.  he      saved     himself     from 

pleading  his  case. 

c.  and    there    is    a    suspicion 


that        he 
suicide. 


committed 


1  form  =  make. 


2  Do  not  use  the  infinitive. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  89 

1.  Orgetorix  ought  not  to  be  burned. 

2.  He  gathered  together  all  the  friends  that  he  had. 

3.  He  will  save  himself  from  pleading  his  case. 

4.  The  Helvetians  think  that  he  committed  suicide. 


184  CHAPTER  V 


a.  e  flnibus  suis  exeunt. 

b.  paratiores    ad    omnia    peri- 

cula  subeunda. 


a.  they  emigrate. 

b.  more   ready  to  undergo  all 

dangers. 


1.  The  Helvetii  nevertheless  attempted  to  emigrate. 

2.  Each  man  was  more  ready  to  take  grain. 

3.  They  persuaded  their  neighbors  to  adopt  the  same 
plan. 

185  CHAPTER  VI 


a.  bono    animo     in     populum 

Romanum. 

b.  L.  Plsone,  A.  Gabmio  con- 

sulibus. 


a.  friendly   (or  well)   disposed 

toward   the  Roman-  peo- 
pie. 

b.  in  the  consulship  of  Lucius 

Piso  and  Aulus  Gabinius. 


1.  The  road  is  so1  narrow  that  carts  can  hardly  be 
hauled  one  by  one. 

2.  The  Helvetii  thought  that  the  Allobroges  were  not 
well  disposed  toward  Caesar. 

3.  In  our  consulship  they  were  compelled  to  go  through 
their  territories. 

4.  When  the  bridge  had  been  built,2  they  got  everything 
ready. 

1  tarn.  2  facio. 


QO  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 


186  CHAPTER  VII 


a.  Helve  til  certiores  fact!  sunt. 


b.  legates  mittunt  qui  dicerent. 

c.  dum  milites  convenlrent. 


a.  the  Helvetii  were  informed 

(or  learned). 

b.  they  sent  ambassadors  to  say. 

c.  until     the    soldiers     should 

assemble. 


1.  Caesar  set  out  from  Geneva. 

2.  He  will  send  an  ambassador  to  inform  them. 

3.  Men  of  unfriendly  spirit  will  not  refrain  from  wrong- 
doing. 

4.  He  will  deliberate  until  they  return. 

5.  Caesar  is  informed  of  this. 

187  CHAPTER   VIII 


a.  milia  passimm  decem. 

b.  negat  se  posse. 

c.  hoc  conatu  destiterunt. 


a.  ten  miles. 

b.  he  says  he  cannot. 

c.  they  gave  up  this  attempt. 


1.  A  wall  was  extended  for  sixteen  miles. 

2.  Caesar  says  they  cannot  cross  without  his  l  consent. 

3.  After  the  redoubts  had  been  fortified,2  the  ambassa- 
dors came  back. 

4.  The  soldiers  will  not  give  up  the  fortification  of  the 
camp. 

188  CHAPTER   IX 


a.  SequanTs     invitis,     Ire     non 

poterant. 

b.  Orgetorigis    filiam     in    ma- 

trimonium  duxerat. 


a.  if  the  Sequani  were  unwill- 

ing, they  could  not  go. 

b.  he  had  married  the  daugh- 

ter of  Orgetorix. 


1  To  whom  does  this  refer  ?  2  Use  the  participle. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


.  I.    The  Helvetii  cannot  emigrate,  if  Caesar  is  unwilling. 

2.  By  the  intercession  of  Dumnorix  they  could  persuade 
them. 

3.  He  wished  to  marry  her. 

4.  They  exchanged  as  many  hostages  as  possible. 


189 


CHAPTER   X 


Helvetiis  esse  in  animo. 
magno    cum    periculo    pro- 

vinciae  futurum. » 
munition!    Labienum    prae- 

ficit. 


a.  that  the  Helvetii  intend. 

b.  that      it     would     be     very 

dangerous  for  the  province. 

c.  he   puts   Labienus   in  com- 

mand of  the  fortification. 


1.  The  Helvetii  intended  to  do  this. 

2.  The  Helvetii  perceived  that  it  would  be  very  danger- 
ous for  them  to  march  J  through  the  province. 

3.  He  put  a  lieutenant  in  command  of  the  legion. 

4.  In  three  days  he  arrived  among  the  Allobroges. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS    I-X 

190.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  declensions  of  nouns  and  adjectives, 
and  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  : 


finis. 

flnitimus. 

flumen. 


4.  copia,  sing,  and  pi. 

5.  tempus. 

6.  iter. 

7.  animus,  sing,  and  pi. 

8.  miles. 


9.  legio. 

10.  exercitus. 

u.  pars,  several  meanings. 

12.  res  frumentaria. 

13.  civitas. 

14.  proelium. 

15.  singuli. 

1 6.  omnis,  sing,  and  pi. 


1  Do  not  use  infinitive;  see  text. 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


1 7.  quisque. 

1 8.  reliquus. 

19.  alius. 

20.  alter. 

21.  unus. 

22.  magnus,  compare. 

23.  multus,  compare. 

24.  nullus. 

25.  nonnullus. 

26.  ullus. 

27.  superior. 

28.  contendo. 

29.  transeo. 

30.  gero. 

31.  prohibeo. 

32.  persuadeo. 

33.  consists . 


34.  constituo. 

35.  Instituo. 
3$.  proficlscor. 
37-  cogo. 

38.  sequor. 

39.  iubeo. 

40.  impero. 

41.  impetro. 

42.  conficio. 

43.  utor. 

44.  convenio. 

45.  exlstimo. 

46.  praesum. 

47.  antecedo  1  with  the 

48.  praecedol     a^c. 

49.  praesto. 

50.  praeficio. 


191.  Review   thoroughly    the    following    principles    of 
syntax : 

1.  Limit  of  motion,  17. 

2.  Extent  of  space  and  duration  of  time,  16. 

3.  Dative  with  compound  verbs,  33. 

4.  Ablative  with  utor,  etc.,  44. 

•5.    Indirect  statements  —  main  clause,  160. 

6.  Construction  with  persuaded,  32,  147. 

7.  Construction  after  verbs  of  commanding,  147,  148. 

192.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  190  and  the  constructions 
of  191.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  93 


193  CHAPTER   XI 


a.  oppida        expugnari        non 

debuerint. 

b.  sibi  nihil  esse  reliqul. 

c.  Caesar    non     expectandum 

sibi  statuit. 


a.  their    towns    ought    not    to 

have  been  captured. 

b.  that  they  had   nothing  left. 

c.  Caesar     decided     that     he 

ought  not  to  wait. 


1.  Their  fields  ought l  *  not  to  be  devastated. 

2.  We  have  nothing  left  except  our  fields. 

3.  The  Aedui  ought1  to  have  been  able  to  defend  them- 
selves and  their  possessions. 

4.  We  must  not  wait 

194  CHAPTER   XII 


a.  ea     prmceps    poenas    per- 

solvit. 

b.  Plsonem      eodem      proelio 

quo      Cassium      interfe- 
cerant. 


a.  that   was    the    first   to    pay 

the  penalty. 

b.  they  had  killed  Piso  in  the 

same  battle  with  Cassius. 


1.  I  could  not  judge  by2  looking  at  it  in  which  direction 
the  Saone  flowed. 

2.  They  were  not  informed  that  the  legions  had  started 
from  camp. 

3.  Caesar   was   the   first   to   inflict   a   disaster   on    the 
Helvetii. 

4.  Cassius  was  killed  in  the  same  battle  with  Piso. 

5.  Caesar  crossed  the  river  so  quickly3  that  the  enemy 
fled. 

*  These  numbers  in  the  foot-notes  refer  to  sections  of  this  book. 

1  See  in,  112.  8  celeriter. 

2  "  by  looking  at  it,"  use  a  single  word. 


94  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


195  CHAPTER   XIII 


a.  pontem  in  Arari  faciendum 

curat. 

b.  ne  committeret  ut  is   locus 

nomen  caperet. 


a.  he  has  a  bridge  built  over 

the  Saone. 

b.  let  him  not  cause  (or  allow) 

this  place   to   receive   its 


name. 


1.  Caesar  had  his  army  led  across  in  one  day. 

2.  Divico  said,  "  Remember1  our  valor." 

3.  "  If  you  remember  the  destruction  of  your  army,  you 
will  not  persist  in  war." 

4.  He  said  that,  if  Caesar  would  remember2  that  old 
disaster,  he  would  not  persist  in  war. 

196  CHAPTER   XIV 


a.  Caesar    respondit    sibi    mi- 

nus dubitationis  darl. 

b.  commissum  (esse)  a  se  qua 

re  timeret. 


c.   secundiores  res. 


a.  Caesar  replied  that  he  had 

less  hesitation. 

b.  that  he  had  done  anything 

to  make   him   afraid    (to 
be  afraid  of).  " 

c.  prosperity. 


1 .  I  have  done  nothing  to  be  afraid  of. 

2.  Caesar  says  that  he  will  remember  the  injuries  which 
they  have  inflicted. 

3.  Although  the  gods  grant  you   prosperity,  still  they 
will  punish  you  for  your  crimes. 

4.  Caesar  replied,  "  I  have  less  hesitation." 

5.  Caesar  thought  that  they  would  not  apologize  to  him 
for  the  wrongs  which  had  been  done. 

1  See  25.  2  Review  carefully  169. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


95 


197 

a.  alieno  loco. 

b.  pauci  de  nostris. 

c.  satis  habebat. 


CHAPTER   XV 


a.  on  unfavorable  ground. 

b.  a  few  of  our  men. 

c.  he  deemed  it  sufficient,  was 

satisfied. 

1.  He  sent  ahead  a  few  of :  the  cavalry  to  see  in  what 
direction  they  had  marched. 

2.  The  enemy  followed  so  eagerly  that  they  joined  battle 
on  unfavorable  ground. 

3.  Caesar  is  satisfied  to  harass  the  enemy's  rear. 


a.  ne  pabuli  quidem. 

b.  diem  ex  die. 

c.  magna  ex  parte. 


CHAPTER   XVI 

a.  not    even    of    fodder    (the 

emphatic   word  is  always 
placed  between). 

b.  from  day  to  day. 

c.  in    great    measure,    chiefly, 

very  largely. 

1.  Not  even   grain  could   be   brought   up  the  river  in 
boats. 

2.  Caesar  was  put  off  by  the  Aedui  from  day  to  day. 

3.  The  day  is  at  hand  when2  grain  ought  to  be  bought. 

4.  Although 8  the  war  had  been  undertaken  chiefly  be- 
cause of  the  entreaties  of  Liscus,  yet  Caesar  was  deserted. 


199 

a.  plurimum  valere. 


CHAPTER   XVII 


b.  hos  multitudinem    deterrere 
ne  frumentum  conferant. 


i  See  23,  i. 
«  "  although  . 


a.  to    have    very    great   influ- 

ence. 

b.  that  these  prevent  the  multi- 

tude from  bringing  grain. 


2  Do  not  use  cum,  see  text, 
undertaken,"  see  tam  .  .  .  hostibus  in  text. 


96  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

1.  Some  people  have  more  influence  than  the  officers. 

2.  They  said  that,  if  the  Romans  were  victorious,  they 
would  deprive  the  Aedui  of  their  liberty. 

3.  I  don't  doubt  that  Lincus  spoke  under 1  compulsion. 

4.  Caesar   perceived   that   they  were   frightened   from 
doing  this. 

200  CHAPTER   XVIII 


a.  pluribus  praesentibus. 

b.  summam  in  spem  venire. 


c.   quern  auxilio  Caesari  Aedui 


miserant. 


a.  in  the  presence  of  many. 

b.  that    he    had    the    greatest 

hopes. 

c.  which   the   Aedui   had  sent 

to  help  Caesar. 

1.  Caesar  did  not  discuss  these  matters  in  Dumnorix's 
presence. 

2.  Dumnorix  was  a  man  of  great  liberality.2 

3.  When  I  bid,  who  will  dare  bid  against  me  ? 

4.  I  have  learned  that  Dumnorix  did  not  favor  Caesar,3 
because  he  was  a  Roman. 

5.  I  have  very  great  hopes  of  buying  up  the  revenues 
at  a  low  price.4 

6.  I  have  come  to  help  you. 

7.  A  few  days  ago  the  cavalry  had  fled. 

201  CHAPTER   XIX 


a.  satis  esse  causae  arbitraba- 

tur  qua   re  in  eum    ani- 
madverteret. 

b.  ne  offenderet  verebatur. 


c.   hortatur  ut  de  eo  statuat. 


a.  he    thought    he    had    suffi- 

cient   reason  for  punish- 
ing him. 

b.  he   feared    that    he    would 

offend. 

c.  he    urges    him     to    punish 

him. 


1  "  under  compulsion  "=having  been  compelled. 

2  See  49,  22.  8  See  32.  4  See  50. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  97 

1.  The  Romans   have   sufficient   reason   for  punishing 
Dumnorix. 

2.  I  will  have *  him  called  before  me. 

3.  We  are  afraid  that   Caesar   will   punish    Dumnorix 
without  the  knowledge2  of  his  brother. 

4.  I  urged  him  to  converse  with  you. 

5.  What  did  they  say  in  my  presence? 

202  CHAPTER   XX 


a.  nee  quemquam  ex  eo  plus 

quam  se  doloris  capere. 

b.  qua  ex  re  futurum  (ut  and 

subj.) 

c.  tanti  eius   apud   se   gratiam 

esse  ostendit. 


a.  and  that  no  one  feels  more 

pain    in   consequence    of 
this  than  himself. 

b.  that  the  result  of  this  would 

be  that,  etc. 

c.  he  shows  that  his  regard  for 

him  is  so  great. 


1.  No  one   felt   more   pain   as   a   result   of   this   than 
Diviciacus. 

2.  While  I  had  very  little  power  at  home,  he  used  all 
his  resources  to  my  destruction. 

3.  My  regard  for  you  is  so  great,  that  I  urge  you  to 
avoid 3  all  suspicion. 

4.  The  result  of  it  was  that  he  pardoned  the  wrong  for 
his  brother's  sake. 

5.  I  did  not  know  with  whom  he  was  talking. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XI-XX 

203.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs,  and 
declensions  of  nouns. 

1  See  in  text  —  quod  obsides  .  .  .  curasset. 

2  Cf.  inscientibus  ipsis  in  text.  3  DO  not  use  infinitive. 

LATIN   PROSE  COMP. —  7 


98 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART   II 


1.  debeo. 

2.  exspecto. 

3.  statuo. 

4.  adgredior. 

5.  intern*  cio. 

6.  committo,  several  mean- 

ings. 

7.  coepi. 

8.  consuesco. 

9.  discedo. 

10.  polliceor. 

1 1 .  cado. 

1 2.  praetermitto. 

13.  se  conferre. 

14.  relinquo. 

15.  queror. 

1 6.  quaere. 

1 7.  impedio. 

1 8.  dubito. 

19.  cognosce  (de,  not  ace.). 

20.  impedlmentum. 

21.  dubitatio. 

22.  calamitas. 

23.  meminl.    . 

24.  reminlscor. 

25.  praesidium. 


26.  concede.     Cf.  no.  9. 

27.  alienus. 

28.  paucl. 

29.  agmen  novissimum. 

30.  mille. 

3 1 .  cotldie. 

32.  publice. 

33.  frlgus. 

34.  prex. 

35.  concilium. 

36.  consilium. 

37.  nemo,  nulllus. 

38.  pretium. 

39.  equester. 

40.  supplicium. 

4 1 .  lacrima. 

42.  ops,  sing,  and  pi. 

43.  pernicies. 

44.  vulgus  (note  gender). 

45.  dolor. 

46.  custos. 

47.  quisquam. 

48.  quisque. 

49.  studium. 

50.  llberl. 


204.    Review   thoroughly   the    following    principles    of 
syntax : 

1.  Genitive  of  the  whole,  23. 

2.  Ablative  of  separation,  39. 

3.  Dative  of  purpose;  dative  of  agent;  37,  95. 

4.  Constructions  with  oportet  and  debeo,  ill,  112. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


99 


5.  Passive    periphrastic    conjunction ;    gerundive    with 
curd,  95-1 

6.  Clauses  of  result,  144,  145. 

205.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  203  and  the  constructions 
of  204.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


206 


CHAPTER   XXI 


a.  qui  cognoscerent  misit. 

b.  qui    rei    militaris    peritissi- 

mus  habebatur. 


a.  he  sent  men  to  ascertain. 

b.  who    was    considered    very 

skillful  in  military  affairs. 


1.  Scouts  informed  Caesar  that  the  ascent  was  easy. 

2.  He  will  send  men  to  find  out  where  the  enemy  have 
gone. 

3.  He  said  that  Considius  was  considered  skillful  in  mili- 
tary matters. 

4.  Show  me  what  your  plan  is. 


207 


CHAPTER   XXII 


a.  equo  admisso. 

b.  multo  die. 

c.  quo  consueYat  intervallo. 


a.  at  full  speed. 

b.  late  in  the  day. 

c.  at  the  usual  interval. 


1.  He  found  out  that  the '  enemy  were  coming  at  full 
speed. 

2.  Late  in  the  day,  Caesar  was  informed  that  the  enemy 
were  not  more  than  a  mile  from  his  camp. 


1  When  no  direct  references  are  given  to  Part  I,  the  student  should  search  the 
text  and  refer  to  his  grammar  for  the  desired  construction. 


100  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

3.  Do  not  join  battle  unless  they  attack  us. 

4.  He  seized  1  the  mountain  and  awaited  the  enemy. 

5.  They  followed  at  their  usual,  speed. 

208  CHAPTER   XXIII 


a.  biduum  supererat  cum  fru- 
mentum  metirl  opor- 
teret. 


b.  eo  magis. 


a.  two     days     remain,     within 

which  (before)  grain 
ought  to  be  measured 
out,  etc. 

b.  the  more  so,  all  the  more. 


1.  The  commander  ought  to  look  out  for  supplies. 

2.  The  more  so  because  only  a  day  remains  before  we 
must  begin  battle. 

3.  I  think  they  have  changed  their  plan2  and  will  cut 
us  off  from  supplies. 

209  CHAPTER   XXIV 


a.  in  summo  mgo. 

b.  sub«prlmam  nostram  aciem 

successerunt. 


a.  on  top  of  the  ridge. 

b.  they  advanced  close  to  our 

first  line. 


1.  He  sends  two  legions  to  fill  up  the  top  of  the  hill. 

2.  Order  your  men  to  follow  with  the  baggage. 

3.  They  will  form3  a  phalanx  and  advance  close  to  our 
line. 

210  CHAPTER   XXV 


a.  in  eos  impetum  fecerunt. 

b.  Gallis   magno    erat   impedi- 

mento. 

c.  conversa  signa  intulerunt. 


a.  they  attacked  them. 

b.  the     Gauls      were      greatly 

hindered. 

c.  they      faced      about      and 

charged. 


1  Do  not  use  the  indicative.  2  "  changed  their  plan,"  use  abl.  absolute. 

3  Do  not  use  the  indicative. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  IOI 

1.  Caesar  removed  all  of  the  horses  in  order  to  equalize 
the  danger. 

2.  We  are  greatly  hindered  in  fighting,  because  we  can- 
not throw  away  our  shields. 

3.  When   we    attacked    them,   they   withdrew    to   the 
mountain. 

4.  They  guarded  those  who1  had  been  conquered. 

5.  Face  about  and  renew  the  fight. 

211  CHAPTER   XXVI 


a.  diu  atque  acriter  pugnatum 

est. 

b.  ad  multam  noctem. 

c.  se    eodem    loco    quo    Hel- 

vetios  habiturum. 


a.  long      and      fiercely     they 

fought. 

b.  till  late  at  night. 

c.  that     he     would     consider 

them    in   the   same   light 
as  the  Helvetians. 


1.  As  our  men  came  up,  the  enemy  fought  with  them 
long  into  the  night. 

2.  If  you  help  them  in  any  way,  I  will  consider  you  in 
the  same  light  as  I  do  2  the  enemy. 

3.  There  will  be  a  vigorous  fight  around  the  baggage. 

4.  Letters  are  sent  to   the    Lingones   not  to  help  the 
Helvetians. 

5.  Our  men  delayed  burying3  their  dead  for  many  days. 

212  CHAPTER   XXVII 


a,  dum  ea  conquiruntur. 

b.  prima  nocte. 


a.  while     they   were      hunting 

these  up. 

b.  at  nightfall. 


1  Do  not  use  the  relative.    See  87.  2  "  I  do,"  omit. 

8  use  prep,  and  no-m. 


IO2 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 


1.  When  he  had  demanded  their  arms,  with  tears  they 
obeyed. 

2.  While  they  were  being  punished,  they  wept. 

3.  At  the  beginning  of  night,   they  did  not  surrender 
their  arms. 

4.  I  think  they  will  leave  camp. 

213        CHAPTERS   XXVIII    AND   XXIX 


a.  Helvetios  revertl  iussit.    • 

b.  Allobrogibus     imperavit     ut 

facerent. 

c.  parem  atque. 


a.  he   ordered   the    Helvetians 

•  to  return. 

b.  he   ordered    the   Allobroges 

to  furnish. 

c.  same  as. 


1.  I  will  order1  them  to  hand  over  the  fugitives. 

2.  The  Aedui  requested  him  to  grant  this. 

3.  I  ordered2  them  to  be  received  in  surrender. 

4.  They  have  the  same  liberty  as  we  have. 

5.  The  sum  total  is  many  thousand. 


214 


CHAPTER   XXX 


a.  petierunt   uti    id    facere    li- 

ceret. 

b.  iure  iurando  ne  quis    enun- 

tiaret  inter  se  sanxerunt. 


a.  they   begged   permission   to 

do  this. 

b.  they    ordained   by   an   oath 

with  one  another  that  no 
one  should  disclose. 


1.  At  the  completion  of  the  war,  Caesar  got  possession 
of  many  states. 

2.  Although3  I  have  inflicted  punishment  on  you,  still 
you  congratulate  me. 

3.  I  beg  permission  to  appoint  a  council. 


1  Use  impero. 


2  UseJubep. 


3  See  171. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 


103 


4.  Ordain  under  oath  that  no  one  make  war  on  the 
Romans. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XXI-XXX 

215.  Review  thoroughly  the  meaning  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs,  and  the 
declensions  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  reverto. 

2.  licet. 

3.  habeo,  in  pass. 

4.  peto. 

5.  posco. 

6.  postulo. 

7.  consido. 

8.  confldo. 

9.  cohortor. 

10.  audeo. 

1 1 .  sustineo. 

12.  bellum  infero,  w.  dat.  or 

in  and  ace. 

13.  resisto. 

14.  intermitto. 

15.  permitto. 

1 6.  amitto. 

17.  redeo. 

1 8.  pareo. 

1 9.  moror. 

20.  morior. 

21.  aperio. 

22.  vereor. 

23.  dedo. 

24.  deditlcius. 


25.  deditio. 

26.  idem. 

27.  par. 

28.  similis. 

29.  slgnum. 

30.  rursus. 

31.  prope. 

32.  acies. 

33.  latus. 

34.  latus. 

35.  vulnus. 

36.  nuntius. 

37.  vesper. 

38.  ratio. 

39.  usus. 

40.  salus. 

41.  condicio. 

42.  atque,  see  82. 

43.  perltus.     imperitus, 

44.  communis. 

45.  opportunus. 

46.  medius. 

47.  quantus. 

48.  tantus. 

49.  acriter. 


104  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 

216.  Review   thoroughly   the   following    principles    of 
syntax : 

1.  Translations  of  the  ablative  absolute. 

2.  Ablative  of  degree  of  difference,  48. 

3.  Genitive  with  adjectives;  dative  with  adjectives,  24,  35. 

4.  Impersonal  verbs,  27.     (Consult  grammar.) 

5.  Double  accusative  with  verbs  of  asking,  etc.,  15. 

6.  Construction  with /<?/<?,  quaero,  postulo,  15,  I. 

7.  Relative  clauses,  175. 

217.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  215  and  the  constructions 
of  216.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 

218  CHAPTER   XXXI 


a.  semel  atque  iterum. 

b.  neque   recusaturos  quo   mi- 


nus essent. 


c.  qui  adduci  non  potuerit  ut 

iuraret. 

d.  nobilissimi  cuiusque. 

e.  de  omnibus  supplicium  su- 


mere. 


/.  deterrere    ne    maior    multi- 
tude traducatur. 


a.  again  and  again,  more  than 

once. 

b.  nor  refuse  to  be. 

c.  who  could  not   be   induced 

to  take  an  oath. 

d.  of  all  of  the  highest  rank. 

e.  to  inflict  punishment  on  all, 

to  punish  all. 

/.  to  frighten  a  greater  multi- 
tude from  crossing. 


1.  May  we  treat  with  you  about  what  they  said  1 

2.  Diviciacus  says  that  the  Germans  have  been  called 
in  by  the  Sequani. 

3.  We  have  been  defeated  1  again  and  again  and  have 
lost  very  many  men. 

1  Do  not  use  indicative. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR  1 05 

4.  He  says  that  those  who  were  very  powerful  have 
given  hostages. 

5.  We  won't  refuse  to  implore  aid  of  the  Romans. 

6.  You  are  the  only  one  who *  can't  be  induced  to  ask 
for  help. 

7.  Not  being  bound  2  by  an  oath,  I  will  come  to  Rome. 

8.  A  serious  disaster  befell  the  vanquished. 

9.  The  result  will  be  in  a  few  years  that  we  shall  all 
be  driven  out  of  this  place. 

10.  All  of  the  highest  rank  were  defeated. 

11.  If  everything  isn't  done  according  to  my  wish,  I 
shall  have  to  seek  other  dwellings. 

12.  Caesar  frightened  the  Germans  from  emigrating. 

13.  We  shall  punish  you. 

219  CHAPTER   XXXII 


a.  not  even  in  secret. 

b.  the  Sequani  must  endure  all 

tortures. 


a.  ne  in  occulto  quidem. 

b.  Sequanis     omnes    cruciatus 

essent  perferendi. 

1.  What  was  the  cause  of  this  behavior?3 

2.  I  asked  him  who  made  the  speech. 

3.  He  noticed  that  they  did  not  dare  even  to  complain. 

4.  We   ought  not  to  dread   his  cruelty  when   he   is 
absent.4 

220  CHAPTER   XXXIII 


a.  sibi  earn  rem  curae  futuram. 


b.  sibi    temperatures    qum  ex- 

irent. 

c.  quam  maturrime. 


a.  that  he  would  look  out  for 

this  matter. 

b.  that  they  would  refrain  from 

going  forth. 

c.  as  early  as  possible,  at    the 

earliest  possible  moment. 


i  See  174.  2  See  85,  3.  «  res. 

4  "  when  .  .  .  absent,"  use  one  word. 


106  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

1.  I  will  look  out  for  that. 

2.  It  will  be  dangerous  for  the  Romans,  if  the  Germans 
get  into  the  habit  of 1  crossing  the  Rhine. 

3.  Ariovistus -could  not  refrain  from  assuming  insolence. 

4.  I  think    I  'ought   to   undertake   this   matter   at  the 
earliest  possible  moment. 


221  CHAPTER   XXXIV 


a.  placuit  ei  ut  mitteret. 

b.  quid  Caesari  negoti  esset. 


a.  he  resolved  to  send. 

b.  what  business  Caesar  had. 


1.  I  am  resolved  to  treat  with  you. 

2.  If  I  had  wished2  anything,  I  would  have  sent  am- 
bassadors. 

3.  Quote  2  indirectly  after  dlxit.3 

4.  What  business  have  you  in  Gaul  anyhow  ? 

222  CHAPTER    XXXV 


a.  hanc  gratiam  referret. 

b.  sibi    perpetuam      amlcitiam 

cum  eo  futuram. 


a.  he  made  this  return. 

b.  that   he  would  have  lasting 

friendship  with  him. 


1.  What  return  are  you  making  us  ? 

2.  I  demand  of  you  not  to  lead  any  army  across  the 
Rhine. 

3.  If  you  should4  do  this,  I  would  have  lasting  friend- 
ship with  you. 

4.  If  I  gain  my  request,  I'll  not  neglect  my  friends. 

1  "  get  .  .  .  of,"  use  one  word.  2  See  123. 

8  See  169,  4,  5.  4  See  125. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


107 


223 


CHAPTER   XXXVI 


a.  qui  faceret. 

b.  intellecturum       quid 

mam  possent. 


Ger- 


a.  since  he  made  (see  173,  4). 

b.  he    would    find     out    what 

strength      the      Germans 
have. 


1.  It  is  a  right  of  war  that  the  conquerors  l  should  rule 
as  they  wish. 

2.  I  ought  to  exercise  my  right,  since  I  have  conquered 
you. 

3.  If  you  think  we  have  no  strength,  come  on. 

4.  If  you  make  war  on  us,  we  will  pay  the  taxes. 

5.  Quote  4  indirectly  after  dlxerunt. 

224    CHAPTERS   XXXVII    AND    XXXVIII 


a.  Aedul    veniebant     questum 

quod     Harudes     popula- 
rentur. 

b.  mons  magna  altitudine. 


a.  the    Aedui    came    to   com- 

plain because   the  Haru- 
des were  laying  waste. 

b.  a  mountain  of  great  height. 


1.  They  are  complaining  because2  peace  cannot  be  pur- 
chased even  by  giving  hostages. 

2.  I  must  hasten  by  forced  marches  so  that  their  forces 
may  not  unite. 

3.  The  enemy  are  advancing  to  occupy  the  town. 

4.  Resistance  cannot  easily  be  made,  if  we  do  not  take 
great  precautions. 

5.  The  town  was  very  useful  for  war,  because l  it  con- 
tained a  mountain  of  great  size. 

6.  A  river  touches  the  base  of  it  on  either  side. 


l  See  71,  7. 


2  See  173. 


io8 


LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


225 


CHAPTER   XXXIX 


a.  dura    ad   Vesontionem    mo- 

ratur. 

b.  alius  alia  causa  inlata. 

<r.    petebat     ut     discedere     li- 
ceret. 


a.  while  he  was  delaying  near 

Vesontio. 

b.  each      one       presenting     a 

different  excuse. 

c.  begged    permission    to    de- 

part. 


1.  While  we  were  delaying  a  few  days,  the  whole  army 
was  seized  with  fear. 

2.  The  Germans  are  men  of  marvelous  bravery. 

3.  Caesar  asserted   that   this   panic  started  with  those 
who  had  no  experience  in  war. 

4.  One  presented  one  excuse,  another  another.1 

5.  Caesar's  troops  will  not  beg  permission  to  advance. 

6.  He  feared  that  they  would  not   be  obedient  to  the 
word  of  command. 


226 


CHAPTER   XL 


a.  quam  in  partem. 

b.  sibi  persuader!. 

c.  quantum  bom. 

d.  pares  esse  nostro  exercitui. 
<?.   neque     sul    potestatem     fe- 

cisset. 


a.  in  what  direction. 

b.  that  he  was  persuaded. 

c.  how  much  advantage. 

d.  to  be  a  match  for  our  army. 

e.  and  had  not  given   (them) 

a  chance  at  him. 


1.  I  have  a  right  to  inquire  in  what  direction  we  are 
marching. 

2.  Why  did  he  call  a  council  ? 

3.  We   are   persuaded2   that    he    will    not  bring  war 
upon  us. 

1  See  73.  2  See  32,  2. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


4.  If  you  should  lose  confidence  in  your  commander, 
what,  pray,  should  you  fear  ? 

5.  You  can  judge  how  much  courage  the  enemy  have, 
now  that  the  Cimbri  have  been  defeated.1 

6.  The  Romans  feared  that  the  Germans  were  their 
match. 

7.  If  you  give  me  a  chance  at  you,  I  will  defeat  you 
more  by  stratagem  than  valor. 

8.  I  know  that  Caesar  will  take  care  of  this. 

9.  I  know  that  whoever  does  not  advance 2  has  no  con- 
fidence in  the  general. 

10.    Which  is  the  stronger,  duty  or  fear  ? 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XXXI-XL 

227.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
verbs,  memorizing  principal  parts  of  verbs,  declensions  of 
adjectives  and  nouns : 

1 .  recuso. 

2.  despero  (de,  not  ace.). 

3.  supplicium  sumo. 

4.  adsuefacio. 

5.  adsuesco. 

6.  suscipio. 

7.  placeo. 

8.  gratiam  refero. 

9.  gratiam  habeo. 

10.  gratias  ago. 

1 1 .  neglego. 

12.  praecaveo. 

13.  arcesso. 


14. 

accedo. 

15. 

experior. 

1  6. 

efficio. 

17. 

adsum. 

18. 

desum. 

19. 

impello. 

20. 

tempero. 

21. 

deterred. 

22. 

cruciatus. 

23- 

absens. 

24. 

mature. 

25- 

negotium. 

26. 

omnlno. 

1  Use  participle. 


2  See  166. 


IIO 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 


27.  perpetuus. 

28.  iterum. 

29.  semel. 

30.  vero. 

3 1 .  paulatim. 

32.  paulisper. 

33.  paulum. 

34.  simulatio. 
35-  ordo. 

36.  palus. 

37.  f acinus. 

38.  dlligentia. 


39.  magnitude. 

40.  difficultas. 

41.  conloquium. 

42.  commeatus. 

43.  sedes. 

44.  consuetude. 

45.  uter. 

46.  uterque. 

47.  plerumque. 

48.  hue. 

49.  praeterea. 

50.  subito. 


228.  Review  thoroughly   the    following    principles    of 

syntax : 

1.  Ablative  of  description,  49. 

2.  Genitive  of  description,  22. 

3.  Genitive  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive  with   causa, 
142.  2. 

4.  Supine  in  urn,  96. 

5.  Causal  clauses  introduced  by  quod,  173. 

6.  Substantive  clauses  with  verbs  of  hindering,  refusing, 
and  with  verbs  of  accomplishing,  150. 

7.  Indirect  questions,  1 34. 

229.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  227  and  the  constructions  of 
228.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


230 

a.  el  gratias  egit. 

b.  a  nostris  abesse. 


CHAPTER   XLI 


a.  thanked  him. 

b.  were  distant  from  ours. 


CAESAR,    GALLIC    WAR 


II 


1.  We  thank  Caesar  for  delivering1  such  a  speech. 

2.  They  were  quite  ready  to  apologize  to  me. 

3.  The    policy  of   the   campaign    is   the   commander's, 
not  ours. 

4.  Scouts  informed  us  that  the  enemy  were  fifty  miles 
away  from  our  camp. 


231  CHAPTER   XLII 

a.  si  quid  opus  facto  esset. 

b.  in  loco  habiturum. 


a.  if  there   were   any  need  of 

action. 

b.  would  regard  as. 


1.  You  may  do  what  you  have  asked  for. 

2.  Don't  refuse2  me  when  I  ask. 

3.  Caesar   was   afraid   that   the    conference   would   be 
broken  off. 

4.  If  there  is  any  need  of  cavalry,  let  the  soldiers  be 
put  on  horses. 

5.  Regard  us  as  your  friends. 


232 


CHAPTER   XLIII 


a.  ubi  eo  ventum  est. 

b.  ipsis  cum  Aeduls  intercede- 

rent. 


a.  when  they  came  there. 

b.  existed   between  themselves 

and  the  Aedui. 


1.  Ariovistus  said  he  would  carry  on  the  conference3 
on  horseback. 

2.  When  they  had  come  to  the  mound,  Caesar  showed 
what  gifts  the  Senate  had  bestowed. 

3.  Reasons  for  intimacy  exist  between  you  and  them. 


1  "for  delivering "= because  he  delivered. 
8  "  carry  on  the  conference,"  one  word. 


2  See  116. 


112 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 


4.  I  was  called  a  friend  by  the  Senate  before  you  came 
into  Gaul. 

5.  I  will  make  this  demand,  not  to  cross  with  your  army. 


233 


CHAPTER   XLIV 


a.  transisse  Rhenum  sese  roga- 
tum  a  Gallis. 


b.  sibi  praesidio  esse. 

c.  quod  traducat. 


d.  se  prius  in  Galliam  venisse 
quam  populum  Romanum. 


a.  that    he     had     crossed    the 

Rhine   at  the    request  of 
the  Gauls. 

b.  to  be  a  protection  to  him. 

c.  as   to   his   leading,     (tradu- 

cat   would    be    indicative 
in  direct  discourse.) 

d.  that  he  had  come  into  Gaul 

before  the  Roman  people. 


1.  I  will  leave  home  at  your  request. 

2.  I  did  not  make  war  on  you,1  but  you  on  me. 

3.  If  you  wish  to  enjoy  peace,  pay  the  tribute. 

4.  I  crossed  the  Rhine  voluntarily  to  impose  2  a  tax  on 
the  vanquished. 

5.  If  you  should  be  a  hindrance  to  me,  I  would  not 
seek  your  friendship. 

6.  As  to  my  leaving  my  territory,  I  am  doing  this  to 
defend  myself. 

7.  I  say  that  you  made  an  attack  before  we  did.3 

8.  Why  ought  you  to  use  our  help  ? 

9.  I  am  not  so  simple  as  not  to  know  that  Caesar  is 
pretending  friendship. 

10.    He  says  he  will  do  whatever  you  say. 


1  Note  the  order  of  the  Latin  in  the  text,  .  .  .  non  sese  intulisse. 

2  "  to  impose  "  —  express  in  several  ways.  3  Omit. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  113 


234  CHAPTERS   XLV   AND   XLVI 


a.  Galliam  esse  Ariovisti. 


b.  quibus     populus     Romanus 

ignovisset. 

c.  coramittendum     non     puta- 

bat  ut  dlci  posset. 


a.  that  Gaul  belonged  to  Ari- 

ovistus. 

b.  whonl    the    Roman    people 

had  pardoned. 

c.  he  thought  that  no  ground 

should   be  given  for  say- 
ing. 


1.  My  habit  doesn't  allow  me  to1  desert  my  allies. 

2.  Gaul  belongs  to  Caesar  rather  than  to  Ariovistus. 

3.  They  would  have  enjoyed  their  own  laws,  had  you 
pardoned2  them. 

4.  Caesar  orders  his  men   not  to  throw  stones  at  the 
Germans. 

5.  No  ground  ought  to  be  given  for  saying  that  we  ex- 
cluded them  from  the  conference. 

6.  Don't  hurl  back  your  weapons. 

235  CHAPTER   XLVII 


a.  biduo  post. 

b.  retineri  qum  conicerent. 

c.  qua  multa  iitebatur. 


a.  two  days  afterwards. 

b.  to  be  kept  from  hurling. 

c.  which  he  spoke  fluently. 


1.  Three  days  afterwards  he  said  he  would  send  some 
one  as  an  ambassador. 

2.  I  will  keep  the  enemy  from  throwing  stones  at  you. 

3.  If  you  cannot    go    yourself,  send  a  man   of   great 
courage. 

4.  Can  you  speak  Latin  fluently  ? 

1  Don't  use  infinitive.        •  2  See  123. 

LATIN   PROSE   COMP.  —  8 


114  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 

236  CHAPTER   XLVIII 


a.  ut  el  potestas  non  deesset. 

b.  singuli  singulos. 

c.  si  quid  erat  durius. 


a.  that  he  might  not  lack  the 

opportunity. 

b.  one  apiece. 

c.  if  there  was  any  difficulty. 


1.  If  there  is1  any  difficulty,  they  will  not  lack  the  op- 
portunity. 

2.  If  there  were  any  difficulty,  I   would  not  lack  the 
opportunity. 

3.  If  there  should  be  any  difficulty,  we  should  not  lack 
the  opportunity. 

4.  They  will  select  one  horse  apiece. 

5.  We  shall  have  to  fight  a  cavalry  battle. 


237  CHAPTERS   XLIX   AND    L 


a.  quam  ob  rem. 

b.  utrum  ex  usu  esset  necne. 


a.  why. 

b.  whether  it  was  expedient  or 

not. 


1.  Caesar  chose  a   place   beyond   the  place  where  the 
enemy  was. 

2.  He  will  send  the  third  line  to  fortify2  the  camp. 

3.  At  the  completion  of  the  work,  they  retreated  into 
camp. 

4.  I  will  ask  him  why  he  does  not  give  us  a  chance 
to  fight. 

5.  Is  it  the  divine  will  for  us  to  storm  the  camp  ? 

6.  Tell  me  whether  the  moon  is  full  or  not. 

1  Review  126.  2  Express  in  several  ways. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 


238 


CHAPTERS  LI   AND    LII 

a.   on  the  next  day. 


a.  proximo   die,  postndie  ems 

die!. 

b.  reperti  sunt  complures  nostrl 

qul  Insillrent. 


b.  there  were  very  many  of  our 
men  who  jumped,  etc. 


1.  On  the  next  day  he  did  not  use  the  soldiers  of  the 
legions  for  show. 

2.  At  our  departure  we  shall  implore  you  not  to  leave 
any  hope  in  flight. 

3.  I  will  put  an  officer  in  charge  of  each  legion. 

4.  They  attacked  us  so  quickly  that  a  hand  to  hand 
encounter  resulted. 

5.  Send  the  cavalry  to  help  them. 

6.  There  are  many  who 1  are  engaged  in  the  battle  line. 


239 


CHAPTERS    LIII    AND    LIV 


a.  hostes  terga  verterunt. 

b.  neque    prius     fugere    desti- 

terunt  quam  pervenerunt. 

c.  se  praesente. 


a.  the  enemy  fled. 

b.  and  they  did  not  cease  fly- 

ing until  they  arrived. 

c.  in  his  presence. 


1.  When    they   cannot    rely   on    their    strength,   they 
will  flee. 

2.  Our  men  did  not  cease    pursuing    until   they  killed 
many  thousand. 

3.  He  was  bound  and  dragged  in  flight. 

4.  Ariovistus  is  said  to  have  escaped  in  a  small  boat 
that  he  had  found.2 

5.  They  cast  lots  in  our  presence. 

6.  Now   that   Ariovistus    had    been    defeated,    Caesar 
thought  he  was  safe. 

1  See  174.  2  ••  that  .  .  .  found  "  —  one  word. 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


240     REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XLI-LIII 

Review  thoroughly  the  following  vocabulary,  memorizing 
the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs,  and  the  declensions  of  the 
nouns  and  adjectives: 


{de   and   abl.  of 

thing. 
per    or    ab   with 

person.) 


1.  certiorfio 

2.  certiorem 

facio 

3.  tollo. 

4.  interpono. 

5.  intercede. 

6.  iuterdico. 

7.  exeo. 

8.  defendo. 

9.  simulo. 

10.  Ignosco. 

11.  conficio. 

12.  se  recipere. 

13.  reperio. 

14.  invenio. 

15.  praeficio. 

1 6.  consulo,  with  dat.  and  ace. 

17.  doceo. 

1 8.  transeo. 

19.  circumsisto. 

20.  transduce. 

21.  nanciscor. 

22.  tergum. 

23.  subsidium. 

24.  genus. 


25.  adulescens 

26.  sententia. 

27.  regio. 

28.  labor. 

29.  detrlmentum. 

30.  praemium. 

31.  aditus. 

32.  incolumis. 

33.  idoneus,  cf.  alienus. 

34.  inlquus. 

35.  aequus. 

36.  utrimque. 

37.  statim. 

38.  comminus. 

39.  complures. 

40.  durus.  - 

41.  telum. 

42.  sponte. 

43.  stipendium. 

44.  domus. 

45.  eo  (adv.). 

46.  ultro. 

47.  factum. 

48.  opus,  indecl. 

49.  opus,  eris. 


241.    Review    thoroughly   the    following    principles    of 
syntax : 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  1 17 

1.  The  predicate  genitive  (see  grammar). 

2.  Accusative  with  compounds,  circum,  praeter,  trans. 

3.  Double  questions,  direct  and  indirect,  80. 

4.  Intransitive  verbs,  32. 

5.  Clauses  introduced  by  anteqnam  and  priusquam,  154. 

6.  Conditional  sentences,  three  types,  121-125. 

242.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  240  and  the  constructions 
of  241.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


BOOK    II 


NOTE.  Sentences  in  groups  A  are  for  those  who  begin  to  read  Caesar  at  Book  II. 
Those  in  groups  B  are  for  students  who  have  read  Book  I.  The  student  should 
not  depend  on  the  English-Latin  vocabulary  for  the  Latin  words.  The  Latin 
text  upon  which  each  exercise  is  based  should  always  be  consulted  for  the 
proper  words  or  phrases. 

43  CHAPTER   I 


a.  certior  fiebat. 

b.  inter  se  dare. 

c.  exercitum    hiemare  moleste 

ferebant. 


a.  he  was  informed. 

b.  were  exchanging,  were  giving 

to  one  another. 

c.  they  were  annoyed  that  an 

army  should  winter. 


A.  i .   We  are  informed  ;  he  will  inform  Caesar  ;  I  have 
informed  them. 

2.  We  exchange  ;  you  exchange. 

3.  They  feared  that  Gaul  would  be  subdued. 

4.  I  am  annoyed  that  you  are  conspiring  against  me. 

5.  Some  desire  a  revolution. 

6.  I    am    informed    that    they    are    leading    an   army 
against  us. 

B.  i.    They  informed   him   that  we  were  exchanging 
hostages. 

2.  I  am  afraid  that  they  will  pass  the  winter  in  Gaul. 

3.  We  are  grieved  that  Caesar  was  not  informed  that 
they  were  conspiring. 

4.  Those  who  can  hire  men  will  generally  usurp  royal 
power. 

118 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 


119 


244 


CHAPTER    II 


a.  he  sent   Quintus  Pedius   to 

lead. 

b.  he  employs  the  Senones  to 

find  out. 


a.  qui    deduceret    Q.    Pedium 

misit. 

b.  dat  negotium  Senonibus  uti 

cognoscant. 

A.  i.I  will  enroll  troops  among  the  Gauls. 

2.  I  sent  them  to  find  out  about  this. 

3.  We  employed  him  to  inform  us. 

4.  They  announced  that  Caesar  was  coming  to  the  army. 

5.  We  ought  not  to  hesitate.1 

B.  i.    We  will  send  an  officer  to  enroll  two  legions. 

2.  We  gave  it  in  charge 2  of  Pedius  to  gather  an  army 
together. 

3.  He  was  informed  that  they  had  broken3  camp  and 
were  setting  out  toward  the  Belgae. 


245 

a.  se  suaque  omnia. 

b.  ne  Suessiones  quidem. 

c.  deterrere  qum  cum  his  con- 

sentirent. 


CHAPTER  III 


a.  themselves  and  all  their  pos- 

sessions. 

b.  not    even     the    Suessiones. 

(Note     order     of    Latin 
words.) 

c.  to  prevent   from  conspiring 

with  these. 


A.     i.    Myself  and  all  my  property;  ourselves  and  all 
our  possessions. 

2.    The  Germans  who  live  in  Gaul  enjoy  their  own  laws. 

1  See  in. 

2  "gave  .  .  .  charge  of";  does  this  mean  same  as  "  employed"  ? 
8  Use  participle. 


120 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION— PART   II 


3.  He  said  that1  the  Germans  who  lived  in  Gaul  enjoyed 
their  own  laws. 

4.  He  is  not  ready  to  give  even  hostages. 

5.  We  will  prevent  them  from  aiding  you. 

B.     i.   We  who  have  given  you  all  our  property  will  not 
conspire  against  you. 

2.  Write  i  indirectly  after  dlxerunt. 

3.  We  have  prevented  them  from  enjoying  even  their 
own  laws. 

4.  Caesar  came  so    quickly  that   the    Remi   said   they 
would  help  him. 

246.  CHAPTER   IV 


a.  qui    Cimbros    ingredi    pro- 

hibuerint. 

b.  sibi  sumerent. 

c.  plurimum  valere. 


a. 


who  kept  the  Cimbri  from 
entering. 

b.  they  were  assuming. 

c.  were  the  most  powerful. 


^     A.      i.    What  can  you  do  in  war? 

2.  I  will  ask  him  what  you  can  do  in  war. 

3.  We  will  keep  them  from  settling  there. 

4.  I  have  found  out  that  they  have  entered  eur  territory. 

5.  You  are  assuming  great  authority. 

6.  How  large  a  number  has  each  one  promised  ? 

7.  They  are  the  most  powerful,   because   they  have 
many  soldiers. 

8.  Quote  7  indirectly  after  dixit. 

9.  The  chief  command  of  the  whole  war  will  be  con- 
ferred upon  Galba. 

10.   The  Nervii  were  regarded  as  extremely  cruel. 

B.     i.    I  will   ask   him   who   are   descended   from  the 
Germans. 

1  Review  165-169. 


CAESAR,    GALLIC   WAR 


121 


2.  We  are  the  only  ones  who  l  have  expelled  the  Gauls. 

3.  They  will  prevent  us  from  assuming  great  authority. 

4.  They  are  the  most  powerful,  because  they  can  furnish 
a  hundred  thousand  men. 

5.  Quote  4  indirectly  after  dlxit. 

6.  I  have  found  out  that  the  Nervii  were  considered  ex- 
tremely cruel. 


247 


CHAPTER   V 


a.  ne  confligendum  sit. 

b.  commeatus  ut    portari  pos- 

sent  efficiebat. 

c.  in  altitudinem    pedum   XII 

vallo. 


a.  lest    they    should    have    to 

contend. 

b.  made    it    possible    for    sup- 

plies to  be  brought. 

c.  by  a  wall  twelve  feet  high. 


A.  i.    It  concerns  us. 

2.  We  shall  be  compelled  2  to  fight  with  the  enemy. 

3.  We  learned  that  Caesar  had  pitched  his  camp. 

4.  I  will  make  it  possible  for  you  to  go. 

5.  This  ditch  will  be  six  feet  deep. 

6.  Caesar  ordered  3  them  to  bring  supplies. 

B.  i.    It  concerned  us  that  they  keep  the  enemy  apart. 

2.  If  you  do  this,  we  shall  have  to  fight. 

3.  He  learned  that  troops  had  been  sent  and  were  being 
led  across  the  river. 

4.  The  river  makes  it  possible  for  me  to  be  safe. 

5.  The  bridge  will  be  one  hundred  feet  long. 

6.  We  shall  order  3  them  to  hurry. 


1  Is  this  a  simple  relative  clause  ? 

2  "  we  .  .  .  fight,"  see  in.  95. 

8  What  construction  would  follow  impero  ?     See  147. 


122 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 


248 


a.  murus    defensoribus 

tus  est. 

b.  testudine  facta  murum  sub- 

ruunt. 

c.  in    muro     consistendi     po- 

testas  erat  nulli. 


CHAPTER   VI 

nuda- 


a.  the    wall    was    stripped   of 

its  defenders. 

b.  by  forming   a  testudo    they 

undermine  the  wall. 

c.  nobody  could   keep  a  foot- 

hold on  the  wall. 


A.  i.    The  town  is  two  miles  from  the  river. 

2.  We  have  cleared  the  town  of  soldiers. 

3.  This  was  done  by  hurling  stones. 

4.  We  cannot  keep  a  foothold  on  the  wall. 

5.  They  said  that  Iccius  was  in  command  of  the  town. 

B.  i.    A   town    named    Bibrax   was   attacked   by  the 
Belgae  on  their  march. 

2.  We  began  to  clear  the  town  of  soldiers. 

3.  By  hurling  many  javelins  they  put  an  end  to1  the 
attack. 

4.  Nobody  could  2  hurl  stones  against  the  wall. 

5.  Iccius  says  that  the  town  will  be  taken,  unless  Caesar 
sends  him  help. 

CHAPTER   VII 


249 

a.  funditores   subsidio   oppida- 

ms  mittit. 

b.  apud  oppidum  moratl,  om- 

nibus vicis  incensis,  ad 
castra  Caesaris  contende- 
runt. 


a.  he  sends  the  slingers  to  aid 

the  townsmen. 

b.  after    lingering    about    the 

town,  and  after  all  the 
villages  had  been  burned, 
they  hastened  to  Caesar's 
camp.  (Note  change  in 
use  of  the  participle.) 


1  "  put  an  end  to  "  =  make  an  end  of. 


2  Do  not  use  possum. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  123 

A.  i.I  will  send  men  to  help  you. 

2.  For  the  same  reason  we  employed  the  slingers. 

3.  After  pitching  1  camp,  they  lingered  in  the  town. 

4.  Many  buildings  were  burned. 

B.  i.    Caesar  used  the  messengers  as  guides  and  sent 
soldiers  to  help  them. 

2.  After  gaining  possession2  of  the  town  and  pitching1 
his  camp,  he  waited  for  them  a  little  while. 

3.  They  were  more  than  three  miles  off. 

250  CHAPTER   VIII 


a.  tantum  .  .  .  quantum. 

b.  quod     tantum     multitudine 

poterant. 

c.  suas  copias  eductas  instrux- 

erunt. 


a.  as  much  ...  as. 

b.  because  they  were  so  strong 

in  numbers. 

c.  they   led    their    forces    out 

and  drew  them  up; 


A.  i.    Our  men  have  a  high  reputation  for  valor. 

2.  The  place  was  suitable  for3  pitching  a  camp. 

3.  The  hill  extends  as  far  as  we  can  see. 

4.  He  did  this  so  as  not  to  be  surrounded. 

5.  We  are  very  strong  in  numbers. 

6.  I  will  lead  4  out  and  draw  up  my  troops. 

B.  i.    He  perceived  that  the  place  was  suitable  for3 
pitching  camp. 

2.  That  hill  covers  as   much    ground   as  an  army  can 
occupy. 

3.  They  are  so  strong  in  numbers  that   they  can  sur- 
round us  as  we  fight. 

4.  After  digging  a  ditch,  he  stationed  war  engines. 

1  See  89,  i.  2  See  85,  2.  8  Do  not  use  the  dative. 

4  Avoid  using  two  coordinate  verbs. 


124 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


5.  We  will  lead1  the  legion  out  of  the  town  and  draw 
it  up. 

REVIEW   OF    CHAPTERS    I-VIII 

251.  Review  thoroughly  the  meaning  of  the  following 
words,  mem'orizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs,  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives. 


I. 

studeo. 

26.   certus,  compare. 

-2. 

cognosce. 

27.   regnum. 

3- 

dubito. 

28.    negotium. 

4- 

deterreo. 

29.   obses. 

-5- 

prohibeo. 

30.   celeritas. 

6. 

iuvo. 

3  1  .   celeriter. 

7- 

audeo. 

32.   plurimum. 

8. 

valeo. 

33.    quantus. 

-  9- 

possum. 

34.   tantus. 

-10. 

habeor. 

35.    magnitude. 

-ii. 

quaero. 

36.   commeatus. 

12. 

postulo. 

37.   potestas. 

13- 

distineo  (note  the  force 

38.   imperium. 

of  dis). 

39.   paulum. 

14. 

impero. 

40.   paulo. 

IS- 

iubeo. 

41.   paulisper. 

16. 

cogo. 

42.   paulatim. 

17- 

coepi. 

43.   idoneus. 

18. 

incipio. 

44.   uterque. 

19. 

praeficio. 

45.   quisque. 

20. 

praesum. 

46.   medius. 

21. 

contends. 

47.    summus,  compare. 

22. 

conficio. 

48.   alter. 

23- 

efficio. 

49.    plerumque. 

'24. 

obtineo. 

50.   ne  .  .  .  quidem. 

25. 

occupo. 

1  Avoid  using  two  coordinate  verbs. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  125 

252.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Dative  of  possession,  of  purpose,  and  the  dative  used 
with  adjectives,  34,  35,  37. 

2.  Ablative  of  separation.     When  must  a  preposition 
be  used  ?  39. 

3.  Accusative  of  extent  of  space  and  duration  of  time, 
1 6. 

4.  Construction  with  quaero  and posttdo,  15.  i. 

5.  Uses  of  quod  to  introduce  relative,  causal,  and  sub- 
stantive clauses,  173. 

6.  Substantive  clauses  after  verbs  of  doubting,  verbs  of 
hindering,  and  verbs  of  fearing,  135,  136,  150. 

253.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  251  and  the  constructions 
of  252.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 

254  CHAPTER   IX 


a.  si    nostri    transient   hostes 

exspectabant. 

b.  eo  consilio  ut  castellum  ex- 

pugnarent. 


a.  the   enemy  were  waiting  to 
see    if    our    men    would 


cross. 


b.  with  ,  the   design    of  taking 
the  redoubt. 


A.     i.   A  river   was   between   Caesar's   army  and   the 
enemy. 

2.  We  are  waiting  to  see  if  they  will  cross. 

3.  Caesar  will  not  begin  to  cross. 

4.  They  are  doing  this  with  the  design  of  capturing  the 
camp. 

5.  Titurius  commands  the  soldiers. 


126 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 


B.     i.    We  are  waiting  to  see  if  they  will  attack  us. 

2.  If1  the  cavalry  battle  is  favorable  to  neither  party, 
we  will  not  begin  to  cross. 

3.  The  enemy  are  hastening  to  the  river  with  the  design 
of  finding  fords. 

4.  Who  will  be   in   charge   of   the    redoubt  when  the 
enemy  cross  ? 


255 


CHAPTER   X 


inter- 


a.  primes   circumventos 

fecerunt. 

b.  const! tuerunt  optimum   esse 

quemque  revertl. 

c.  his     persuader!     ut     diutius 

morarentur  non  poterat. 


a.  they  surrounded  and  killed 

the  first. 

b.  they    decided    that    it    was 

best  for  each  to  return. 

c.  these  could  not  be  persuaded 

to  wait  any  longer. 


A.     i.    A  fierce  battle  is  being  fought. 

2.  We  attacked  them  while 2  they  were  crossing. 

3.  They  will  surround3  and  kill  him. 

4.  It  is  best  for  each  to  fight  in  his  own  territory. 

5.  I  can't  be  persuaded  to  return  home. 

6.  We  assembled  to  defend  our  homes. 


B.     i.    They  informed  Caesar  that  a  fierce  battle  was 
being  fought. 

2.  They  drove  them  back3  and  slew  many  of  the  enemy. 

3.  It  is  best  for  us  to  use  our  own  grain  supplies. 

4.  We  shall  attack  the  enemy  while  2  they  are  crossing. 

5.  We  can't  be  persuaded  to  fight  in  foreign  territory. 

1  "  if  .  .  .  is,"  do  not  use  si  and  the  indicative. 

2  "  while  .  .  .  crossing  "  —  express  by  one  word  in  Latin, 
*  See  88. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR 


127 


256 


CHAPTER   XI 


a.  fecerunt    ut  profectio   vide- 

retur. 

b.  prima    luce ;    sub    occasum 

solis. 

c.  exaudlto  clamore. 


a.  they    made   their   departure 


seem. 


b.  at  daybreak  ;  at  sunset. 

c.  on  hearing  the  shout. 


A.  i.    Everybody  is  leaving  camp. 

2.  Their  departure  made  Caesar  fear  an  ambuscade. 

3.  At  dawn,  the  fact  was  established. 

4.  Why  did  they  withdraw  ? 

5.  On  seeing  our  men,  they  fled  several  miles. 

6.  At  sunset,  they  will  be  out  of  danger. 

B.  i.    Caesar   could    not   understand   why   they   were 
hastening  home. 

2.  Their  departure  would 1  have  made  any  one  fear  an 
ambuscade. 

3.  At  daybreak,  the  cavalry  attacked  the  rear. 

4.  Those  in  front,  on  seeing  the  enemy,  were  thrown 
into  confusion. 

5.  At  sunset,  they  had  fled  as  far  as  they  could. 


257 


CHAPTERS   XII    AND   XIII 


a.  id  paucis  defendentibus  ex- 

pugnare  non  potuit. 

b.  quae  ad  oppugnandum  usul 


erant. 


c.  celeritate  Romanorum   per- 

moti. 

d.  maiores  natu. 


a.  although  there  were  few  de- 

fenders, he  could  not  cap- 
ture. 

b.  what  was  useful   in    besieg- 

ing. 

c.  alarmed  at  the  speed  of  the 

Romans. 

d.  the  elders. 


1  "  would  have  made  "  —  See  127,  118. 


128  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

A.  i.    On    the   next   day,  the   enemy  recovered  from 
their  alarm. 

2.  Although  the  wall  was    high,  he   tried    to  take  the 
town. 

3.  Sheds  are  useful  in  besieging. 

4.  The  Suessiones  were  alarmed  at  the  towers. 

5.  Caesar  received  the  two  sons  of  Galba  as  hostages. 

6.  The  elders  said  they  had  not  fought  against  Caesar. 

7.  The  women  approached  the  camp  with  outstretched 
hands. 

8.  I  will  come  under  your  protection. 

B.  i.    Although  he  saw  the  height  of  the  wall,  Caesar 
tried  to  take  the  town. 

2.  Ditches  and  walls  are  useful  in  defending  a  town. 

3.  The  Gauls  were  alarmed1  at  these  works  and  sought 
peace  of  Caesar. 

4.  Galba's  two  sons  were  received  by  Caesar  as  hostages. 

5.  The  elders  approached  the  camp. 

6.  With  hands  outspread,  the  women   said  they  would 
not  resist  Caesar. 

258  CHAPTER   XIV 


a.  populo  Romano  bellum   in- 

tulisse. 
I),   petere  Bellovacos  ut  utatur. 


a.  had  waged  war  on  the  Ro- 
man people. 

If.  that  the  Bellovaci  begged 
him  to  use. 


A.      i.    How  great  a  war  did  you  wage  on  the  enemy? 

2.  We  understand  how  great  a  war  you  waged  on  them. 

3.  I  begged  him  to  do  this. 

4.  He  says   that   those   who   did1   this    are   fleeing  to 
Britain. 

1  See  88. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  I2Q 

B.     i.   We  understand  who  have  brought  war  on  the 
Romans. 

2.  If  you  do  this,  I  will  beg  Caesar  to  show  his  charac- 
teristic kindness. 

3.  Quote  2  indirectly  l  after  dlxit. 


259  CHAPTERS   XV   AND   XVI 


(a}  nullum  aditum  esse  ad  eos 
mercatoribus. 
(^)    nihil  vim. 
(c)    his  persuaserant  utl  expe- 
rirentur. 

(a)  that  traders  have  no  access 
to  them. 
(b)   no  wine. 
(<r)    they  had  persuaded  these 
to  try. 

A.  i.    Caesar  said  he  would  demand  many  hostages. 

2.  We  will  surrender  ourselves  and  all  our  property. 

3.  Caesar  had  access  to  the  Gauls. 

4.  The  Nervii  allow  no  wine  to  be  brought  into  their 
territory. 

5.  They  learned  that  Caesar  had  marched  many  miles. 

6.  I  shall  persuade  them  to  wait  for  me. 

7.  The  enemy  are  on  the  other  side  of  the  river. 

B.  i.    Caesar  said  he  would  demand  hostages  and  make 
inquiry  about  their  customs. 

2.  Will  you  surrender  yourself  and  all  your  property  ? 

3.  The  Nervii  have  no  wine  in  their  country. 

4.  They  learned  that  Caesar  had  marched  many  miles. 

5.  I  shall  persuade   him  to  wait  for  me  on  the  other 
side  of  the  river. 

1  Review  carefully  165-169. 

LATIN   PROSE  COM1'.  —  9 


130  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION —  PART  II 


260  CHAPTER   XVII 


a.  exploratores   praemittit    qul 

locum     castris     idoneum 
deligant. 

b.  quicquam  negotl. 

c.  non  omittendum    sibi    con- 

silium   Nervil  exlstimave- 
runt. 


a.  he  sends    ahead    scouts   to 
.    choose  a  place  suitable  for 

a  camp. 

b.  any  trouble. 

c.  the     Nervii     thought     they 

ought    not    to    disregard 
the  advice. 


A.  i.    He  sent  ahead  men  to  do  this. 

2.  They  observed  our  army's  usual  manner  of  marching. 

3.  There  will  not  be  any  trouble  in  routing1  the  first 
legion. 

4.  Our  strength  is  in  cavalry  forces. 

5.  They  bent  the  trees  to  furnish2  a  fortification. 

6.  I  think  that  the  Nervii  ought  not  to  disregard  this 
advice. 

7.  We  can't  even  look  through  the  hedge. 

B.  i.    They  sent  men  to  observe  our  manner  of  march. 

2.  If  the  first  legion  is   routed,  there  will  not  be  any 
trouble  in  plundering  1  the  baggage. 

3.  Our  strength  was  in  cavalry  forces. 

4.  The  hedge   furnishes   a   defense  which3  cannot  be 
entered. 

5.  Do  you  think  that  the  Nervii  ought  to  disregard  this 
advice  ? 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   IX-XVII 

261.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs,  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 

i  Use  infinitive.  '2  "  to  furnish,"  cf.  praedandi  causa.  3  See  174. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 


1.  conor. 

2.  exspecto. 

3.  consisto. 

4.  constituo. 

5.  expugno. 

6.  oppugno. 

7.  interficio. 

8.  intereo. 

9.  persuadec. 

10.  moror. 

1 1 .  morior. 

12.  deficio. 

13.  desum. 

14.  intellego. 

15.  propero. 

1 6.  maturo. 

17.  desisto. 

1 8.  se  recipere. 

19.  pando. 

20.  accedo. 

2 1 .  mf ero. 

22.  experior. 

23.  dedo. 

24.  deditio. 

25.  dediticius. 


26.  deligo. 

27.  omitto. 

28.  consuetude. 

29.  impedio. 

30.  impedlmentum. 

3 1 .  appropinquo. 

32.  complures. 

33.  usus. 

34.  consilium. 

35.  secundus. 

36.  alienus. 

37.  inlquus. 

38.  res  frumentaria. 

39.  proficlscor. 

40.  profectio. 

41.  clamor. 

42.  msidiae. 

43.  agmen, 

44.  novus. 

45.  pauci. 

46.  aditus. 

47.  nihil. 

48.  quisquam. 

49.  ineo. 

50.  initium. 


262.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax  : 

1.  Genitive  of  the  whole,  23. 

2.  Passive  periphrastic,  95. 

3.  Construction  with  ftrsuddtd,  147. 

4.  Indirect  questions,  134. 

5.  Sequence  of  tenses,  131-133. 

6.  Consecutive  clauses  dependent  on  facto,  efficio,  etc. 


132 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 


263.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences, employing  the  words  of  261  and  the  constructions 
of  262.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


264 


CHAPTERS   XVIII   AND   XIX 


a.  fluminis  erat  altitude  pedum 

circiter  trium. 

b.  ratio    aliter    se    habebat  ac 

Belgae    ad     Nervios    de- 
tulerant. 

c.  ut  aciem  constituerant. 

d.  impetum  in   nostros  equities 

fecerunt. 


a.  the  depth  of  the  river  was 

about  three  feet. 

b.  the  arrangement  was  differ- 

ent from  what  the  Belgae 
had  reported  to  the 
Nervii. 

c.  just  as  they  had  drawn  up 

the  line  of  battle. 

d.  they    made    an    attack    on 

our  cavalry. 


A.  i.    The  river  Sambre  has  been  mentioned  above. 

2.  One  cannot  see l  into  the  woods. 

3.  The  height  of  the  hill  was  about  two  hundred  feet. 

4.  The  plan  of  march  is  different  from  what  the  enemy 
thought. 

5.  Two  legions  will  guard  the  rear. 

6.  We  will  not  retreat  into  the  woods. 

7.  They  attacked  us  as  we  were  retreating. 

8.  He  will  do  just  as  he  has  agreed. 

9.  After   the   camp    had   been   fortified,   we   saw   the 
enemy. 

10.    The  cavalry  was  easily  routed  and  thrown  into  con- 
fusion. 

B.  i.    The  foot  of  the  hill  is  cleared  of  woods,  so  that 
the  enemy  cannot  hide. 


1  "  one  cannot  see  "  =  it  cannot  be  seen. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  133 

2.  The  hill  that  had  been  chosen  for  a  camp  was  about 
two  hundred  feet  high. 

3.  Caesar's  custom   is   different   from   what   has   been 
reported. 

4.  They   didn't   dare   to   attack  the   Romans   as   they 
retreated. 

5.  How  far  will  they  follow  us  ? 

6.  We  will  do  just  as  we  have  agreed. 

7.  When  the  cavalry  had  been  routed,  they  made  for 
Caesar's  camp. 

265  CHAPTER   XX 


a.  Caesari  omnia  uno  tern- 
pore  erant  agenda. 

/;.  cum  ad  arma  concurri 
oporteret. 

c.  quod  singulls  legionibus  sin- 
gulos  legates  Caesar  dis- 
cedere  vetuerat. 


a.  Caesar    had    to    do    every- 

thing at  once. 

b.  when    they    must    rush    to 

arms. 

c.  because  Caesar  had  forbid- 

den the  lieutenants  to 
leave  their  respective 
legions. 


A.  i.    You  must l  do  this  quickly. 

2.  Others  show  us  what  we  ought1  to  do. 

3.  Caesar  will  forbid  the  lieutenants  to  give  the  signal 
to  their  respective  legions. 

4.  The  experience  of  the  soldiers  helped  them. 

5.  We  will  execute  by  ourselves  what  seems  best. 

B.  i.    When  the  signal  is  given  the  soldiers  must1  run 
to  arms. 

2.  Others  ought l  not  to  show  us  what  we  have a  to  do. 

3.  Caesar  had  ordered  the  lieutenants  to  draw  up  their 
respective  legions. 

1  Review  carefully  in,  95. 


134  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 


266  CHAPTERS   XXI    AND   XXII 


a.  quam  in  partem. 

b.  quo  telum  adici  posset. 

c.  aliae  alia  in  parte. 


a.  in  that  direction  in  which. 

b.  a  spear's  throw. 

c.  some   in   one   place,   others 

in  another. 


A.  i.    He  will  go  in  that  direction  in  which  he  has 
been  ordered. 

2.  We  will  urge  the  soldiers  to  1  remember  this. 

3.  He  is  not  more  than  a  stone's  throw  off. 

4.  We  did  not  have  time  to  prepare  our  javelins. 

5.  You  will  lose  time  for2  fighting. 

6.  Some  of  the  soldiers  were   in   one   place,  others  in 
another. 

7.  What  is  needed  in  each  town  ? 

8.  The  inequality  of   things  was  so  great  that  various 
results  of  fortune  followed. 

B.  i.   We  urged  the  soldiers  to  1  go  in  that  direction  in 
which  they  had  been  ordered. 

2.  Since  the  enemy  are  not  more  than  a  stone's  throw 
off,  you  will  not  have  time  to  encourage  the  soldiers. 

3.  They  will  lose  time  for2  fighting. 

4.  Some  of  the  soldiers  fought  in  one  place,  others  in 
another. 

5.  We  can  provide  what  is  needed  in  each  town. 

267  CHAPTER   XXIII 


a.  a  fronte. 

b.  duce  Boduognato. 

c.  non    magno    ab    ea    inter- 

vallo. 


a.  in  front. 

b.  under     the     leadership    of 

Boduognatus. 

c.  not  far  from  it. 


1  Do  not  use  the  infinitive.  2  Do  not  use  the  dative. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR 


135 


A.  i.   These  legions  had  opposed  the  Atrebates. 

2.  They  were  killed  while  trying  to  cross  the  river. 

3.  The  enemy  will  not  hesitate  to  renew  the  fight. 

4.  The  whole  camp  was  exposed  in  front. 

5.  The  seventh  legion   is   stationed   not  far   from  the 
twelfth. 

6.  Under  Caesar's  leadership  the  camp  was  nearly  sur- 
rounded. 

B.  i.    Many  of  the  enemy  were  killed  while  resisting1 
our  men. 

2.  The  enemy  renewed   the   fight2   and   hurled2  their 
weapons. 

3.  The  camp  was  exposed  in  front,  because  two  legions 
were  stationed  not  far  from  the  right  wing. 

4.  Under  Caesar's  leadership  we  shall  not  hesitate  to 
engage  with  the  Gauls. 


268 


CHAPTER   XXIV 


a.  adversis    hostibus     occurre- 

bant. 

b.  calones  praecipites  fugae  sese 

mandabant. 

alii   aliam   in    partem    fere- 
bantur. 


t. 


a.  they   met    the    enemy    face 

to  face. 

b.  the  camp  followers   took  to 

flight  in  utter  confusion. 

c.  some  rushed   in  one  direc 

tion,  others  in  another. 


A.     i.    I    said   that   the   infantry  were   routed   by  the 
enemy. 

2.  I  met  him  face  to  face. 

3.  We  took  to  flight  in  great  confusion. 

4.  Some  were  alarmed  by  one3  thing,  others  by  another. 

5.  The  camp  was  filling  up  with  the  enemy. 


See  87. 


2  Do  not  use  coordinate  verbs. 


»  See  73- 


136  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

6.  The  soldiers  were  nearly  surrounded  and  held  fast. 

7.  It  was  reported  that  the    Nervii   had  captured  our 
camp. 

B.     i.   When  we  retreated,  we  met  him  face  to  face. 

2.  I  took  to  flight  in  great  confusion. 

3.  Some  were  alarmed  by  one1  thing,  others  by  another. 

4.  It  is  said  that  the  cavalry  had  been  sent  to  Caesar 
as  help. 

5.  The  Nervii  scattered  our  men  and  almost  took  the 
camp. 

269  CHAPTER   XXV 


a.  ubi  railites  sibi  ipsos  ad  pug- 

nam     esse    impedlmento 
vldit. 

b.  signa  inferre. 

c.  cum  quisque  operam  navare 

cuperet. 


a.  when  he  saw  that  the  soldiers 

hindered  one  another   in 
fighting. 

b.  to  charge. 

c.  since  each  one  wished  to  do 

his  best. 


A.  i.   We  hinder  one  another  in  fighting. 

2.  Publius   Sextius    Baculus   was   exhausted   by   many 
severe  wounds. 

3.  There  is  no  reserve  that2  can  be  brought  up. 

4.  Although3   many  had   been   killed,  Caesar  did  not 
abandon  the  contest. 

5.  He  snatched  a  shield  from  a  soldier.4 

6.  We  will  charge,  so  as  to  open  up  the  ranks. 

7.  Each  man  will  do  his  best. 

B.  i.    Owing  to  the  crowded  condition  of  the  soldiers, 
we  hindered  one  another  in  fighting. 

i  See  73.  2  See  174.  *  See  87,  89.  4  Cf.  militi  in  the  text. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  137 

2.  Although  1  many  are  exhausted  by  wounds,  Caesar 
will  not  abandon  the  contest. 

3.  There  is  no  reserve  that 2  can  be  brought  up. 

4.  We  will  charge  so  that   the  soldiers  may  use  their 
swords  more  easily. 

5.  Each  man  will  do  his  best,  so  as  to  infuse  hope  in  the 
general. 

270  CHAPTER   XXVI 


a.  tribunes     monuit     ut     con- 

versa  signa   in   hostis  m- 
ferrent. 

b.  cum    alius     alii    subsidium 

ferret. 

c.  cum  quanto  in  periculo  im- 

perator  versaretur  cogno- 
vissent. 


a.  he   urged    the    tribunes    to 

face  about  and  charge  the 
enemy. 

b.  since      they      helped      one 

another. 

c.  when    they    found    out    in 

what  danger   the  general 
was  involved. 


A.  i.I  urged  them  to  3  take  a  stand  near  by. 

2.  Face  about  and  charge  the  enemy. 

3.  They  helped  one  another. 

4.  I  don't  fear  being  seen  by  the  enemy. 

5.  Labienus  learned  what  the  enemy  were  doing. 

6.  He  learned  that  the  commander  was  involved  in  danger. 

B.  i.    We  will  urge  them  to  3  help  one  another. 

2.  Don't4  be  afraid,  face  about  and  charge  the  Nervii. 

3.  The  soldiers  fear  being  hard  pressed  by  the  enemy. 

4.  Labienus  could  see  what  danger  the  camp  was  in. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XVIII-XXVI 

271.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs,  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 

i  See  87,  89.  2  See  174.  »  Review  147.  *  See  116. 


138 


LATIN   PROSE  COM  POSITION  — PART  II 


I. 

pello. 

26. 

provided. 

2. 

compello. 

27. 

converto. 

3- 

compleo. 

28. 

aliter. 

4- 

nascor. 

•       29. 

ordo. 

5- 

subsequovu 

30. 

ratio. 

6. 

defero. 

31- 

decllvis. 

7- 

discedo. 

32. 

accll  vitas. 

8. 

accedo. 

33-" 

pars. 

9- 

arcesso. 

34- 

par. 

10. 

praescrlbo. 

35- 

apertus. 

ii. 

doceo. 

36. 

alius. 

12. 

veto. 

37- 

alter. 

IS- 

administro. 

38. 

altus. 

14. 

concurro. 

39- 

opera. 

15- 

occurro. 

40. 

opus. 

16. 

obvenio. 

41. 

opus,  eris. 

17- 

adicio. 

42. 

ops. 

18. 

cohortor. 

43- 

paene. 

19. 

redintegro. 

44- 

fere. 

20. 

mando. 

45- 

collis. 

21. 

desero. 

46. 

adversus. 

22. 

versor. 

47- 

subsidium. 

23- 

intermitto. 

48. 

confertus. 

24. 

committo. 

49. 

conspectus. 

25- 

amitto. 

50. 

rursus. 

272.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Genitive  of  quality  to  denote  measure,  22.. 

2.  Dative  of  agent  with  passive  periphrastic  verbs,  95. 

3.  Passive  periphrastic,  oportet,  debed,  95,  in. 

4.  Cases  of  the  gerund,  91. 

5.  Clauses  after  verbs  of  urging,  ordering,  requesting,  147. 

6.  Moods  with  ubi,  ut, postquam,  etc.,  152. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  139 

273.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  271  and  the  constructions 
of  272.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 

274  CHAPTER   XXVII 


a.  ut  proximi  iacentibus  msis- 

terent. 

b.  ut  iudicarl  deberet. 


a.  that    the   next    stood   upon 

them  as  they  lay  fallen. 

b.  that  one  must  decide. 


A.  i.    Those  who  were  exhausted  with  wounds  leaned 
on  their  shields. 

2.  Let l  us  put  ourselves  ahead  of  the  cavalry. 

3.  He  stood  upon  his  friend  as  he  lay  fallen. 

4.  They  showed  such  valor  that  they  dared  to  do  very 
difficult  deeds.2 

5.  One  must  decide  that  the  Nervii  were  very  brave. 

B.  i.    They  leaned  on  their  shields  to  fight  men  who 
were  armed. 

2.  The  Nervii  are  so  brave  that  they  fight  as  they  lie 
exhausted  with  wounds. 

3.  One  must  decide  that  the  Gauls  dare  to  do  very  diffi- 
cult deeds.2 

275  CHAPTER   XXVIII 


a.  qui  arma  ferre  possent. 

b.  flnitimls    imperavit   ut  .  .  . 

prohiberent. 


a.  capable  of  bearing  arms. 

b.  he  ordered   their  neighbors 

to  refrain. 


A.      i.    The  elders  think   that   the  vanquished  are  not 
safe. 

2.    There  are  not  many  capable3  of  bearing  arms. 

1  See  115.  2  Omit  8  Review  174. 


140  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

3.  Caesar  ordered *   the    Nervii   to    be    protected   very 
carefully.  ^ 

4.  He  ordered  2  the  vanquished  to  use  their  own  towns. 

B.     i.    There  were  not  many  elders  capable3  of  bearing 
arms. 

2.  Caesar   ordered2   the   ambassadors  to   surrender   to 
him. 

3.  In  order  to  seem  to  exercise  mercy,  Caesar  orders1 
their  neighbors  to  spare  the  Nervii. 

276  CHAPTER   XXIX 


a.  cum    auxilio    Nerviis    veni- 

rent. 

b.  cum  alias   bellum    mferrent 

alias  inlatum  defenderent. 


a.  while  they  were  on  their  way 

to  help  the  Nervii. 

b.  when  at  one  time  they  made 

war,  at  another  defended 
themselves  when  attacked. 


A.  i.    While   we  were   on   our   way  to  help  you,  the 
battle  was  reported. 

2.  This  town  is  excellently  fortified  in  every  direction. 

3.  The  approach  had  been  fortified  with  rocks  of  great 
weight. 

4.  The  Cimbri  had  marched  into  Italy. 

5.  We  will  defend  ourselves  when  attacked. 

B.  i.    While  we  were  on  our  way  to  help  them,  it  was 
reported  that  a  battle  had  been  fought. 

2.  This  town,  which  is  excellently  fortified,  has  a  steep 
approach. 

3.  By  fortifying   this   wall,   they  defended   themselves 
when  attacked. 

1  Use  iubeo.  2  Use  impero.  3  Review  174. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  141 


277          CHAPTERS   XXX   AND   XXXI 


a.  vallo    in    circuitu    XV    mi- 

lium. 

b.  quod    tanta    machinatio    ab 

tanto     spatio     Instituere- 
tur. 

c.  traditis  armls. 


a.  by   a   wall   fifteen   miles   in 

circumference. 

b.  because  so  large  an  engine 

was  being   set  up  so  far 
off.     (See  1 73,  i.) 

c.  if  their  arms  were  surrendered. 


A.  i.    The  fort  was  sixty  feet  in  circumference. 

2.  The  Romans  saw  that  they  kept  themselves  in  the 
town. 

3.  A  tower  was  set  up  a  great  distance  off. 

4.  The  Gauls  laughed   because   the    Romans   were  so 
small. 

5.  We  will  surrender   ourselves   and   all   our  property 
to  you. 

6.  Caesar   used    his    customary1    kindness    which   the 
Gauls  had  heard  about. 

7.  He  says  that  Caesar  will  use  his  customary  1  kind- 
ness which  the  Gauls  have  heard  about. 

8.  If  we  are  deprived  of  our  arms,  the  enemy  will  kill 
our  children. 

B.  i.    A  tower  fifty  feet  in  circumference  was  set  up  a 
great  distance  off. 

2.  The  Gauls  laughed  because  the  Romans  expected  to 
move  this  tower. 

3.  If  the  Romans  can  move  such  an  engine,  they  have 
divine  help. 

4.  Quote  3,  indirectly  after  Galll  putabant. 

5.  We  beg  for  one  favor;  do  not  deprive  us  of  our  arms. 

6.  If  our  arms  are  surrendered,  what  tortures  shall  we 
not  suffer  ? 

i  Suus. 


142  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION— PART   II 


278  CHAPTER   XXXII 


a.  fmitimis     imperaturum     ne 
quam  iniuriam  mferrent. 


a.  that  he  would  order  their 
neighbors  not  to  inflict  any 
injury.  (See  72.) 


A.  i.    If  you  will  not  inflict  any  injury  on  us,  we  will 
surrender. 

2.  Quote  i  indirectly  after  dlxerunt. 

3.  They  threw  so  many  weapons  into  the  ditch  that  the 
piles  equaled  the  top  of  the  wall. 

4.  If1   the   arms   are    concealed,   they   will   not   enjoy 
peace. 

B.  i.    If  you  will  not  inflict  any  injury  on  us,  we  will 
do  what  you  order. 

2.  Quote  i  indirectly  after  dicunt. 

3.  Although  many  arms  were  concealed,  yet  they  en- 
joyed peace. 

279  CHAPTER   XXXIII 


a.  concursum  est. 


b.  capitum  numerus  relatus 
est  milium  qumquaginta 
trium. 


a.  there  was  a  rush,  they  ran 

together. 

b.  the    number    of    souls    was 

reported  to  be  fifty-three 
thousand. 


A.    i.    Let  the   townsmen   receive   no  injury  from  our 
men. 

2.  The    Gauls    believed    Caesar    would   withdraw   the 
garrisons. 

3.  Had  they  formed  this  plan  before  ? 

4.  There  was  a  rush  to  fight  the  enemy. 

1  Avoid  the  use  of  si. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  143 

5.  Although  there  were   no  defenders,  the  gates  were 
broken  down. 

6.  The  number  of  those  who  were  killed  was  said  to  be 
four  thousand. 

B.      I.    Caesar  orders  the  soldiers  not  to  inflict  any  injury 
on  the  Gauls. 

2.  If   this   plan  was  entered  upon  before,  ought1   the 
townsmen  to  have  been  sold  ? 

3.  There  was  a  rush  on  the   part  of2  the   Romans  to 
fight  the  enemy. 

4.  The  number  of  those  who  were  killed  was  said  to  be 
four  thousand. 

280        CHAPTERS   XXXIV   AND   XXXV 


a.  utl    legati     mitterentur    qui 
pollicerentur. 


a.  that  ambassadors  were  sent 
tb  promise. 


A.  i.    Crassus  informed   Caesar  that  the  states  along 
the  coast3  had  been  pacified. 

2.  He   sent   officers   to    lead   the    legions   into   winter 
quarters. 

3.  Such  a  thanksgiving  had  never  been  voted  up  to  this 
time. 

4.  They  promised  4  to  return  to  Caesar. 

5.  We  will  do  what  he  orders. 

B.  i.    Crassus  informed  Caesar  that  the  states  which 
bordered  the  ocean  had  been  pacified. 

2.  He  sends  officers  to  lead  the  legions  among  the  states 
where  the  war  had  been  waged. 

3.  Such  a  thanksgiving  had  never  been  voted  up  to  this 
time  in  honor  of  any  one. 

1  Review  112.  2  "  on  the  part  of  "—what  does  this  mean  ? 

8  "  along  the  coast "  —  use  one  word.    4  "  to  return  "  —  ace.  and  fut.  infinitive. 


144 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS    XXVII-XXXV 

281.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  de- 
clension of  nouns  and  adjectives  : 


1.  instituo. 

2.  insists. 

3.  indlco. 

4.  iaceo. 

5.  iacio. 

6.  conficio. 

7.  deleo. 

8.  ascendo. 
9-  ago. 

10.  redigo. 

11.  praesto,  intrans. 

and  trans. 

12.  audeo. 

13.  defendo. 

14.  respondeo. 

15.  trado. 

1 6.  contineo. 

1 7.  invideo. 

1 8.  consuesco. 

1 9.  conf ido. 

20.  attingo. 

2 1 .  adaequo. 

22.  celo. 

23.  cado. 

24.  accido. 

25.  occldo. 


26.  consilium  inlre. 

27.  inermis. 

28.  nequlquam. 

29.  vulnus. 

30.  extremus. 

3 1 .  iniuria. 

32.  consensus. 

33.  consentio. 

34.  iter. 

35.  pondus. 

36.  saxum. 

37.  mansuetudo. 

38.  dementia. 

39.  quis,  inter,  and 

indef. 

40.  condicio. 

41.  exiguitas. 

42.  exiguus. 

43.  eruptio. 

44.  supplicatio. 

45.  supplicium. 

46.  pellis. 

47.  vis. 

48.  praesertim. 

49.  sicut. 

50.  noctu. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  145 

282.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Genitive  and  ablative  of  quality,  22,  49. 

2.  Dative  with  verbs  meaning  command,  obey,  etc.,  32. 

3.  Verbs  used  impersonally. 

4.  Constructions  with  iubed  and  impero,  147,  148. 

5.  Principal  statements  and  subordinate  clauses  in  in- 
direct discourse,  160,  166. 

6.  Uses  of  situs,  se,  sibi,  and  ipse,  65,  69,  74. 

7.  Relative  clauses  of  result  and  characteristic,  145.  I, 
174. 

283.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  281  and  the  constructions 
of  282.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


LATIN   PROSE  COMP. —  IO 


BOOK    III 

284  CHAPTER   I 

1.  What  reason  had1   Caesar   for   opening   up  a  road 
through  the  Alps  ? 

2.  I  will   permit   you,  if  you  think  there  is  need,  to 2 
winter  in  this  place. 

3.  Galba  was  permitted3  to2  go  among  the  Alps. 

4.  There  were  two  parts  in  the  village  of  Octodurus  ; 
one  4  the  soldiers  occupied,  the  other  Galba  fortified. 

285  CHAPTER    II 

1.  The  Gauls   who   had   left   the  village  occupied  the 
mountains. 

2.  They  informed  Galba  that  the  Gauls  who5  had  left 
the  village  were  occupying  the  mountains. 

3.  Will  the  Romans  be  able  to  sustain  the  Gauls'  attack, 
if6  many  of  the  soldiers  are  withdrawn  ? 

4.  We  are  persuaded  that  the  Romans  have  taken  the 
children  away  from  the  Gauls. 


1  See  34.  2  Do  not  use  the  infinitive. 

8  See  32,  2.  4  See  73. 

6  "  who  .  .  .  village "  —  is  a  subordinate  clause  in  indirect  discourse  ever  in 
the  indicative  ? 

6  Express  the  condition  in  some  other  way  than  by  using  si. 

146 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  147 

286  CHAPTER    III 

1 .  Sufficient  provision  for  supplies  had  not  been  made. 

2.  Can   supplies  be   brought   up   when   the   roads   are 
blocked  ? 

3.  Some  said,  "  Let1  us  go  back  by  the  same  roads  by 
which  we  came." 

4.  The  majority,  however,  did  not  decide  to  hasten  to  a 
place  2  of  safety. 

287  CHAPTERS   IV  AND   V 

1.  The  signal  was  given,  and  the  enemy  hurled  stones 
on  the  camp. 

2.  The  Romans  will  aid  that3  part  which  is  deprived  of 
defenders. 

3.  Not  only  not  the  weary,  but  not  even  the  wounded, 
retreated. 

4.  On  4  account  of  the  failing  strength  of  our  men,  the 
situation  was  critical. 

5.  He  said  to  Galba,  "  If  we  make  a  sally,  there  is  one 
hope  of  safety." 

6.  Therefore  Galba  said,  "  Stop   the  fight  and  refresh 
yourselves." 

7.  Tell  the  soldiers  to 5  rush  out  of  camp. 

288  CHAPTER   VI 

i.    You  leave  us  no6  opportunity  either  of  learning  what 
is  going  on  or  of  collecting  our  wits. 

1  See  115.  2  "a  piace  of"  —  omit. 

8  "  that  part  which  "  —  study  the  text  —  quaecumque  pars  .  .  .  eo. 
4  "  on  ...  men,"  express  by  a  clause.  5  See  147,  148, 

e  Combine  the  negative  with  " either"  and  " or." 


148  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION— PART   II 

2.  We  entertained  the  hope  of  surrounding  the  enemy. 

3.  Galba  came  into  the  Alps  with  one  purpose,  but  met 
a  different  situation.1 

4.  Since  the  enemy  had  been  defeated,  Galba  returned 
to  the  province. 

289  CHAPTERS   VII    AND   VIII 

1.  Caesar2  had  every  reason  to  believe  that  he  could 
start  for  Illyricum. 

2.  The  cause  of  the  sudden  war  that  broke  out  near  the 
ocean  was  as  follows : 

3.  The  Veneti  kept  Caesar's  ambassadors  with  the  pur- 
pose of  getting  back  their  own  hostages. 

4.  All  who  are  in  the  habit  of   using  the  harbors  are 
tributaries  of  the  Veneti. 

5.  In  many  respects  the  Veneti  surpassed  the  Romans. 

6.  We  had  rather3  recover  our   hostages  than  put  up 
with  the  slavery  of  the  Romans. 

7.  They  said  to  Crassus  that  they  would  send  back  the 
ambassadors,  if  he  would  give  up  their  hostages. 

290  CHAPTER    IX 

1.  Crassus  informed  Caesar  of  all  these  matters. 

2.  After  many  war  vessels  had  been  built,  Caesar  him- 
self came  just  as  soon  as  possible. 

3.  We  see  what  a  crime  we  have  been  guilty  of. 

4.  Since  you  have  thrown  ambassadors  into  chains,  get 
ready  for  war. 

1  Use  res.  2  Cf.  text  —  cum  omnibus  .  .  .  exlstimaret. 

3  "  we  had  rather  "=  we  prefer. 


CAESAR,    GALLIC   WAR 


149 


5.  We  are  confident  that  nothing  will  happen  contrary 
to  expectation. 

6.  The  Veneti  think  they  know  the  shallows  in  those 
places  where  they  will  carry  on 1  war. 

7.  Let  us  get  together  as  much  grain  as  possible. 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS    I-IX 

291.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  memorizing  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  declension 
of  nouns  and  adjectives  : 


1 .  pertineo. 

2.  volo. 

3.  malo. 

4.  nolo. 

5.  permitto. 

6.  patior. 

7.  concede. 

8.  premo. 

9.  detraho. 

10.  abstraho. 

1 1 .  sustineo. 

12.  doleo. 

13.  persuaded. 

14.  intercludo. 

15.  placeo. 

1 6.  attribuo. 

17.  antecedo,  with  the  ace. 

1 8.  discedo. 

19.  excedo. 

20.  succedo. 


2 1 .  msto. 

22.  consto. 

23.  colligo. 

24.  reficio. 

25.  potior. 

26.  occurro. 

27.  adeo. 

28.  coorior. 

29.  secundus. 

30.  castellum. 

3 1 .  undique. 

32.  ubique. 

33.  vallis. 

34.  vallum. 

35.  aliquot. 

36.  consilium  capere. 

37.  singillatim. 

38.  frustra. 

39.  paucitas. 

40.  satis. 


1  See  94,  134. 


150  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 


4 1 .  hiems. 

42.  concilium. 

43.  consilium. 

44.  sententia. 

45.  opinio. 


46.  portus. 

47.  defectio. 

48.  deficio. 

49.  integer. 

50.  incolumis. 


292.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax  : 

1.  Ablative  with  utor,  potior,  etc.,  44. 

2.  The  gerundive  construction  with  these  verbs. 

3.  Object  clauses  with   verbs  of  feeling.      Substantive 
clauses  introduced  by  quod. 

4.  Intransitive  verbs  used  in  the  passive,  32.  2. 

5.  Causa  with  genitive  of  gerund  and  gerundive,  91,  93, 
142.  i,  2. 

6.  Conditional  clauses ;  simple  supposition  of  fact,  and 
supposition  of  something  contrary  to  fact,  121-123. 

293.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  291  and  the  constructions 
of  292.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


294  CHAPTERS   X   AND   XI 

1.  Although   there  were   many  difficulties,  yet   Caesar 
thought  he  ought  to  wage  war. 

2.  If  this  revolt  is  overlooked,  the  Morini  will  think  they 
may 1  do  the  same  thing. 

3.  All  men  ought2  to  hate  slavery. 

4.  He  instructed  Labienus  to  go  with  the  cavalry.  • 

1  Review  carefully  117,  119.  2  See  in. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  I$I 

5.  Caesar    sent   Crassus    to    keep    the    enemy    from1 
uniting. 

6.  He  took  care2   that   aid   should   not   be   sent  from 
Aquitania. 

295  CHAPTER   XII 

1.  The  towns  were  so  situated  that  there  was  no  access 
either  on  foot  or  by  ships. 

2.  Caesar,  therefore,  shut  off  the  sea  by  dikes  which3 
he  made  equal  to  the  walls  of  the  town. 

3.  They  can  remove   their   goods   on  account  of  their 
abundance  of  ships. 

4.  The  tide  ebbs  twice  every  twenty-four  hours. 

296  CHAPTER   XIII 

1.  The   ships   of   the  Veneti   are   flat-bottomed,   so  as 
more  easily  to  encounter  the  shoals. 

2.  Since  they  were  made  wholly  of  oak  they  could  en- 
dure any  violence. 

3.  They  thought  that  linen  sails  would  not   withstand 
such  severe  gales  of  wind. 

4.  Their  ships  can't  be  harmed  with  the  ram. 

5.  They  were  of  such  great  height  that  weapons  could 
not  easily  be  thrown  to  them. 

6.  Our  ships  had  to  fear  the  rocks  and  shoals. 

297  CHAPTER   XIV 

1.  Caesar  decided  that  he  ought  not  to  spend  so  much 
labor  in  vain. 

2.  It  is  not  clear  to  me  what  plan  of  battle  to  adopt. 

i  See  150.  2  cf.  in  the  text  —  qui  earn  .  .  .  curet.  a  See  174. 


152  LATIN    PROSE   COM  POSITION  —  PART   II 

3.  The  enemy  cannot   be  injured  with   the   towers  on 
account  of  the  height  of  their  ships. 

4.  The  poles  that  were  prepared  by  our  men  were  very 
useful. 

5.  Our  soldiers  surpass  the  Veneti  in  valor. 

6.  No  deed  of  valor  escaped  notice,  because  Caesar  had 
a  view  of  the  sea. 

298  CHAPTERS   XV   AND   XVI 

1 .  The  enemy  sought  safety  in  flight,  when  they  noticed 
our  men  boarding l  their  ships. 

2.  The  calm  was  so  sudden  that  we  could  easily  finish 
the  business. 

3.  We  will  follow  up  and  capture  the  ships  one  by  one. 

4.  Let  us  collect  into  one  place  whatever  ships  we  have 
anywhere. 

5.  We  have  no  place  to  retreat2  to. 

6.  Caesar  decided  that  they  must  be  sold  into  slavery. 

299  CHAPTER   XVII 

1.  While  Caesar  was3  fighting  with  the  Veneti,  many 
states  revolted. 

2.  When  the  gates  are  closed,  we  will  unite  with  them. 

3.  Every  day  the  enemy  offered   Sabinus  a  chance  to 
fight. 

4.  We  will  stay  in  camp,  although   we   are  somewhat 
criticised. 

5.  Ought  Sabinus  to  fight  when  Caesar  is  absent? 

1  Do  not  use  the  participle.  2  Cf.  in  text  —  quo  se  reciperent. 

3  See  102,  2. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR  153 

300  CHAPTER   XVIII 

1 .  He  persuaded  a  certain  man  to  set  forth  the  fear  of 
the  Romans. 

2.  The  Gauls  did  not  know  when  Sabinus  would  set  out 
from  his  camp. 

3.  We  ought  not  to  lose  an  opportunity  of  going  to  the 
camp. 

4.  We  shall  not   hasten   to   the   camp  until 1  we  have 
taken  arms. 

5.  We  have  collected  fagots  to  fill  the  ditch  with. 

301  CHAPTER   XIX 

1.  The  Romans  rallied  and  armed  themselves  in  as  little 
time  as  possible. 

2.  When  the  enemy  arrived,  all  out  of  breath,  Sabinus 
gave  his  men  the  signal  which  they  desired.2 

3.  As  a  result3  of  the  bravery  of  our  men,  not  even  one 
of  the  enemy  escaped. 

4.  Sabinus  informed  Caesar  of  his  victory. 

5.  The  Gauls  are  quick  to  surrender. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   X-XIX 

302.  Review  thoroughly  the  meanings  of  the  following 
words,  learning  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  de- 
clension of  nouns  and  adjectives  : 


1.  desum. 

2.  deficio. 

3.  careo. 

4.  praesum. 


5 .  nosco. 

6.  distribuo. 

7.  partior. 

8.  pareo. 


1  See  156.  2  Cf.  in  the  text  —  cupientibus  slgnum  dat. 

8  Cf.  in  the  text—  faction  est  .  .  .  ut  .  .  .  ferrent. 


154 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 


9.  compare. 

10.  noceo. 

1 1 .  concido. 

12.  concido. 

13.  consector. 

14.  amitto. 

15.  admitto. 

1 6.  neglego. 

17.  licet. 

1 8.  studeo. 

19.  odi  (see  106). 

20.  mando. 

21.  euro. 

22.  trado. 

23.  navigatio. 

24.  classis. 

25.  facultas. 

26.  opportunitas. 

27.  occasio. 

28.  tempestas. 

29.  funis. 


30.  polliceor. 

31.  pollicitatio. 

32.  ferreus. 

33.  similis. 

34.  alacer. 

35.  eiusmodi. 

36.  admodum. 

37.  clam. 

38.  f acinus. 

39.  officium. 

40.  imprimis. 

41.  onus. 

42.  servitus. 

43.  quemadmodum. 

44.  quidam. 

45.  quidem. 

46.  lateo. 

47.  perfero. 

48.  adaequo. 

49.  sumo. 

50.  contumelia. 


303.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Dative  with  compounds  of  sum,  33. 

2.  Predicate  genitive.     (Consult  grammar.) 

3.  Place  where t  whence,  whither.     (Consult  grammar.) 

4.  Gerundive  with  curd,  trade,  etc.     (Consult  grammar.) 

5.  Constructions   with  priusquam  and  with  postqnam, 
152,  154. 

6.  Concessive  clauses,  171. 


304.    The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  302  and  the  constructions 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  155 

of  303.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


305  CHAPTER   XX 

1.  I  see  that  we  must  fight  in  the  same  place  where  a 
Roman  army  has  been  defeated. 

2.  A  few  years  ago  Manlius  lost  his  baggage,  because 1 
he  did  not  use  ordinary  diligence. 

3.  The  Romans  were  not  very  strong  in  cavalry. 

4.  Place  your  infantry  in  the  valley  in  ambush. 


306  CHAPTER   XXI 

1.  Let  us  rely  on  our  bravery,  and  not  turn  and  flee. 

2.  What  can  you  do  when2  you  have  no  general? 

3.  We  perceived  that  the  Aquitanians  were  skillful3  in 
working  mines. 

4.  They  asked  Caesar  to  do  this. 


307  CHAPTER   XXII 

1.  We  shall  enjoy  life  along  with  those  to  whose  friend- 
ship we  have  pledged  ourselves. 

2.  If  anything  happens  to  you,  we  shall  commit  suicide. 

3.  There  is  no  one  who  will  refuse  to  die,  if4  his  friend 
is  killed. 

4.  Although  5  he  was  repulsed,  yet  he  fought  bravely. 


1  See  89,  173.  2  "when  .  .  .  no"=without.  8  See  24. 

4  Do  not  use  si.  6  See  87. 


156  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION— PART   II 

308  CHAPTER   XXIII 

1 .  The  town  was  taken  a  few  days  after 1  we  arrived. 

2.  Let  us  ask  for  help  and  exchange  hostages. 

3.  Do  not  think  that  they  have  not  great  skill  in  Roman 
customs. 

4.  We  ought  not  to  hesitate 2  to  cut  the  enemy  off  from 
supplies. 

5.  Do  you  all  entertain  the  same  opinion  ? 

309  CHAPTER   XXIV 

1.  Let  us  wait  to  see  what  plan  the  enemy  will  adopt. 

2.  I  think  it  will  not  be  safe  to  lead3  out  our  troops  and 
draw  up  a  double  line  of  battle. 

3.  We   shall   attack   the    Romans    while   they   are   re- 
treating.3 

4.  We  must  no  longer  delay  encouraging  the  soldiers. 

310  CHAPTER   XXV 

1.  Some  hurled  weapons,  while4  others  provided  stones. 

2.  We  do  not  put  much  confidence  in  you.5 

3.  We  announced  to  Crassus  that  the  enemy  were  fight- 
ing fearlessly. 

311  CHAPTER   XXVI 

1.  We  urged  them  to  show  us  what  was  being  done. 

2.  The   horsemen   are   being   led   around   by  a  longer 
route,  so  that  the  attention  of  the  enemy  may  not  be  fixed 
on  them.6 

1  Cf.  in  text  — paucis  diebus  quibus.     2  See  text  and  note  exception  to  136,  i. 
s  Use  the  participle.  <  Qmit.  6  See  32.  6  Review  65. 


CAESAR,    GALLIC   WAR  1 57 

3.  They  demolished  the  gate  before  they  were  seen  by 
the  enemy. 

4.  It  is  clear  that  thirty  thousand  Gauls  were  killed. 

312  CHAPTER   XXVIII 

1.  They  are  the  only  ones  left  whom1  Caesar  has  not 
conquered. 

2.  I  think  that  Caesar  carries  on  war  in  a  very  different 
manner  from  the  Morini. 

3.  When  we  betook  ourselves  and  all  our  property  into 
the  woods,  Caesar  could  not  attack  us. 

4.  We  lost  a  few  of  our  men,  because  2  we  followed  the 
enemy  too  far. 

313  CHAPTER   XXIX 

1.  Having3  cut  down   the  forest,  Caesar  piled  up  the 
material  as  a  rampart. 

2.  On  account  of  the  rains,  the  soldiers  cannot  remain 
longer  in  their  tents. 

3.  Caesar  will  burn  their  villages  and  lead  his  army  into 
winter  quarters. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XX-XXIX 

314.  Review  thoroughly  the  meaning  of  the  following 
words,  learning  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  and  the 
declension  of  nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  aestimo. 

2.  existimo. 

3.  intellego. 

4.  adorior. 


5.  committo. 

6.  ostendo. 

7.  cupio. 

8.  perspicio. 


i  See  174.  2  Review  173.  3  See  85,  89. 


158 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART   II 


9.  conspicio. 

10.  obsideo. 

11.  reperio. 

12.  tollo. 

13.  impetro. 

14.  impero. 

15.  inter  cludo. 

1 6.  augeo. 

17.  decerto. 

1 8.  arbitror. 

19.  supersum. 

20.  despero. 

21.  repello. 

22.  depello. 

23.  vetus. 

24.  praemium. 

25.  ultra 

26.  palus. 

27.  item. 

28.  latitude. 

29.  multitude. 


30.  finitimus. 

3 1 .  nominatim. 

32.  plurimum  valere,  posse. 

33.  fretus. 

34.  sine. 

35.  adulescentulus. 

36.  imber. 

37.  materia. 

38.  pecus. 

39.  deinceps. 

40.  commodum. 

41.  casus. 

42.  causa. 

43.  adhuc. 

44.  quisquam. 

45.  quisque. 

46.  tandem. 

47.  tamen. 

48.  adsuetus. 

49.  peritus. 

50.  consto. 


315.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax: 

1.  Genitive  with  adjectives,  24. 

2.  Ablative  of  respect,  47. 

3.  Passive  periphrastic  and  future  infinitives,  95,  109. 

4.  Quo  in  purpose  clauses,  143.  2. 

5.  Supine  to  express  purpose,  96.  i. 

6.  Conditions  referring  to  future  time,  124,  125. 

316.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  314  and  the  constructions 
of  315.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 


BOOK  IV 

317  CHAPTER    I 

1.  In  the  consulship  of  Pompey  and  Crassus,  the  Ger- 
mans  came   into   Gaul   on   account   of   their  being  hard 
pressed  by  the  Suevi. 

2.  The  Suevi  used 1  to  lead  a  thousand  armed  men  from 
each  2  of  the  hundred  cantons. 

3.  The  former  stay  at  home,  while  the  latter  go  out  to 
wage  war. 

4.  No  one  is  allowed  3  to  own  land. 

5.  Freedom  of  life  makes  them  men  of  extraordinary 
power. 

318  CHAPTER   II 

1.  We  had  no  buyers4  for  what  we  captured  in  war. 

2.  The  Germans  made  their  pack  horses  capable  of  very 
great  labor. 

3.  It  was  considered  very  disgraceful  to  use  wine. 

4.  Do  not  allow  yourselves  to  become  weakened. 

319  CHAPTER   III 

1.  They  say  that  their   neighbors  are  unable  to  with- 
stand the  violence  of  the  Suevi. 

2.  Merchants  resort  to  the  Ubii  often. 

3.  Although  the  Ubii  are  Germans,  yet  they  are  more 
civilized  than  the  Suevi. 

1  See  103.  2  Cf.  in  text  —  ex  quibus  .  .  .  singula  milia,  etc. 

8  See  32.  2.  4  Cf.  in  text  —  quibus  vendant. 

159 


160  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 

320  CHAPTER   IV 

1.  The  Usipites  wandered  about  in  Germany  for  many 
years. 

2.  Having  reached  the  Rhine,  the   Menapii  prevented 
them  from 1  forcing  a  passage  over  the  river. 

3.  Scouts  informed  the  Menapii  that  the  Germans  had 
returned  home. 

4.  At  last  they  came  back  again  and  seized  many  ships. 

5.  They  crossed  the    Rhine   before   the   Menapii  were 
informed  of  their  arrival. 

321  CHAPTER   V 

1.  Caesar  fears  that  the  Gauls  are  desirous  of  a  change 
of  government. 

2.  The  Gauls  ask  travelers,  "  From  what  regions  have 
you  come?" 

3.  You  will  have  to  repent  of  the2  schemes  you  have 
entered  upon. 

322  CHAPTER   VI 

1.  The  things  we3  expected  would  happen  Jiave  taken 
place. 

2.  They  invited  us  to    send   ambassadors  earlier  than 
usual. 

3.  I  think  we  ought  to  wage  war  with  the  Germans. 

323  CHAPTER   VII 

1.  If  provoked,  we  do  not  refuse  to  resist  our  enemies. 

2.  Write  i  indirectly 4  after  dlxerunt. 

1  See  150.  2  See  71.  5.  8  See  71.  4. 

4  Review  carefully  165-169. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  l6l 

3.  Resist  anybody  that  makes  war  on  you. 

4.  Write  3  indirectly  l  after  dicit. 

5.  There  is  nobody  that  is  a  match   for  the  immortal 
gods. 

324  CHAPTERS    VIII    AND    IX 

1.  Caesar  says  that,  if  you  cannot  defend  your  own  ter- 
ritory, you  cannot  hold  that2  belonging  to  others. 

2.  You  may3  ask  help  of  the  Ubii. 

3.  Having  reported  these  things  to  their  people,  the  am- 
bassadors returned  to  Caesar. 

4.  They  asked  Caesar  to  wait  for  their  cavalry,  so  as  to 
cause  a  delay. 

325  CHAPTER   X 

1.  The  Meuse  approaches   the    Rhine   not   more  than 
eighty  miles  from  the  ocean. 

2.  Those  who  live  on  the   islands  subsist  on  fish  and 
birds'  eggs. 

326  CHAPTER   XI 

The  Germans  did  not  wish  Caesar  to  advance  any  far- 
ther. Therefore,  in  order  to  cause  a  delay,  as  Caesar 
thought,  they  asked  him  to  give  them  time  to4  send  am- 
bassadors among  the  Ubii.  Caesar  said,  "  I  will  remain 
here  for  one  day ;  but  to-morrow  assemble  here  in  as  large 
numbers  as  possible."  He  said  to  the  prefects  who  were 
in  charge  of  the  cavalry,  *'  Do  not  provoke  the  enemy  to 
an  engagement." 

1  Review  carefully  165-169.  2  "  that  .  .  .  others  "  —  one  Latin  word. 

8  See  117,  118.  4  Cf.  in  text  —  ad  has  res  conficiendas. 

LATIN   PROSE   COM  P.  —  1 1 


1 62  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 

327  CHAPTER   XII 

The  enemy,  although  our  cavalry  outnumbered  them, 
made  an  attack  quickly  on  our  men  while  they  had  no 
fear.  As  was  their  custom,  the  Germans  leaped  to 
their  feet  and  began  to  stab  our  horses  underneath.  A 
great  many  of  our  men  were  overthrown,  and  the  rest  fled 
until 1  they  came  to  our  van.  Among  the  seventy-four  of 
our  men  that  were  killed  in  this  fight  was  Piso,  who  was 
thrown  from  his  horse  and  killed,  while  l  he  was  rescuing 
his  brother  from  danger. 

328  CHAPTER   XIII 

After  Caesar  had  learned  of  this  battle,  thinking  that  it 
was  the  height  of  folly  to  wait  until  the  enemy  had  time  to 
collect  their  forces,  he  decided  that  he  ought  not  to  listen 
to  their  ambassadors.  Therefore,  when  a  crowd2  of  Ger- 
mans came  to  camp  on  the  next  morning  to  excuse  them- 
selves for3  having  attacked  his  cavalry,  he  thought  it  a 
very  opportune  occurrence,4  and  retained  them  all.  He 
led  all  his  troops  out  of  camp  and  decided  to  give  battle. 

REVIEW   OF  CHAPTERS    I-XIII 

329.  Review  the  following  vocabulary  thoroughly,  memo- 
rizing the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  declension  of 
nouns  and  adjectives  : 


1.  adsuefacio. 

2.  consuesco. 

3.  desilio. 


4.  tueor. 

5.  communico. 

6.  transeo. 


1  Dum,  see  156.  2  "  a  crowd  of  Germans  "=the  Germans  in  crowds. 

8  "  for  having  "= because  they  had.  4  res. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


163 


7.  prohibeo. 

8.  alo. 

9.  incolo. 

10.  vendo. 

11.  fallo. 
i2o  adhibeo. 

13.  sustineo. 

14.  revertor. 

15.  studeo. 

1 6.  servio. 

1 7.  occurro. 

1 8.  resisto. 

1 9.  attribuo. 

20.  concede. 

2 1 .  appropinquo. 

22.  antecedo. 

23.  inter cludo. 

24.  obtineo. 

25.  occupo. 

26.  offero. 

27.  vis. 

28.  vestltus. 

29.  vestigium. 


30.  metus. 

3 1 .  timor. 

32.  perfidia. 

33.  humilis. 

34.  hiems. 

35.  quotannls. 

36.  cotidie. 
37-  cis. 

38.  citra. 

39.  sedes. 

40.  consido. 

41.  aliquot. 

42.  par. 

43.  pars. 

44.  oro. 

45.  peto. 

46.  quaero. 

47.  queror. 

finlre. 

48.  consilium  4 

( capere. 

49.  fingo. 

50.  invlto. 


330.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Genitive  of  possession  and  genitive  of  description  used 
in  the  predicate,  20,  22. 

2.  Uses  of  suns,  suf,  stbi,  se,  65,  69. 

3.  Indirect  object  used  with   transitive  verbs,  with  in- 
transitive verbs  of  special  meaning,  with  compound  verbs. 
How  are  these  verbs  used  in  the  passive  ?  31-33. 

4.  Indirect  statements,  commands,  questions,  134,  160, 
162,  166. 


1 64  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  II 

5.  Object  clauses  after  verbs  of  commanding,  requesting, 
urging,  etc.,  147. 

6.  Clauses  dependent  on  verbs  of  swearing  and  promising. 

331.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  329  and  the  constructions 
of  330.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 

332  CHAPTER   XIV 

Caesar  arrived  at  the  Germans'  camp  before  there  was 
time  to  seize  arms.  They  were  so  alarmed  at  his  sudden 
arrival  that  they  were  perplexed  as  l  to  whether  it  would 
be  better  to  fly  in  all  directions  or  to  resist  the  Romans. 
Those  who  could  seize  arms  defended  the  camp,  but  the 
rest  fled  and  were  overtaken  by  Caesar's  cavalry. 

333  CHAPTER   XV 

So  many  of  the  Germans  were  being  killed  that  the  rest 
abandoned  everything,  rushed  out  of  camp,  and  fled  to  the 
Rhine.  There  some  were  killed,  and  others  were  over- 
powered by  the  force  of  the  river.  Although  Caesar  gave 
to  those  who  had  remained  in  camp  the  privilege  of  depart- 
ing, they  wished  to  remain  with  him,  owing  to  their  fear2 
of  the  Gauls. 

334  CHAPTER   XVI 

Caesar  wished  to  cross  the  Rhine,  so  that  the  Germans 
might  fear  for  their  own  interests  and  be  induced  to  3  re- 

1  "  as  to  "  —  omit.  2  Do  not  use  a  noun. 

8  Do  not  use  the  infinitive. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  165 

turn  home  to  defend  their  own  territory.  Another  reason  1 
was  that  the  Sugambii  would2  not  surrender  to  Caesar  the 
horsemen  who  had  crossed  the  Meuse.  They  said  to 
Caesar,  "  It  is  not  fair  that  you  should  claim  any  power  or 
authority  across  the  Rhine."  The  Ubii  also  were  being 
hard  pressed  by  the  Suevi,  and  were  urging  Caesar  not  to3 
be  kept  from  helping  them  by  his  state  business.  They 
said  that  even  the  friendship  of  Caesar  would  be  very 
helpful4  to  them,  now  that  the  Germans  had  been  defeated. 

335  CHAPTER   XVII 

Therefore  Caesar  decided  that  he  must  cross  the  Rhine. 
Although  the  Ubii  promised  to  give  5  him  boats,  neverthe- 
less he  thought  he  must  build  a  bridge,  since  it  was  not 
quite  safe  or  consistent  with  his  dignity  to  carry  his  army 
over  in  ships. 

336  CHAPTER    XVIII 

Ten  days  after  he  had  decided  upon  the  plan,  Caesar 
led  his  army  across  the  Rhine.  He  decided  that  he  must 
leave  a  strong  garrison  at  the  bridge  before  he  hastened 
among  the  Sugambri.  These,6  at  the  suggestion  of  their 
friends,  did  not  send  Caesar  hostages,  but  fled  into  the 
woods. 

337  CHAPTER   XIX 

While  Caesar  was7  waiting  among  the  Sugambri,  he 
burned  all  their  villages  and  buildings.  He  then  learned 

1  Cf.  in  text  —  accessit  etiam  quod.  2  See  117. 

8  Do  not  use  the  infinitive.  4  See  37. 

6  Use  the  future  infinitive.  6  Use  the  relative  pronoun,  see  71,  6. 

7  See  102,  2. 


1 66  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

from  the  Ubii,  whom  he  promised  to  help,  that  the  Suevi 
had  found  out  about  the  bridge  and  had  gathered  them- 
selves and  all  their  property  into  one  place ;  and  that  they 
would  wait  there,  if  Caesar  decided  to  fight.  Caesar  had 
crossed  the  Rhine  to  frighten  the  Germans,  to  punish  the 
Sugambri,  and  to  free  the  Ubii  from  their  enemies.  There- 
fore x  when  he  found  that  these  objects  had  all  been  accom- 
plished, he  decided  to  retreat  into  Gaul. 

338  CHAPTER   XX 

Caesar  had  noticed  that  the  Britons  were  very  useful  to 
the  Gauls  in  war.  Therefore,  although2  a  small  part  of 
summer  remained,  he  decided  that  he  ought  to  find  out 
about  the  kind  of  people  and  about  the  harbors.  And  so, 
when  he  could  not3  find  out  from  the  merchants  what 
sort4  of  people  they  were,  or3  how  large  the  harbors  were, 
he  decided  to  set  out  for  Britain  in  person.5 

339  CHAPTER   XXI 

Volusenus  was  sent  forward  with  a  galley,  and  was  com- 
manded to6  make  a  careful  investigation.  He  came  back 
in  five  days  and  reported  that  he  had  not  dared  to  disem- 
bark. In  the  meantime,  while  Caesar  was  collecting  ships 
among  the  Morini,  ambassadors  came  to  him  from  the 
island  to  promise  friendship.  He  urged  them  to6  submit 
to  the  power  of  the  Romans,  and  allowed  them  to6  return 
home.  He  ordered  Commius,  who  was  very  highly7  re- 
garded by  them,  to  return  to  the  island  with  them  and  to 
announce  his  own  coming. 

1  qua  re.  2  See  171.  8  neque. 

4  "  What  sort  of"  —  qualis  ?  5  See  74,  i.  6  See  147. 

7  "was  .  .  .  regarded,"  cf.  the  text  — magm  habebatur,  and  see  29. 


CAESAR,    GALLIC   WAR  l6/ 

340  CHAPTER   XXII 

The  Morini  excused  themselves  for  their  former  deeds 
on  the  ground  that  they  were  unacquainted  with  Roman 
customs.  Caesar,  therefore,  promised  to  receive  them 
under  his  protection,  and  ordered  them  to  give  a  large 
number  of  hostages.  He  then  decided  that  he  ought  to 
start  at  once  with  what  ships  he  had,  since  he  feared  that 
the  wind  in  a  short  time  might  keep  him  from l  sailing.2 


341  CHAPTER   XXIII 

Since  the  cavalry  were  boarding  their  ships  too  slowly, 
Caesar  started  ahead  with  a  few  vessels  and  reached  Brit- 
ain first.  When  he  perceived  that  the  enemy  were  drawn 
up  on  the  hills,  and  could  hurl  weapons  on  his  men  as  they 
disembarked,  he  decided  that  he  ought  to  wait  until3  the 
rest  of  the  ships  could  help  him.  In  the  meantime  he 
gathered  his  officers  together,  and  showed  them  how4  he 
wished  everything  carried  out. 

342  CHAPTER   XXIV 

When  the  barbarians  learned  what  Caesar  had  decided 
to  do,  they  sent  forward  their  cavalry  and  charioteers  to 
keep  the  Romans  from  disembarking.  The  Romans,  how- 
ever, were  greatly  hindered  because  they  had  to  fight 
while 5  standing  in  deep  water,  while 5  the  enemy  could 
hurl  their  weapons  from  dry  land. 

1  Cf.  in  text  — vento  tenebantur  quo  minus  .  .  .  possent. 

2  solvo.  8  See  156.  4  quern  ad  modum. 

6  Which  of  these  two  ideas  may  be  expressed  by  the  participle  ? 


168  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  II 

343  CHAPTER   XXV 

Caesar,  therefore,  in  order  to  dislodge  the  enemy,  sta- 
tioned the  galleys  on  the  exposed  flank  of  the  barba- 
rians. They  were  so  alarmed  at  this  maneuver1  that 
they  halted  and  began  to  retreat.  The  standard  bearer2 
of  one  of  the  legions  then  urged  his  comrades  to  jump 
down  into  the  water,  if  they  did  not  wish  to  betray  the 
eagle  to  the  barbarians.  Hereupon  they  all  jumped  from 
the  ships  and  did  their  duty  to  the  commonwealth  and  to 
their  general. 

344  CHAPTER   XXVI 

When  the  enemy  noticed  that  our  men  were  jumping 
one3  from  one  ship,  another  from  another,  and  that  they 
could  not  get  a  firm  footing,  they  surrounded  them  one  by 
one,  and  threw  them  into  great  confusion.  But  as  soon  as 
Caesar  filled  the  skiffs  with  soldiers  and  sent  them  to  help 
his  men,  the  enemy  fled  and  the  Romans  were  able  to 
stand  on  dry  land.  Caesar  could  not  pursue  them  on 
account  of  the  lack4  of  cavalry. 

REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS   XIV-XXVI 

345.  Review  the  following  vocabulary  thoroughly, 
memorizing  the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  declen- 
sion of  nouns  and  adjectives : 


1 .  irrumpo. 

2.  immitto. 

3.  expono. 


4.  solvo. 

5.  ago,  several  meanings. 

6.  praesto. 


1  res.  2  See  71,  7.  3  Cf.  in  text,  alius  alia  ex  navi. 

4  Do  not  use  a  noun.     Express  the  whole  idea  by  a  clause. 


CAESAR,  GALLIC  WAR 


I69 


7.  opprimo. 

8.  pereo. 

9.  discedo. 

10.  distribuo.  . 

1 1 .  audeo. 

12.  confido. 

13.  intersum. 

14.  desum. 

15.  praesum. 

1 6.  praeficio. 

1 7.  nltor. 

1 8.  prodo. 

19.  contends. 

20.  coepl.  How  is  pass,  used  ? 

2 1 .  rescindo. 

22.  succldo. 

23.  incendS. 

24.  perspiciS. 

25.  adeo. 

26.  ulclscor. 

27.  comperiS. 

28.  reperio. 


29.  attingS. 

30.  obsidio. 

31.  lltus. 

32.  mStus. 
33-  blnl. 

34.  exiguitas. 

35.  exiguus. 

36.  onerarius. 

37.  onus. 

38.  navis  longa. 

39.  msuefactus. 

40.  imperltus. 

41.  idoneus. 

42.  adversus,  adj.  and  adv. 

43.  incolumis. 

44.  quisquam. 

45.  quisque. 

46.  opinio. 

47.  sententia. 

48.  ratio. 

49.  nequaquam. 

50.  latus. 


346.    Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax: 

1.  Dative  with  compounds  of  sum. 

2.  Translations  of  the  ablative  absolute. 

3.  Constructions  with  cum  as  temporal,  causal,  and  con- 
cessive conjunction,  153,  171,  173.  2. 

4.  Constructions  with  postquam,  ubi,  ut,  etc.,  152. 

5.  Constructions  with  priusquam  and  antequam,  154. 

6.  Simple  conditions  referring  to  present  and  past  time, 
and  conditions   referring  to  future   time  in   indirect   dis- 
course, 126,  169. 


I/O  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   II 

347.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  345  and  the  constructions 
of  346.  These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for 
oral  or  written  sight  practice. 

348  CHAPTER   XXVII 

As  soon  as  the  battle  was  over,  the  Britons  came  to 
seek  peace.  Caesar  complained  because  they  had  arrested 
Commius,  whom  he  had  sent  to  them  as  an  envoy,  but,  at 
their  request,1  he  said  he  would  pardon  their  action. 
When  Caesar  ordered  2  them  to  give  hostages,  they  replied, 
"  We  will  give  part  of  them  at  once,  but  the  rest  we  shall 
have  to  summon  from  distant  places." 

349  CHAPTER   XXVIII 

Two  days  after  the  battle  was  fought,  the  ships  that  had 
taken  the  cavalry  on  board  approached  Britain,  and,  just 
as3  they  were  visible  from  the  shore,  they  were  driven 
back  by  a  storm,  some  to  the  place  from  which  they  had 
started  and  others  to  the  westward.  The  latter  cast 
anchor,  but  were  filling  with  water  and  of  necessity  made 
for  Gaul. 

350  CHAPTER   XXIX 

Caesar  did  not  know  that  the  full  moon  causes  very 
high  tides,  and  so  he  had  drawn  up  the  galleys  on  the 
beach,  and  had  anchored  the  transport  ships.  The  next 
day  he  found  that  the  former  were  filled  with  water,  and 
that  the  latter  were  being  dashed  about  by  the  storm.  All 
the  soldiers,  therefore,  were  greatly  alarmed,  fearing  that 
they  could  not  return  to  Gaul,  unless  the  ships  were  repaired. 

1  Use  ablative  absolute.  2  Use  impero.  3  "just  as  "  =  when. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR  I /I 

351  CHAPTER   XXX 

When  the  Britons  came  to  Caesar  after  the  battle,  they 
noticed  how  contracted  the  camp  was,  and  perceived  the 
confusion  of  the  Roman  army  on  account  of  the  loss  of 
their  ships.  They  therefore  felt  confident  that,  if  they 
should  rebel1  and  prolong1  the  matter  until  winter,  they 
could  cut  Caesar  off  from  supplies  and  thus  frighten  2  any 
one  from  crossing  to  Britain  again. 

352  CHAPTER   XXXI 

Caesar,  suspecting3  from  the  fact  that  the  Britons  were 
conferring4  together  that  they  were  about  to  adopt  some 
new  plan,  sent  some  of  his  men  into  the  fields  for  grain, 
and  ordered  others  to  repair  the  ships.  The  soldiers  car- 
ried out  his  plans  with  such  zeal  that  he  was  ready  for 
every  emergency. 

353  CHAPTER   XXXII 

While  the  seventh  legion  was  foraging,  with5  no  sus- 
picion of  an  attack,  it  was  reported  to  Caesar  that  those 
who  were  on  guard  had  seen  a  cloud6  of  dust  in  that 
direction  where  the  legion  had  proceeded.  Suspecting 
that  the  enemy  were  attacking  his  men,  he  -left  a  guard-  at 
the  camp  and  went  at  once  to  help  his  soldiers.  He  found 
the  Romans  in  confusion,  because  they  had  been  sur- 
rounded while  engaged  in  reaping  the  grain. 

1  Use  ablative  absolute.  2  deterreo. 

«  What  tense  of  the  participle?    See  84. 

4  "  conferring  together,"  cf.  inter  se  conlocuti,  Chapter  30. 

5  "with  .  .  .  attack"  —  use  ablative  absolute. 

6  Express  this  idea  by  an  adjective. 


1/2  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 

354  CHAPTER   XXXIII 

Caesar  saw  how  the  Britons  fought  from  their  chariots. 
They  would 1  ride  about  in  all  directions  and  try  to  frighten 
the  enemy.  Then  they  would  station  the  chariots  a  little 
distance  from  the  battle  and  fight  on  foot,  so  that  they 
might  retreat  to  them  easily,  should  there  be  any  need. 
They  accomplished  so  much  by  their  daily  practice  that 
they  displayed  in  battle  the  speed  of  cavalry  and  the 
steadiness  of  infantry. 

355  CHAPTER   XXXIV 

Although  the  Romans  recovered  from  fear  at  the  arrival 
of  help,  yet  Caesar  thought  he  ought  to  lead  his  men  back 
to  camp  without2  any  loss  of  time.  Meanwhile  the  storms 
that  followed  kept  the  enemy  from  attacking  Caesar. 
But,  after  sending  messengers  in  every  direction  to  tell 
their  people  how  few  soldiers  the  Romans  had,  the  Britons 
gathered  a  large  number  of  troops  to  attack  Caesar's  camp. 

356  CHAPTERS    XXXV   AND   XXXVI 

When  Caesar  had  obtained  a  few  horsemen  with  which 
to  pursue  the  enemy,  he  decided  that  it  was  best  to  draw 
up  a  line  of  battle.  Just3  as  Caesar  expected,  the  Britons 
soon  fled,  and  many  of  them  were  killed  by  the  horsemen. 
At  the  conclusion  of  the  battle,  the  Britons  sent  ambassa- 
dors to  Caesar  to  say  that  they  would  do  whatever  he 
ordered.  When  the  weather  was  favorable,  he  set  sail  and 
arrived  at  Gaul  safely  in  a  short  time. 

l  See  103,  i.  2  "  without  .  .  .  time  "  —  use  the  ablative  absolute. 

8  "  Just  as  ...  expected  "  =  as  Caesar  thought  it  would  be. 


357 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR 

CHAPTER   XXXVII 


173 


Caesar  thought  that  the  Morini  were  subdued,  but  they 
attacked  about  three  hundred  of  his  soldiers  while  they 
were  hurrying  into  camp,  and  ordered  them  to  lay  down 
their  arms.  The  Romans  refused1  to  do  this,  and  de- 
fended themselves  for  several  hours  until  Caesar  sent  all 
the  cavalry  to  help  them.  Then  the  Morini  fled. 


358 


CHAPTER   XXXVIII 


Caesar  sent  Labienus  to  bring  the  Morini  under  his 
power.  He  did  this  2  very  easily,  because  the  Morini  had 
no  place  to3  use  as  a  refuge.  After  Titurius  and  Cotta 
had  laid  waste  the  fields  of  the  Menapii,  Caesar  led  his 
legions  back  into  winter  quarters. 


REVIEW   OF   CHAPTERS    XXVII-XXXVIII 

359.  Review  thoroughly  the  following  vocabulary,  memo- 
rizing the  principal  parts  of  verbs  and  the  declension  of 
nouns  and  adjectives : 


1.  adfllgo. 

2.  egredior. 

3.  defero. 

4.  comprehends. 

5.  Ignosco. 

6.  tollo. 

7.  coorior. 

8.  compleo. 


9.  accido. 

10.  occido. 

1 1 .  deligo. 

1 2.  conloquor. 

13.  prohibeo. 

14.  amitto. 

15.  ventito. 

1 6.  lacesso. 


1  "  refused  to  do  "  =  they  denied  that  they  would  do. 

2  Use  the  relative.    What  position  must  it  have  ? 


3  See  174. 


174 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   II 


1 7.  nanciscor. 

1 8.  nascor. 

19.  consists. 

20.  constituo. 

2 1 .  subicio. 

22.  animadverts. 

23.  complures. 

24.  aes. 

25.  praeda. 

26.  peditatus. 

27.  orbis. 

28.  Infra. 

29.  confestim. 

30.  lenis. 

31.  unde. 

32.  inde. 

33.  clam. 


34.  commode. 

35.  confer tus. 

36.  genus. 

37.  alienus. 

38.  tempestas. 

39.  etsl. 

40.  tergum. 

41.  continens. 

42.  nolo. 

43.  vulnus. 

44.  conspectus. 

45.  rebellio. 

46.  fere. 

47.  abdo. 

48.  praeceps. 

49.  plerumque. 

50.  eripio. 


360.  Review  the  following  principles  of  syntax : 

1.  Place  where,  whence,  whither. 

2.  Time  when,  within  which,  during  which,  51,  16. 

3.  Dative  of  service ;  translations  of  an  appositive,  36.  3. 

4.  Ways  of  expressing  purpose,  142,  143. 

5.  Active  and  passive  periphrastic,  94,  95. 

6.  Curd,  trado,  do  with  the  gerundive. 

7.  Unreal  conditions  in  indirect  discourse,  169.  4,  5. 

361.  The  instructor  should  form  original  English  sen- 
tences employing  the  words  of  359  and  the  constructions  of 
360.     These  sentences  may  be  given  to  the  class  for  oral 
or  written  sight  practice. 


PART    III 


CICERO,   FIRST   ORATION   AGAINST   CATILINE 

NOTE.  The  student  should  not  depend  on  the  English-Latin  vocabulary  for  the 
Latin  words.  The  text  upon  which  each  chapter  is  based  should  be  consulted 
for  the  necessary  words  and  phrases. 

362  CHAPTER   I 


a.  quid   consill   ceperis,  quern 

nostrum     Ignorare     arbi- 
traris  ? 

b.  te   duel   iam   pridem   opor- 

tebat. 

c.  novis  rebus  studentem. 

d.  Non  dee'st  rel  publicae  con- 

silium. 


a.  who  of  us  do  you  think  is 

ignorant  of  what  plan  you 
adopted? 

b.  long  ago  you  ought  to  have 

been  led. 

c.  who  desired  a  revolution. 

d.  the  republic  does  not   lack 

the  advice. 


1.  How  long,  Catiline,  do  you  think  you  can  baffle  us  ? 

2.  The  senate  has  been  called  together  in1  a  strongly 
fortified  place. 

3.  We  saw  what  plans  you  adopted  night  before  last. 

4.  Each  one  of   us   is   marked   out   for   slaughter   by 
Catiline. 

5.  If  we  avoid2  that  fellow's  weapons,  shall  we  do  our 
duty  by  the  state  ? 

6.  Catiline  ought  to  have  been  killed  long  ago. 

7.  Ought  we  to  put  up  with  Catiline  when3  he  desires 
a  revolution  ? 

1  into,  why?  2  See  104.  8  "  when  he  desires  "  — use  a  participle. 

175 


1/6  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 

8.  Do  you  remember  that  Publius  Scipio,  although  a 
private  citizen,  killed  Tiberius  Gracchus  ? 

9.  There  was  once  such  virtue  among  the  consuls  that 
they  punished  a  dangerous  citizen  most  vigorously. 

10.  We  consuls  do  not  lack  the  authority  of  the  senate. 


363 


CHAPTER   II 


a.  C.       Gracchus,      clarissimo 

patre. 

b.  num  unum   diem    L.  Satur- 

mnum  raors  remorata  est  ? 

c.  erit  verendum  mihi. 

d.  nondum  adducor  ut  faciam. 

e.  cum  iam  nemo  tarn  impro- 

bus    invemri    poterit,   qui 
non  fateatur. 

/.    Quam  diu  quisquam  erit  qui 
audeat. 


a.  Gaius   Gracchus,  a  man  of 

very  famous  father. 

b.  death  did  not   keep  Lucius 

Saturninus     waiting      for 
one  day,  did  it? 

c.  I  shall  have  to  fear. 

d.  I  am  not  yet  induced  to  do. 

e.  when   now  no  one  can   be 

found  so  wicked  as  not  to 
acknowledge. 

/.  As  long  as  there  will  be  any 
one  who  dares. 


1.  Let  the  consul  see  that  not  a  night  intervenes. 

2.  They  killed  Gaius  Gracchus,  a  man  of  very  distin- 
guished ancestry. 

3.  Did  not1  the  senate  decree  that  the  state  should  be 
intrusted  to  the  consuls  ? 

4.  Gaius  Servilius  was  killed,  was  he  not?1 

5.  We  shall  not  allow  Catiline  to  live,  shall1  we  ? 

6.  Since    Cicero   desired   not   to   seem   hasty,  he  con- 
demned himself  for  inactivity. 

7.  If  the  leader  of  the  enemy  is  in  the  city  and  actually 
among  us,  ought  he  not  to  be  killed  ? 

8.  We  shall  not  have  to  fear  that  we  have  acted  too 
cruelly. 

1  Review  78. 


CICERO,   CATILINE   I     .  1/7 

9.    Yet1  Cicero  was  not  induced  to  arrest  Catiline. 
10.    There  is  no  one  so  like  Catiline  as  to  acknowledge 
that  I  have  acted  cruelly. 

n.    Is  there  any  one  who  says  that  I  am  arbitrary  ?2 
12.    We  shall  watch  them,  although3  they  know  it  not. 

364  CHAPTER   III 


a.  obliviscere  caedis  atque  in- 

cendiorum. 

b.  licet  recognoscas. 

c.  ante    diem    XII     Kalendas 

Novembris. 

d.  nihil  cogitas,  quod  non  ego 

audiam. 


a.  forget  (cease  to  think  about) 

murder  and  fire. 

b.  you  may  review. 

c.  the    twelfth   day  before   the 

Kalends     of     November 
(i.e.  October  21). 

d.  you  plan  nothing  that  I  do 

not  hear  of. 


1.  Is  there  anything  that  a  private  house  can  contain 
within  its  walls  ?4 

2.  You  may  believe  my  words. 

3.  Cease  to  think  about  that  purpose  of  yours. 

4.  Don't  you  see  that  not  only  the  deed  but  also  the 
very  day  did  not  escape  me  ? 

5.  On  the  29th5  of  October  many  left  Rome  to  avoid 
your  wicked  companions. 

6.  You  don't  forget,  do  you,  that  you  were  surrounded 
so  that  you  could  not  move  against  the  state  ? 

7.  You  are  content  with  the  slaughter  of  the  rest  of  us 
who  remain. 

8.  I  am  confident  that  you  will  kill  those  who  remain. 

9.  You  do  nothing  that  is  not  reported  to  me  at  once. 
10.    On  the  24th5  of  October  Manlius  was  in  arms. 

1  verum.  2  dissolutus.  8  See  87,  6. 

•*  What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  paries,  moenia,  and  murus? 
6  See  H.  754-756  (641-645) ;  LM.  1169-1171;  A.  376;  G.  Appendix;  B.  371,  372. 
LATIN    PROSE   COMP. —  12 


1 78 


LATIN    PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART    III 


365 


CHAPTER   IV 


a.  Hos  ego  de  re  publica  sen- 

tentiam  rogo. 

b.  dixistl     paulum      tibi     esse 

etiam   nunc    morae   quod 
ego  viverem. 

c.  RepertT     sunt    duo    equites 

Roman!  qui   te    ista  cura 
liberarent. 

d.  sese  interfecturos  esse  polli- 

cerentur. 

e.  salutatum. 


a.  I  call  upon  them  to  vote  on 

public  matters. 
b.,  you  said  you  were  even  now 

delayed  a  little  because  I 

lived. 

c.  Two    Roman    knights   were 

found   to    free    you   from 
that  care. 

d.  promised  to  kill. 

<?.    in    order    to    pay   their   re- 
spects. 


1.  Cicero  used1  to  keep  a  sharp  lookout  for  the  safety 
of  the  state. 

2.  You  don't  deny,  do  you,  that  you  were  at  Marcus 
Laeca's  house  ? 

3.  If  you  had  denied  it,  I  would  have  proven  it. 

4.  We  have   right2  here  in  this  senate  men  who  are 
your  companions  in  crime. 

5.  I  ought  not  to  call  upon  such  men  to  vote. 

6.  I  have  not  arrested  these  men,  because3  I  wish  you 
to  lead  them  out  with  you. 

7.  You  were  delayed  a  little,  because3  I  fortified  my 
house. 

8.  You  sent  men  to  kill  me  at  my  house. 

9.  Romans  used1  to  go  to  the  house  of  the  consul  to 
pay  their  respects. 

10.    You  promised  to  free  us  from  the  conspirators. 

1  See  103. 

2  This  word  merely  emphasizes  "  here."     How  should  it  be  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

3  See  173. 


CICERO,   CATILINE  I 


179 


366 


CHAPTER   V 


//.  Quae  cum  ita  sint. 

b.  dum  modo   inter  me  atque 

te  murus  intersit. 

c.  nullo  tumultu  concitato. 

d.  quod  huius  imperi  proprium 

est. 

e.  me  imperante. 


a.  Since  this  is  so,  (therefore). 

b.  if    only    (provided)    a    wall 

intervene     between     you 
and  me. 

c.  without    arousing    any   con- 

fusion. 

d.  which  belongs  to  this  power 

of  mine. 

e.  at  my  command. 


1.  Since  your  companions  long  for  you,  leave  the  city. 

2.  I  shall  be  relieved  of  great  fear,  provided  you  take 
out  with  you  as  many  of  your  friends  as  you  can. 

3.  A  wall  ought  to  intervene  between  you1  and  me. 

4.  We   should   thank  Jupiter   for2  having  saved   the 
city. 

5.  As  long  as  Cicero  could  defend  himself  by  personal 
watchfulness,  he  did  not  employ  a  public  guard. 

6.  You  cannot  become  consul  without  killing  all  your 
rivals. 

7.  I  shall  oppose  Catiline,  although  he  dooms3  me  to 
destruction. 

8.  Although  this  belongs  tof  my  power,  I  have  not  yet 
dared  to  kill  Catiline. 

'9.    If  the  consul  should  order  you  to  leave  the  city,  you 
would  not  hesitate  to  go,  would  you,  Catiline  ? 

10.  Will  you  go  at  the  consul's  advice  ? 

11.  I  have  long  been  urging4  you  to  do  this  without  my 
command. 


1  "  you  and  me."     Note  the  order  of  these  words  in  the  next. 

2  "  for  having  saved  "  =  because  he  has  saved.  8  voco. 


See  147. 


i8o 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   III 


367 


CHAPTER   VI 


a.  nemo  est  qui  te  non  oderit. 

b.  ita  coniectas  ut  vltarl  posse 

non  viderentur. 

c.  Quotiens    tibi    iam    extorta 

est  ista  sica  de  manibus  ! 

d.  quod  earn  necesse  putas  esse 

defigere. 


a.  there   is   no  one  who   does 

not  hate  you. 
b'.  so  aimed  that  they  seemed 

impossible  to  be  avoided. 

c.  How  often  already  has  that 

dagger  been  wrested  from 
your  hands  ! 

d.  that  you  think  that  you  must 

plunge  it,  etc. 


1.  What  patriotic  citizen  does  not  hate  Catiline? 

2.  What  disgraceful  act  is  there  that  does  not  cling  to 
your  reputation  ? 

3.  There  was  nobody  who  did  not  fear  Catiline. 

4.  Have  you  not  offered  to  many1  a  young  man  swords 
for  their  reckless  daring  ? 

5.  I  will,  however,  pass  this  all  by. 

6.  Would2    that    such    a    crime    had    not    been    un- 
punished. 

7.  Who  doesn't  know  that  you  came  into  the  comitium 
for  the  sake  of  killing  the  consuls  ? 

8.  On  the  29th  of  December  it  was  the  good  luck  of  the 
Roman  people  that  opposed  your  purpose. 

9.  It  seemed  impossible3  for  you  to  kill  the  consul.  • 

10.  When4  I  was  consul-elect,  I  wrested  that  dagger 
from  your5  hands. 

11.  Do  you  think  that  you  must  kill  the  consul  ? 


1  "  Many  a  young  man  "  =  many  young  men.  2  See  128,  129. 

3  There  is  no  adjective  in  Latin  for  "  impossible."  4  See  3. 

6  Do  not  use  tuus.    See  36. 


CICERO,   CATILINE  I 


181 


368 


CHAPTER   VII 


a.  Quid,    quod     ista    subsellia 

vacuefacta  sunt? 

b.  Si  te  parentes  timerent   at- 

que    odissent    tui    aliquo 
concederes. 

c.  me  esse  .  .  .  non  est  feren- 

dum. 


a.  What  of  the  fact  that  those 

seats   near   you  were  va- 
cated ? 

b.  If  your  parents  feared  and 

hated  you,  you  would  re- 
tire somewhere. 

c.  it  is  not  to  be  endured  that 

I  should  be,  etc. 


1.  Ought  Cicero  to  have  been  moved  by  hatred  or  pity? 

2.  Did  you  not  see  the  seats  vacated  as  soon  as  you 
came  into  the  senate  ? 

3.  What  of  the  fact  that  this  has  happened  to  nobody 
since1  the  founding  of  the  city  ? 

4.  Do  you  not  think  you  ought  to  leave  the  city  ? 

5.  If2  my  fellow-citizens  should  hate  me,  I  would  not 
wish  to  be  seen  by  them. 

6.  If  you  knew  what  the   citizens  think  of  you,  you 
would  avoid  their  sight. 

7.  If   Catiline  had  feared  his  country's  authority,  he 
would  have  followed  her  decree. 

8.  Your  country  has  long  been  of  the  opinion  that  you 
would  not  hesitate  to  overthrow  her  laws. 

9.  In  your3  case  alone  crime  has  existed  unpunished 
for  many  years. 

i  o.    1 1  is  not  to  be  endured  that  we  should  always  fear  you. 

11.  If  you  leave  the  city,  we  shall  sometime  at  length' 
cease  fearing. 

12.  You  would  have  gone  long  ago,  had  you  regarded4 
the  feelings  of  your  countrymen. 


1 "  since  the  founding  of  the  city  "  =  after  the  city  having  been  founded. 

2  Review  121-125.         8  "  In  your  case  "  —  use  dative  of  reference.         4  sequor. 


182 


LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART   III 


369 

a.  ad  M'.  Lepidum. 


CHAPTER   VIII 


b.  ut  te  adservarem  rogasti. 

c.  faciam  ut  intellegas. 

d.  eosdem   facile    adducam 

te  prosequantur. 


ut 


at    the    house    of    Manlius 

Lepidus. 

you  asked  me  to  keep  you. 
I  will  make  you  understand. 
I    will    easily   induce    these 

same  persons  to  escort  you. 


1.  Cicero  said  to  Catiline  that,  if  the  country  should 
speak  with  him,  as  he  had  said,  she  ought  to  gain  her 
request. 

2.  To  avoid  suspicion,  Catiline  asked  Lepidus  to  keep 
him  at  his  house. 

3.  If  I  am  in  great  danger  because  city  walls  do  not 
intervene  between  you  and  me,  certainly  we  cannot  live 
within  the  same  house  walls. 

4.  If  you  are  worthy1  of  guardianship,  ought  you  to 
be  out  of  prison  ? 

5.  Cicero  asked  why,  if  he  could  not  die  with  resigna- 
tion, he  hesitated  to  leave  Rome. 

6.  Cicero  will  make  Catiline  leave  the  city  of  his  own 
accord. 

7.  Catiline  said  he  would  go  into  exile,  if  the  senate 
should  vote  that  to  be  its  pleasure. 

8.  Then  Cicero  said  the  senators  expressed  their  ap- 
proval by  their  silence.2 

9.  Do  you  think  that  the   senate  would3  have  kept 
silent,  had  Cicero  said  the  same  thing  to  a  patriotic  citizen  ? 

10.    The  senators  could   overhear  the  applause  of   the 
Roman  knights  who  stood  around  the  senate  in  crowds.4 


1  See  47,  2.  2  "  by  their  silence  "  —  use  a  participle. 

4  "  in  crowds  "  —  use  the  adjective  formed  from  frequentia. 


Review  169. 


CICERO,   CATILINE   I  183 

ii.    Cicero  said  he  would  induce  the  citizens  to  escort 
Catiline  to  the  gates  as  he  left  Rome. 

370  CHAPTER   IX 


a.  Utinam   tibi  istam    menteni 

dl       immortales       duintr 
(dent). 

b.  Sed  est  tanti. 

c.  ut  legum  poenas    pertimes- 

cas  non  est  postulandum. 


a.  Would    that    the    immortal 

gods  would  give  you  that 
purpose. 

b.  But  it. is  worth  while. 

c.  it  is  not  to  be  expected  that 

you  should  fear  the  pun- 
ishment of  the  laws    (cf. 


1 .  0 1  that  Catiline  would  reform  ! 

2.  Would  that  you  had  been  frightened  2  at  my  words, 
and  gone  2  into  exile  ! 

3.  It  is  worth  while  for  me  to  endure  the  storm  of 
unpopularity. 

4.  It  was  not  to  be   expected  that  fear  should  ever 
recall  Catiline  from  danger. 

5.  For  he  was  not  the  man  to  fear  anything. 

6.  Provided3  you  separate  yourself  from  loyal  citizens, 
leave  the  city. 

7.  If  you  should  go  straight  into  exile,  I  would  not  be 
able  to  endure  the  unpopularity. 

8.  Catiline  will  not  wage  war  upon  his  country  until 3 
he  betakes  himself  to  Manlius. 

9.  I  feel  sure  that  you  will  go  to  the  camp  of  Manlius, 
because  you  have  sent  the  eagle  ahead. 

10.    Don't  remain  in  Rome  any  longer,  for  how4  can 
you  get  along  without  your  friends  ? 

1  Review  128, 129.          2  Do  not  use  two  coordinate  verbs.          8  Review  172. 
4  Cf.  ut  .  .  .  possls  in  the  text. 


1 84  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART   III 

371  CHAPTER   X 

a.    Habes  ubi  ostentes.  a.   You  have  an  opportunity  to 

show    (literally   you   have 
where  you  may  show). 

1.  On  the  8th1  of   November  Cicero  had.  an  opportu- 
nity to  show  that  power2  of  speech  for  which  nature  had 
trained  him. 

2.  He  told  the  senate  that  Catiline  had  got3  together  a 
band  of  ruffians  who  were  bereft  of  all  hope. 

3.  With  what  pleasure  did  Cicero  rejoice  when  he  saw 
none  but  loyal  citizens  in  Rome ! 

4.  Catiline    had   many  an  opportunity  to   plot   against 
peaceful  citizens. 

5.  But  he  will  never  have  an  opportunity  of  assailing 
the  republic  as  a  consul. 

6.  I  wish  you  to  leave  the  city,  so  that  your  conspiracy 
may  be  called  robbery  rather  than  warfare. 

7.  Although  you   have  wonderful  endurance,  yet  you 
will  soon  be  exhausted  by  cold  and  hunger. 

372  CHAPTER   XI 


a.  Praeclaram    refers    gratiam 

(cf.    habere    gratiam   and 
agere  gratias). 

b.  si  quis  est  metus. 


a.   You    show    a    noble    grati- 
tude. 


b.   if  there  is  any  fear. 


1.  Senators,  I  urge  you  to  hear  what  the  country  says 
to  Catiline. 

2.  Don't  you  think  that  his  country  ought  to  be  dearer 
to  him  than  his  very  life  ? 

1  See  Ch.  Ill,  n.  2.  2  "  power  of  speech  "  =  dicendi  facultas. 

3  Review  165,  166. 


CICERO,  CATILINE   I 


I85 


3.  Many  thought  that  Cicero  was  not  sending  Catiline 
out  of  the  city,  but  letting  him  loose  against  the  city. 

4.  Cicero  told  the  senators  not J  to  fear  the  laws  about 
Roman  citizens. 

5.  For  he  said  that  those  who  had  revolted  from  the 
republic  were  not  citizens. 

6.  If  Cicero  had  any2  fear  of  unpopularity,  he  would 
not  show  gratitude  to  his  country. 

7.  Do  you  think  that  Cicero  ought  to  neglect  the  safety 
of  his  countrymen,  seeing  that  they  had  raised  him  at  a 
very  early  age  to  the  consulship  ? 

8.  Cicero  dreaded  the  reproach  of  inactivity  no  less  than 
that  of  severity. 


373 


CHAPTER   XII 


a.  qui  hoc  idem  sentiunt. 

b.  optimum  factu. 

c.  Hoc  uno  interfecto. 

d.  si  in  huncanim  advertissem. 


a.  who  hold  the  same  views. 

b.  the  best  thing  to  do. 

c.  if  this  one  man  is  killed. 

d.  i(  I  had  punished  him. 


1.  It  is  the  best  thing  to  do  to  make  a  brief  reply  to 
those  who  hold  the  same  views. 

2.  If  you  all  had  held  the  same  views  as  3  I  do,4  Catiline 
would  not  have  lived  for  one  hour. 

3.  We  ought  not  to  fear  that  we  shall  disgrace  ourselves 
by  killing5  Catiline. 

4.  And  yet  there  are  some  senators  who  help  Catiline 
by  not  believing  that  there  is  any  conspiracy. 

5.  If  I  should  punish  him,  they  would  blame  me. 

6.  If  Catiline  was  killed,  will  any  one  be  foolish 6  enough 
to  think  that  the  conspiracy  has  been  blotted  out. 


1  "  not  to  fear,"  see  162. 

4  Omit.  5  Use  participle. 


2  See  72.  3  qui. 

6  "  foolish  enough  "  =  so  foolish  as  to,  etc. 


1 86  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   III 

7.  Catiline  must  lead  out  all  his  companions  in  order  to 
destroy  the  root  and  seed  of  all  evil. 

8.  I  wish  he  would  do  this ! 


374  CHAPTER   XIII 


a.   nescio  quo  pacto. 


b.    Qua  re  secedant  improbi. 


a.  somehow  or  other  (literally, 

by  some  means). 

b.  Therefore     let    the    rascals 

depart. 


1.  Somehow  or  other,  senators,   let  us  be  rid  of    this 
danger. 

2.  Don't  let  the  danger  remain  in  the  vitals  of  the  re- 
public. 

3.  If    Catiline   is   removed,    we   shall   not   be   entirely 
relieved,  if 1  his  companions  are  left  at  Rome. 

4.  If   they  cannot  cease  plotting  against  us,  I  recom- 
mend that  they  be  separated  from  loyal  men. 

5.  They  hold  such  views  about  the  republic  that  they 
ought  not  to  live  with  us  any  longer. 

6.  But  if  Catiline  will  only  depart,  I  promise  you  that 
everything  will  be  brought  to  light  and  punished. 

7.  Then,  imploring  2  Jupiter  to  defend  the  republic  from 
all  danger,  Cicero  finished  his  speech  and  sat  down. 

1  Do  not  use  a  si  clause.  2  Do  not  use  a  participle. 


SECOND  ORATION  AGAINST  CATILINE 

375  CHAPTER   I 

1.  At  last,  fellow-citizens,  Catiline  has  left  of  his  own 
accord,  threatening  us  all  with  destruction. 

2.  The  danger  has  been  unquestionably  removed  from 
the  forum  and  senate  house,  for  he  must  now  wage  war 
openly. 

3.  He  was  almost  overwhelmed  with  grief,  because1  I 
was  alive  and  the  citizens  safe. 

4.  He  would2  like  to  have  left  with  the  consuls  dead 
arid  the  city  burned. 

5.  I  have  no  doubt  that  he  often  laments  the  fact3  that 
the  city  is  standing. 

6.  She,  however,  is  glad  because 1  that  fellow  has  burst 
forth. 

7.  Don't  you  think  we  all  ought  to  thank  the  gods  for 
our  good  fortune  ? 

376  CHAPTER   II 

1.  Who  is  there  who  would  blame  Cicero  for  not  having 
arrested  Catiline  ? 

2.  How  many  did  not  credit  the  facts4  that  Cicero  laid 
before  the  senate  ? 

1  Should  the  indicative  or  subjunctive  be  used  with  quod  ?    See  173. 

2  See  118,  127.  3  Omit.  •»  Omit. 

187 


1 88  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 

3.  If  I  had  put  Catiline  to  death,  as  I  ought  to  have1 
done,  many  would  have  accused  me  severely. 

4.  And  yet  I  would  have  done  this,  had  I  thought  that 
his  removal2  would  save  the  state.    ., 

5.  Now  that  he  is  gone,  we  can  fighj;  the  enemy  openly. 

6.  Cicero  was  vexed  that  Catiline  left  his  followers  at 
Rome. 

7.  We  may  judge  how  valiant  they  are. 

8.  I  wish  we  could  fight  them  all  as  easily  as  we  can 
Catiline. 

377  CHAPTER   III 

1.  The  army  which  Catiline  had  with  him  was  greatly  to 
be  despised  in  comparison  with  Roman  soldiers. 

2.  If  I  had  shown  them3  the  praetor's  edict,  they  would 
have  taken  to  their  heels. 

3.  Cicero  did  not  think  that  those  who  remained  in  the 
city  were  greatly  to  be  feared. 

4.  The  consul  knew  to  whom  each   district  had  been 
assigned. 

5.  Is  it  not  strange  that  they  are  not  alarmed,  seeing4 
that  I  know  all  their  plans  ? 

6.  Bear  in  mind  that  I  will  not  always  be  lenient. 

378  CHAPTER   IV 

1.  I  have  made5  you  all  see  that  Catiline,  and  men  like 
him,  have  formed  a  conspiracy  against  the  state. 

2.  If  they  will  all  leave,  I  will  show  them  the  road  by 
which  Catiline  set  out. 

1  "  to  have  done  "  —  omit. 

2  "  his  removal "  —  express  in  some  other  way  than  by  a  noun. 
8  Use  relative.     What  should  its  position  be  ? 

4  Do  not  use  the  participle.  5  See  Ch.  VIII,  c. 


CICERO,   CATILINE    II  189 

3.  What  crime  is  there  that  they  can  devise,  now  that 
he  has  left  ? 

4.  For  there  was  no  assassin,  no  scoundrel,  no  robber, 
who  did  not  live  on  most  intimate  terms  with  Catiline. 

5.  I  suppose1  nobody  ever  had  as  much  power2  over 
young  men  as  he  had. 

6.  All  who  were  heavily  in  debt  were  united  with  him  in 
crime. 

379  CHAPTER   V 

1.  I  want  you  all  to  realize  that  Catiline  was  intimate 
with  all  who  are  fickle  and  worthless. 

2.  Who  can  endure  that  such  men  should  boast  that 
Catiline  is  a  brave  man,  when  he  thinks  of  nothing  but 
assassination  and  robbery  ? 

3.  Oh,  how  fortunate  we  would  be,  had  they  all  gone 
along  with  Catiline ! 

4.  If  they  merely  wasted  their  property  and  ran 3  into 
debt,  we  could  put  up  with  them. 

5.  But  do  you  think  that  we  ought  to  allow  them  to 
plot  against  the  property  of  loyal  men  ? 

6.  If  I  felt  sure  that  some  fate  were  approaching  them,4 
I    would    think   that    I    had    added    many   years    to    the 
republic. 

7.  Fellow-citizens,  we  have  conquered  all  our  foreign 
enemies,  therefore  we  ought  not  to   hesitate  to  struggle 
with  these  domestic  perils. 

8.  I  will  be  your  leader,  and  I  warn  those  rascals  to  look 
out  for  the  doom  that  hangs  over  them. 


1  credo.  2  Do  not  use  a  noun ;  express  the  idea  by  a  verb. 

3  "  ran  into  debt "  =  became  overwhelmed  with  debt.  4  See  33. 


LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 


380  CHAPTER   VI 

i  .    I  did  not  drive  Catiline  into  exile,  for  he  is  not  such  a 
modest  man  as  to  be  unable  to  bear  the  voice  of  the  consul. 

2.  I  will  tell  you,  fellow-citizens,  what  happened  in  the 
senate  yesterday. 

3.  When  Catiline  had  the  effrontery1  to  be  present,  the 
chief  men  of  that  body  would  not  sit  in  the  same  seats 
with  him. 

4.  I  asked  him  who  of  us  he  thought  did  not  know  what 
he  had  been  doing  during  the  past2  few  days. 

5.  I  showed  him  that  I  knew  all  the  details3  of  the  war. 

6.  If  we  know  that  you  have  made  all  preparations,  why 
do  you  hesitate  to  go  where  your  standard  has  been  sent  ? 

7.  Do  you  believe  that  Manlius  is  waging  war  on  his 
own  account  ? 

381  CHAPTER   VII 

1.  I  wonder  whether  or  not  Cicero  really  desired  Catiline 
to  wage  war  against  his  country. 

2.  For  if  he  should  give  up  the  plan  of  making  war  and 
go  into  exile,  there  would  be  persons  who  would  say  that 
he  had  been  driven  out  by  violent  4  threats. 

3.  And  yet  Cicero  said  it  was  worth  his  while  to  undergo 
a  storm  of  unpopularity,  provided  he  be  rid  of  Catiline. 

4.  What  would  these  fault-finders  5  say,  if  Catiline  should 
march  upon  Rome  with  an  army  ? 

5.  And  yet  I  think  he  is  more  likely6  to  do  this  than  to 
go  alone  into  exile. 

1  "  had  the  effrontery  "  —  use  a  verb.  2  ante. 

3  "all  the  details"  —  one  Latin  word. 

4  "  violent  threats"  =  violence  and  threats. 

5  Use  a  relative  clause.  6  See  94. 


CICERO,   CATILINE   II  1 91 

6.  Don't  complain  because  some  say  that  Catiline  has 
gone  to  Massilia. 

7.  I  would  rather  have  him  go  there  than  join  Manlius. 


382  CHAPTER   VIII 

1.  Cicero  thought  he  ought  to  say  a  few  words  about 
those  who  remained  at  Rome,  rather  than  about  one  who 
acknowledged  he  was  an  enemy. 

2.  I  will  show  you  how  these  can  be  brought  to  their 
senses. 

3.  One  class  of  these  consists  of  men  whose  appearance 
is  very  respectable,  for  they  have  great  possessions. 

4.  If  I  were  rich,  I  would  not  hesitate  to  pay  my  debts 
with  the  income  of  my  estate. 

5.  You   are   mistaken,  if  you  think  you  will  get  new 
accounts  from  Catiline. 

6.  If  we  can  induce l  them  to  give  up  some  of  their 
property  to   pay   their   debts,  we   will   find   them   better 
citizens. 

7.  I  don't  think  these  rich  men  are  likely  to  bear  arms 
against  the  state. 

383  CHAPTER   IX 

1 .  Cicero  said  that,  if  the  republic  were  undisturbed,  the 
second  class  would  be  unable  to  secure  the  offices. 

2.  I  give  these  exactly2  the  same  advice  as  the  others, 
not  to  attempt  to  secure  the  mastery  of  Rome. 

3.  Let  them  understand  that  the  gods  are  going  to  help 
us  in  person,  and  that  there  is  great  harmony  among  all 
the  citizens. 

1  See  Ch.  II,  d.  2  "  exactly  the  same  as  "  =  one  and  the  same  which. 


192  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION —  PART  III 

4.  But  if  they  gain  their  heart's1  desire,  will  they  not 
have  to  yield  the  offices  to  some  other  person  ? 

5.  The  colonists  as  a  whole  are  excellent  men,  but  there 
are  some  who  make  an  extravagant  display  of  their  wealth. 

6.  They  would  not  have  fallen  into  such  heavy  debt,  had 
Sulla  been  alive  to  help  them. 

7.  Everybody  remembers  Sulla's  proscriptions  with  such 
grief  that  I  don't  believe  that  even  these  colonists  would 
now  be  likely  to  endure  such  robbery. 

s 

384  CHAPTER   X 

1.  The  fourth  class  consists  of  those  who  are  so  heavily 
in  debt  that  they  are  all   hurrying  to  Catiline's  camp  to 
extricate  themselves  from  debt. 

2.  If  these  men  should  perish  one  and  all,   I  do  not 
think  their  next-door  neighbors2  would  notice  it. 

3.  I  ask  you,  fellow-citizens,  whether  you  think  it  more 
disgraceful  to  perish  alone  than  with  the  multitude. 

4.  If  the  prison  is  not  large  enough8  to  hold  these  crimi- 
nals, is  it  not  a  good  thing  to  have  them  go  to  that  camp  ? 

5.  Let  all  assassins  and  criminals  who  belong  peculiarly 
to  Catiline  join  with  him,  so  that  their  zeal  may  be  spent 
on  the  toils  of  camp. 

6.  I  wonder  how  these  poor  wretches  will  learn  how  to 
get  along  without  Catiline. 

385  CHAPTER   XI 

i.  Cicero  thought  that  the  war  need  not  be  feared,  if  the 
Roman  generals  only  lead  the  flower  and  strength  of  their 
troops  against  Catiline. 

1  "  heart's  desire  "  —  express  the  idea  by  a  relative  clause. 

2  What  does  this  expression  really  mean  ? 

8  "  large  enough  to  hold  "  =  sufficiently  large  so  as  to  hold. 


CICERO,  CATILINE  II  1 93 

2.  For  an  outcast  and  broken-down  band  of  criminals 
cannot  be  a  match l  for  all  of  Italy. 

3.  If  he  did  not  lack  everything  that  we  are  supplied 
with,  still  honor  and  bravery  could  not  contend  with  base- 
ness and  cowardice. 

4.  Honesty   and    treachery   cannot   contend   together2 
without  the  immortal  gods  compelling  virtue  to  conquer 
vice. 

386  CHAPTER   XII 

1.  I  have  informed  you,  fellow-citizens,  about  this  con- 
spiracy, and  I  will  also  provide  a  sufficient  guard  for  your 
safety. 

2.  I  have  found  out  that  the  gladiators  are  better  dis- 
posed than  we  thought  they  would  be. 

3.  We  have  sent  Metellus  ahead  to  check3  all  of  Cati- 
line's attempts. 

4.  Those  whom  Catiline  has  left  at  Rome  should  be 
warned  again  and  again  that  the  consuls  are  watchful. 

5.  As  for  the  future,4  don't  forget  that  we  must  live 
together. 

6.  Since  the  senate  is  brave  and  we  have  a  prison,  I 
warn  these  to  keep  quiet  or  leave. 


387  CHAPTER   XIII 

1.  It  is   hardly  to  be  expected  that  this  war  can  be 
settled  without  the  death  of  some  one. 

2.  Yet  I  will  so  manage  affairs  as  a  civilian  that  every 
loyal  man  will  be  safe. 

1 "  be  a  match  for  "  =  responde5.  2  See  68. 

8  "  to  check  "  —  express  in  three  different  ways.  4  =  what  is  left. 

LATIN    PROSE   COMP. —  13 


194  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 

3.  Cicero   thought   that  the  gods,   who   had  defended 
Rome  from  many  an  enemy,  would  now  defend  the  citizens 
from  these  perils. 

4.  If  you  rely  upon  the  leadership 1  of  the  gods,  I  prom- 
ise you  that  all  will  be  safe. 

5.  We  should2  all  implore  the  gods  to  overcome  these 
wicked  domestic  enemies. 

1  "  leadership  of  the  gods  "  =  the  gods  as  leaders. 

2  Does  this  mean  that  "  we  ought  to  "  ? 


THIRD  ORATION  AGAINST  CATILINE 

388  CHAPTER  I 

Cicero  told  the  Romans  that  he  had  saved  their  wives, 
children,  and  property  by  his  labors.  He  said  that  he 
deserved  to  be  held  in  no  less  honor  with  his  countrymen 
than  the  man  who  had  founded  the  city.  "  For,"  said  he, 
"  is  it  not  a  greater  task1  to  save  our  city  after  it  has  grown 
than  it  was  to  found  it  many  years  ago  ?  Now  listen  to  me 
diligently  as  I  tell2  you  how  all  the  details  of  Catiline's 
conspiracy  have  been  brought  to  light." 

389  CHAPTER   II 

Ever  since  3  Catiline  was  driven  out  of  the  city  and  was 
compelled  to  leave  at  Rome  his  companions  in  crime,  I 
have  been  anxious  to  know  what  they  did  and  how  they 
spent  their  days  and  nights.  I  thought  my  oration  would 
gain  greater  credence  in  your  ears,  if  I  could  only  make 
you  see  the  danger  with  your  own  eyes.  At  last  an  oppor- 
tunity that  I  had  long  been  desiring  was  offered  to  me. 
Some  ambassadors  from  Gaul  had  been  tampered  with  by 
Lentulus,  so  as  to  aid  his  cause  by  stirring  up  a  rebellion 
in  Gaul.  These  ambassadors  had  on  4  their  persons  letters 
that  they  had  been  asked  to  give  to  Catiline.  Therefore  I 

1  "  a  greater  task  "  =  of  greater  labor.  2  Use  a  participle. 

8  "  Ever  since  "  =  ut.  4  "  on  their  persons  "  =  apud  se. 

'95 


1 96  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   III 

sent  some  patriotic  men  to  the  Mulvian  bridge,  which  the 
Gauls  had  to  cross,  to  arrest  the  ambassadors  and  deliver 
the  letters  to  me. 


390  CHAPTER   III 

After  the  battle  was  over,  all  the  letters  were  handed 
over  to  the  officers,  while1  the  men  were  arrested  and 
brought  to  Rome.  Many  prominent  men,  who  were  at 
Cicero's  house,  were  of  the  opinion  that  the  consul  ought 
to  open  the  letters  before  they  were  laid  before  the  senate. 
Cicero,  however,  said2  he  would  not  report  the  affair  to  the 
senate,  unless  the  seals  were  unbroken,  for  he  thought  that 
too  much  carefulness  could  not  be  employed.  Meanwhile 
the  praetor,  who  had  been  ordered  to  bring  whatever  weap- 
ons there  were  at  the  house  of  Cethegus,  returned  with  a 
large  number. 

391  CHAPTER    IV 

Volturcius,  on  being  urged  to  tell  what  he  knew,  said 
that  the  conspirators  were  about  to  set  fire  to  T:he  city  and 
assassinate  as  many  of  the  citizens  as  possible,  that  letters 
had  been  sent  to  Catiline  urging3  him  to 4  come  to  their  aid 
as  soon  as  possible.  The  Gauls  said  that  they  would  5  have 
united  their  cavalry  with  the  infantry  of  the  conspirators. 
Lentulus  thought  he  was  the  one  who  was  about  to  become 
king  after  this  year,  and  he  had  a  quarrel  with  Cethegus  as 
to  the  time  of  burning  the  city. 


1  Omit.  2  "  said  he  would  not  "  =  denied  that  he  would. 

8  Omit.  4  Do  not  use  the  infinitive.  5  Is  a  condition  implied  ? 


CICERO,   CATILINE  III 


392  CHAPTER   V 

To  be  brief,  all  the  conspirators,  at  the  production  l  of 
the  letters,  identified  the  seals  and  handwriting,  and  they 
were  so  conscience-stricken  that  they  either  became  silent 
or  confessed.  I  asked  Lentulus  if  he  didn't  think  that  the 
memory  of  his  grandfather  ought2  to  have  recalled  him 
from  his  madness.  When  he  was  given3  an  opportunity 
to  say  a  few  words  about  the  Gauls,  although  nobody  sur- 
passed him  in  impudence,  he  did  not  deny  that  he  had 
spoken  to  the  Gauls  about  the  rule  and  control  of  the  re- 
public. The  letter  from  Lentulus  to  Catiline  said  that 
Catiline  would  know  who  he  was  from  the  person  he  had 
sent  to  him,  and  it  urged  him  to  secure  as  much  help  as 
possible.  Finally,  citizens,  all  these  things  were  such  sure 
proofs  of  crime  that  they  did  not  have  to  be  betrayed  by 
their  comrades. 

393  CHAPTER   VI 

After  the  evidence  had  all  been  set  forth,  the  senate 
thanked  Cicero  for  arresting  4  the  conspirators  and  exposing 
their  plans  ;  also  Flaccus  and  Pomptinus  because  the  con- 
suls had  found  them  such  brave  assistants.  Then  the  sena- 
tors voted  to  deliver  into  custody  Lentulus,  Cethegus,  and 
the  others  who  had  evidently5  been  engaged  in  the  con- 
spiracy. A  thanksgiving  has  often  been  voted  to  others 
for  glorious  deeds,  but  never  before  to  anybody  for  saving 
the  republic.  Scruples  had  prevented  Marius  from  6  pun- 
ishing the  praetor  Glaucia,  therefore  Lentulus  was  com- 
pelled to  resign  his  office,  so  that  he  might  be  punished  as 
a  private  citizen. 

1  Do  not  use  a  noun.  2  gee  in.  8  Ablative  absolute. 

4  See  173.  6  Express  this  idea  by  a  verb. 

0  Cf.  in  text  religio  .  .  .  quo  minus. 


198  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  III 

394  CHAPTER    VII 

When  Catiline  had  been  driven  from  the  city,  Cicero 
supposed  he  would  not  have  to  fear  the  rest,  who  were  not 
so  dangerous.  For  Catiline  was  very  shrewd  and  watchful, 
and  he  was  not  a  man  who  thought  a  deed  was  done  when 
he  had  given  the  order.  There  was  no  cold  or  hunger  that 
he  could  not  endure.  He  was  so  keen  and  bold  that  we 
could 1  have  removed  this  great  danger  from  you  only l 
with  the  greatest  difficulty.  If  he  had  been  in  the  city,  he 
would  not  have  allowed  the  letters  to  have  been  written, 
and  we  then  would  have  been  compelled  2  to  catch  the  ras- 
cals in  some  other  way. 

395  CHAPTER   VIII 

Cicero  accomplished  so  much  during  his  consulship  that 
the  management  could  not  have  belonged 3  to  human  wis- 
dom. Not4  to  speak  of  the  earthquakes  and  the  other 
wonderful  things,  you  all  surely  remember  that  not  long 
ago  the  statue  of  Romulus,  the  founder  of  this  city,  was 
struck  by  lightning  and  thrown  down.  The  soothsayers 
predicted  that  the  whole  city  would  be  destroyed,  unless 
the  Fates  could  be  turned.  And  so,  to  propitiate  the  gods, 
the  Romans  instituted  ten  days'  games,  and  the  consuls 
contracted  for  the  erection  of  a  larger  statue  of  Jupiter, 
and  ordered  it  to  be  placed  on  high  ground  facing  the  east. 
Is  it  not  remarkable,  fellow-citizens,  that  this  statue  was 
not  erected  until  yesterday,  the  time  when  this  conspiracy 
was  found  out  ? 


1  "  could  .  .  .  only  with  "  =  could  not  .  .  .  except  by. 

2  Express  the  idea  of  necessity  by  the  second  periphrastic  conjugation. 

8  "  have  belonged  to  "  =  have  been  of.         4  See  text  of  Ch.  V,  first  words. 


CICERO,   CATILINE  III  199 

396  CHAPTER   IX 

Nobody  can  deny  that,  if  the  gods  had  not  controlled 
everything,  the  conspirators  would  not  have  been  led  to  the 
senate  house  on  the  very  day  that  the  statue  of  Jupiter  was 
turned  toward  the  forum.  Who,  therefore,  is  so  bereft  of 
reason  as  to  deny  that  the  gods  are  worthy  of  all  honor  for 
saving  us  from  slaughter  and  fire  ?  Certainly  Lentulus 
would  not  have  been  foolish  enough  1  to  intrust  such  im- 
portant business  to  barbarians,  had  not  the  gods  wished 
this  beautiful  city  to  be  safe.  What  was  it,  unless  the  fa- 
vor of  the  gods,  that  prevented  our  old  enemies,  the  Gauls, 
from  2  overcoming  us  by  merely  saying  nothing  ? 

397  CHAPTER   X 

Therefore,  fellow-citizens,  I  urge  you  to  celebrate  those 
games  which  the  senate  has  decreed,  for  never  before  have 
civilians  been  victorious  with  a  civilian  for  their  general. 
If  you  should  compare  this  conspiracy  with  the  civil  dis- 
sensions of  Marius  and  Sulla,  which  doubtless  you  your- 
selves remember,  you  would  recall  that  they  wished  merely  3 
to  change  the  government,  not  to  destroy  it.  One4  ought 
not  to  speak  about 5  the  extent  of  the  slaughter  of  the  citi- 
zens without  feeling  grateful  to  the  gods  that  we  are  now 
all  safe  and  sound.  Don't  forget  that,  although  Catiline 
wished  to  burn  as  much  of  the  city  and  kill  as  many  of  us 
as  he  could,  I  have  so  managed  affairs  that  not  a  patriotic 
citizen  should  perish. 

1  "  foolish  enough  to  intrust  "  =  so  foolish  that  he  intrusted. 

2  See  150.  8  Modo,  postpositive. 

4  "  One  ought  not  to  speak  "  =  it  ought  not  to  be  said. 

5  "  about  .  .  .  citizens  "  —  express  by  a  clause. 


200  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION— PART   III 

398  CHAPTER   XI 

In  return  for  the  preservation  of  the  state,  fellow-citi- 
zens, I  ask  for  no  mute  memorial  of  praise,  but  that  you 
all  remember  that  it  was  I  who  disclosed  this  conspiracy. 
There  are  many  less  worthy  men  who  can  acquire  triumphs 
and  monuments.  It  will  be  enough  glory  for  me  that  you 
remember  that,  of  the  two  prominent  citizens  of  this  time, 
one  enlarged 1  the  state  while  2  the  other  saved  it. 


399  CHAPTER   XII 

Foreign  victors3  are  better4  off  than  I  am,  because  I 
cannot  kill  my  enemies,  but  must  remain  in  Rome  with 
them.  It  is,  therefore,  the  duty  of  the  Roman  people  to 
see  that  nobody  harms  me,  for  if  you  allow  me  to  be  an- 
noyed, others  will  not  be  likely5  to  expose  themselves  to 
danger  to  protect  you.  As  for  me,  I  have  enough  glory, 
and  there  is  no  higher  step  to  which  I  care  to  ascend.  I 
desire  to  so  conduct  myself  that  you  will  not  think  that  it 
was  by  chance  that  I  saved  the  republic.  Therefore,  fel- 
low-citizens, now  that  it  is  night,  you  ought  to  pray6  to 
yonder  Jupiter,  and  then  go  home  to  defend  the  city. 

1  amplifico.  2  Omit. 

3  "  Foreign  victors  "  —  express  by  a  relative  clause. 

4  Cf.  in  text  the  first  sentence  of  this  chapter. 

6  See  94.  6  Use  the  participle. 


FOURTH  ORATION  AGAINST  CATILINE 

400  CHAPTER  I 

After  the  senate  had  been  called  together  to  see  what 
disposition l  should  be  made  of  the  conspirators,  all  turned 
their  eyes  toward  Cicero  as  he  was  about  to  express  his 
opinion.1  He  urged  them  to  forget  his  safety  and  plan 
only  for  the  highest 2  interests  of  the  state.  He  said  he 
would  endure  every  hardship,  provided  he  could  free  his 
countrymen  from  danger.  "  You  know,  senators,"  said  he, 
"that  I  have  never  been  free  from  danger  either  in  the 
senate  house  or  at  my  own  home,  where  I  ought  to  enjoy 
quiet;  and  yet  I  would  endure  whatever  fate  awaits  me, 
should  I  be  able  to  rescue  these  buildings  from  foul  de- 
struction. I  am  pleased  to  think  that  my  consulship  has 
been  almost  destined  for  the  safety  of  the  republic." 


401  CHAPTER   II 

I  beg  of  you,  senators,  look  out  for  yourselves.  Don't 
spare  me,  for  if  I  were  not  ready  to  die  with  composure, 
I  would  be  a  wretch  and  unworthy  of  my  office.  And  yet 
I  am  not  the  man  to  disregard 3  the  feelings  of  my  wife, 
daughter,  and  son,  whom  you  see  standing  around.  If  I 

1  Avoid  the  use  of  the  noun. 

2  "  for  the  ...  state  "  =  de  summa  re  publica.  «  neglego. 

201 


2O2  LATIN    PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART   III 

am  moved  by  these  things,  it  is  only  that  they  may  not 
perish  along  with  me.  These  men  whom  we  have  brought 
to  trial  are  not  like  ordinary  criminals,  for  they  have 
formed  a  plan  of  so  destroying  the  republic  that  nobody 
shall  be  left  who  does  not  hold  the  same  views 1  as  they  do. 


402  CHAPTER    III 

Cicero  said  that  the  senate  had  already  passed  judgment 
on  the  facts  of  the  case,2  because  yesterday  they  had  voted 
to  thank  him,  reward  the  Gauls,  and  commit  the  prisoners 
to  jail ;  but  he  said  that  they  must  now  vote  as  to  the  pun- 
ishment, although  they  would  doubtless  convict  them.  He 
said  that  it  was  the  consul's  duty 3  to  state  that  a  greater 
conspiracy  than  they  imagined  was  brewing,4  and  was 
spreading  over  Italy  and  even  in  Gaul ;  and  that  if  they 
thought  it  could  be  checked  by  procrastination,  they  would 
soon  see  that  they  were  greatly  mistaken.  He  therefore 
urged  the  senate  to  punish  the  criminals  quickly. 


403  CHAPTER    IV 

There  are  two  views  as  to  the  punishment,  one  of  which 
you  ought  to  adopt.5  Silanus  is  of  the  opinion  that  men 
who  did  not  wish  us  to  enjoy  this  fair  city  or  even  our  lives 
ought  to  be  killed :  he  calls  our  attention  to  the  fact 6  that 
prisoners  less  dangerous  than  these  have  often  been  pun- 
ished by  death.  Caesar,  on  the  other  hand,  holds  7  that 

1  "  hold  the  same  views,"  see  I,  Ch.  XII,  a.  2  "  of  the  case  "  —  omit. 

8  "  consul's  duty  "  =  of  the  consul.  4  Passive  of  misceo. 

5  sequor.  6  May  this  be  omitted  ? 

<  Not  teneo.     What  does  this  really  mean  in  this  connection  ? 


CICERO,   CATILINE   IV  203 

death  is  not  a  suitable  punishment  for  wicked  citizens. 
He  urges  that  their  property  be  confiscated,  that  they  be 
put  under  guard  for  life  among  the  municipal  towns,  and 
that  nobody  be  allowed  to  lighten  their  punishment.  If 
you  decide  upon  this  punishment,  I  have  no  doubt  that  I 
can  find  towns  that  will  be  willing  to  guard  them.  And 
yet,  don't  you  think  it  would  be  better  to  take  away  their 
lives  rather  than  to  leave  no  hope  to  console  them  in  their 
misery  ? 

404  CHAPTER   V 

Cicero  realized  that  it  was  for  his  own  l  personal 2  interest 
that  the  senators  should  follow  Caesar's  view,  who  he  said 
was  truly  devoted  to  the  people.  He  was  inclined3  to 
think  that  his  enemies  would  say  he  had  acted  contrary 
to  the  Sempronian  law,  if  he  should  put  these  citizens  to 
death.  Cicero,  however,  argued  that  by  forming  a  con- 
spiracy they  had  become  public  enemies,  and  were  no 
longer  citizens.  When  Caesar  did  not  hesitate  to  express 
his  opinion  about  the  guilt  and  punishment  of  the  prison- 
ers, Cicero  said  there  was  a  great  difference  between  him 
and  the  other  democrats  who  were  absent  to  avoid  4  voting 
on  the  life  of  a  Roman  citizen.  Nobody  had  any  reason 
to5  doubt  Caesar's  loyalty6  to  his  country. 

405  CHAPTER  VI 

If,  therefore,  you  adopt7  the  proposal  of  Silanus,  I  shall 
easily  free  myself  from  the  charge  of  cruelty.  Now  may 

1  See  28.  2  ipsius.  8  Cf.  nescio  an  in  the  text. 

4  Express  this  idea  in  some  other  way  than  by  a  verb. 

6  Wherefore  he  should  doubt.  6  voluntas. 

7  What  tense  should  this  be  ? 


204  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 

I  be  allowed  to  show  you,  senators,  that  the  most  severe 
punishment  in  such  a  case  as  this  is  not  cruelty.  When  I 
seem  to  see  these  buildings  falling  in  ruins  and  the  citizens 
unburied,  when  Lentulus  and  Cethegus  appear  before  my 
eyes  in  full  power,1  exulting  at  -the  wailing  of  the  women, 
I  think  I  should  be  most  cruel  if  I  did  not  punish  them 
very  severely.  Let  me  ask  you  whether  you  would  not 
punish  a  slave  most  vigorously,  if  you  knew  he  had  killed 
your  'wife  and  children.  Had  I  been  lenient  in  such  a 
case,  you  would  say  that  I  was  most  cruel  toward  my  fam- 
ily. There  are  men  in  times  of  party  strife  who  would 
receive  severe  wounds  to  prevent 2  the  highest  interests  of 
the  state  from  suffering  any  loss.  Therefore  you  ought 
not  to  fear  that  you  will  pass  too  severe  a  measure  against 
these  men  who  had  assigned  to  one  the  overthrow  3  of  the 
republic,  to  another  the  slaughter  of  all  the  citizens. 


406  CHAPTER  VII 

If  you  vote  to  put  these  men  to  death,  there  are  some 
who  fear  that  you  will  not  be  able  to  carry  out  your  plans. 
I  would4  like  to  say,  however,  that  I  shall  have  enough 
help,  since  almost  all  the  citizens  hold  the  same  views  as 
we  do.  The  knights  and  senators,  through  their  desire 
to  hold  imperial  power,  and  by  the  common  peril,  have 
been  restored  to  harmony.  What  danger  can  come  to  the 
state,  or  who  will  not  thoroughly  enjoy  the  possession  of 
liberty,  if  this  5  harmony  shall  last  forever  ? 


1  Use  participle.  2  Cf.  in  text  ne  quid  deminueretur. 

3  "  the  overthrow  of  the  republic"  =  the  republic  to  be  overthrown. 

4  Potential  subjunctive.        5  Use  the  relative,  and  put  this  clause  first. 


CICERO,  CATILINE  IV  205 

407  CHAPTER  VIII 

If  the  freedmen  are  patriotic,1  don't  you  think  that  men 
who  were  born  in  a  high  station  ought  to  wish  to  see  this 
city  stand  ?  Even  the  slaves  have  been  aroused  to  the 
defence  of  the  fatherland,  and  are  contributing  all  they 
can  to  your  support.  Don't  be  alarmed  because  rumor2 
says  that  Lentulus  has  been  trying  to  tamper  with  the 
destitute,  for  he  could  not  find  any  who  were  willing  to 
join  the  conspiracy.  The  shopkeepers  also  know  that 
their  profits  will  not  be  maintained,  if  their  shops  are 
burned.  Therefore,  senators,  do  not  fear  that  the  people 
will  fail  you. 

408  CHAPTER   IX 

Cicero,  seeing  that  he  had  been  rescued  from  the  jaws 
of  death,  wished  to  perform  his  duty  as  a  consul.  He 
reminded  the  senate  that  the  fatherland  was  beset  by 
dangers  and  intrusted  itself  to  them,  that  they  had  a 
leader  who  would  not  forget  them,  and  that  all  the  classes 
of  citizens  were  unanimous  3  as  to  what  ought  to  be  done. 
"  Don't  allow  to  be  destroyed,"  said  he,  "  the  empire  that 
has  been  founded  with  such  toil.  You  must  come  to  a 
decision  at  once  about  the  punishment  of  these  prisoners, 
so  that  others  will  never  again  dare  to  plot  against  the 
welfare4  of  this  nation." 

409  CHAPTER   X 

Cicero  had  now  incurred  as  many  enemies  as  there  were 
persons  implicated5  in  the  conspiracy,  and  yet  he  said  he 

1  =  loving  of  country.          2  "  rumor  says  "  —  what  does  this  really  mean  ? 
8  Avoid  the  use  of  an  adjective.  4  =  highest  interests.  5  verso. 


206  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 

would  never  repent  of  what  he  had  done,  provided  the 
patriotic  citizens  proved  more  powerful  than  the  conspira- 
tors. Grant  that  Scipio  put  an  end  to  the  Punic  war, 
that  Paulus  conquered  King  Perses,  that  Marius  saved 
the  Romans  from  the  dominion  of  the  Gauls,  still  I  think 
it  is  a  greater  deed 1  to  furnish  these  victors  a  country  to 
which  to  return.  Cicero  would  now  have  to  wage  a  con- 
tinual war  with  his  enemies,  but  he  was  safe,  because  there 
was  no  power  strong  enough  to  overthrow  the  unanimity 
of  loyal  men. 

410  CHAPTER   XI 

As  long  as  the  memory  of  my  deeds  is2  fixed  in  your 
mind,  I  shall  be  free  from  all  danger.  I  ask  you  for  nothing 
except  that  you  see  that  my  son  has  sufficient  protection, 
and  that  you  keep  in  mind  that  he  is  the  son  of  the  man 
who  saved  this  fair  city  of  yours.  I  have  given  up  a 
province  in  order  to  secure  evidence  against  these  pris- 
oners, but  I  do  it  gladly,  provided  you  guard  diligently  the 
liberty  and  safety  of  the  citizens.  You  have  a  consul  who 
is  not  afraid  to  obey  your  orders,  therefore  it  is  your  duty 
to  decide  what  you  think  should  be  done. 

1  Omit.  2  What  time  does  this  refer  to  ? 


POMPEY'S    MILITARY   COMMAND 

411  CHAPTER  I 

Having1  spent  his  early  years  in  the  defense  of  his 
friends,  Cicero  decided  not  to  speak  from  the  rostra  until 
he  had  something2  to  say  that  was  worthy  of  a  place  from 
which  all  the  best  men  had  spoken.  He  felt  that,  inasmuch 
as  his  fellow-citizens  had  elected  him  praetor,  he  ought  to 
employ  what  influence  and  skill  in  speaking  he  had3  in 
behalf  of  those  who  had  judged  so  well  of  him.  He  was 
particularly  glad  that  he  was  allowed  to  speak  of  Pompey, 
about  whom  it  would  not  be  difficult  to  find  something  2  to 
say. 

412  CHAPTER   II 

The  situation4  is  as  follows :  two  kings,  Mithridates  and 
Tigranes,  thinking5  they  can  get  Asia,  are  bringing  war  on 
your  allies.  The  letters  brought  to  me  from  the  Roman 
knights  who  manage  your  revenues  show  that  many  vil- 
lages of  your  province  are  being  burned  by  the  enemy, 
that  the  war  is  being  badly  managed  by  the  successor 6  of 
Lucullus,  and  that  all  your  allies  are  asking  for  a  com- 
mander who  will  make  the  enemy  fear  him.  In  view  of 
the  fact,  therefore,  that  the  glory  of  the  Roman  people, 

1  See  85,  2.  2  "  something  to  say  "  =  what  he  might  say.    See  174. 

8  Cf.  in  the  text  —  in  me  est.  4  causa. 

6  Do  not  use  the  participle.  «  See  71,  7. 

207 


208  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION— PART  III 

the  safety  of  your  friends,  and  your  largest  revenues  are 
at  stake,  it  seems  to  me  that  you  ought  to  follow  up  this 
war  with  the  greatest  zeal. 


413  CHAPTER   III 

Cicero  said  that  it1  was  a  deep  stain  on  the  name  of  the 
Roman  people  that  they  allowed  Mithridates,  a  man  who 
had  killed  so  many  thousands  of  the  citizens  of  Rome,  to 
still  remain  on  his  throne  without  having  received  a 
punishment  worthy  of  such  a  crime.  Sulla  and  Murena 
have  each  triumphed  over2  Mithridates,  yet  after  his 
defeats  he  still  rules.  But  we  must  not  censure  these 
commanders  whom  the  public  interests  recalled  from  the 
seat3  of  war  to  Rome. 


414  CHAPTER   IV 

Mithridates  was  so  covetous  of  glory  that  he  could  not 
forget  his  ambitions,4  so  he  made  great  preparations  to 
contest  the  5  supremacy  with  us  both  by  land  and  sea,  and 
by  sending6  dispatches  to  Sertorius  planned  to  attack  us 
while  we  were  waging  war  in  Spain.  But,  thanks 7  to  the 
remarkable  valor  of  Pompey  and  Lucullus,  the  danger  was 
averted  in  both  quarters.  Praise  should  not  be  taken  from 
the  latter  on  account  of  these  recent  mishaps,4  which  may 
be  assigned  not  to  his  fault  but  to  his  fortune. 


1  "  it  was  .  .  .  stain  "  =  a  stain  was  deeply  seated. 

2  de.  8  Do  not  use  sedes. 

4  See  71,  7.  5  =  concerning  the.  6  Use  participle. 

7  What  does  this  expression  really  mean  ? 


CICERO,   POMPEY'S   MILITARY   COMMAND  2OQ 

415  CHAPTER   V 

If  your  ancestors  many  years  ago  destroyed  the  beauti- 
ful city  of  Corinth,  because1  their  ambassadors  had  been 
wrongfully  treated,  do  you  think  you  ought  to  disregard 
the  cruel 2  murder  of  a  Roman  envoy,  the  massacre  of  your 
citizens,  and  the  loss  of  your  revenues  ?  What,  pray,  ought 
your  feelings  to  be  when  you  remember  that  the  safety  of 
your  friends  and  allies  is  being  brought  into  great  danger, 
and  that  two  powerful  kings  are  threatening  the  whole  of 
Asia?  These  allies  of  yours  are  worthy3  of  being  pro- 
tected carefully,  and  the  more  so  because  the  other  com- 
manders whom  you  have  sent  to  them  have  pillaged  their 
towns.  Therefore  they  would  be  very  glad 4  to  know  that 
you  are  going  to  send  to  defend  them  Gnaeus  Pompey,  a 
man  of  such  kindness  and  self-control. 

416  CHAPTER  VI 

Your  ancestors,  fellow-citizens,  were  so  careful  to  guard 
the  interests  5  of  their  allies  that  they  often  went  to  war 
on  their  account,  even  .when  they  themselves  had  suf- 
fered no  injury.  Therefore  it  behooves  you  to  protect 
a  province  that  is  such  a  help  to  you  through  its  large 
revenues.  There  is  no  land  so  rich  as  Asia,  or  that  sur- 
passes it  in  exports.6  You  all  know,  of  course,  that  no 
taxes  can  be  gathered  when  agriculture  and  commerce 
have  been  interrupted  on  account  of  the  approach  of  the 
enemy.  Therefore,  if  you  would7  enjoy  the  income  of  a 
province,  you  must  protect  the  taxpayer6  and  the  tax- 

1  See  87,  3  ;  89. 

2  "  the  cruel  .  .  .  envoy  "  =  a  Roman  envoy  having  been  cruelly  murdered. 
8  See  174,  i.  4  »  very  glad  to  know  "  =  know  very  gladly. 

6  res.  «  See  71,  7.  7  See  117. 

LATIN   PROSE   COM  P.  —  14 


210  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 

gatherer   not   only  from   disaster,    but   from   the  fear  of 
disaster. 

417  CHAPTER   VII 

There  are  other  reasons  why J  you  must  prosecute  this 
war  with  the  greatest  vigor.  You  cannot  neglect  those 
respectable  men  who  have  invested  capital  in  gathering 
your  taxes  without2  diminishing  your  revenues  and  bring- 
ing disaster  upon  Rome ;  for  if  payment  should  be 
hindered  in  Asia,  credit  would  fall  at  Rome.  There  are 
many  other  active  and  energetic  men  who  are  doing  busi- 
ness in  Asia,  and3  if  you  do  not  consider  their4  inter- 
ests, it  will  be  difficult  to  persuade  others  to  invest  their 
money  in  our  provinces.  Furthermore,  all  parts  of  the 
empire  are  so  united  together  that  we  must  bear  in  mind 
that  it  is  the  part  of  wisdom  to  look  after  the  financial 
interests  of  our  allies  as  we  would  our  own  interests. 


418  CHAPTER   VIII 

Recall  with  me  very  briefly,  fellow-citizens,  what  Lucullus 
did  when  he  was  sent  to  conduct  the  war  against  Mithri- 
dates  eight  years  ago.  He  freed  from  danger  a  city  of  the 
Cyzicenes,  which  Mithridates  was  besieging  with  a  large, 
well-equipped  army ;  he  sank  a  large  fleet  that  was  being 
sent  against  Italy  ;  he  captured  many  great  cities  of  Pontus 
and  Cappadocia,  and  compelled  the  great  king,  stripped  of 
his  dominions,  to  flee  as  a  suppliant  to  other  kings.  In 
view  of  these  facts  there  is  nobody  who  can  say  that  I  do 
not  accord  to  Lucullus  as  much  credit  as  is  due  the  great 
deeds  that  he  has  performed. 

i  qua  re.  2  =  that  not  =  ut  non.  «  See  71,  6.  4  Omit. 


CICERO,   POMPEY'S  MILITARY  COMMAND  211 

419  CHAPTER   IX 

Perhaps  it  may  seem  strange  to  some  that  a  great  war 
still  exists,  if  Lucullus  won  so  many  victories.  These  are 
the  reasons.  When1  Mithridates  was  fleeing  from  his 
kingdom,  he  left  a  large  quantity  of  gold  and  silver  to 
check  the  speed  of  his  pursuers.  If  our  soldiers  had  not 
delayed  to  gather  this2  up,  he  would  not  have  escaped  from 
their  hands.  Furthermore,  when  Mithridates  arrived  among 
the  Armenians,  their  king,  Tigranes,  promised  to3  help 
him ;  likewise  many  other  nations  began  to  fear  that  our 
army  was  likely  to  plunder  their  temples,  so  they  joined 
with  Mithridates  in  his  desire  to  get  rid  of  the  Romans. 
Our  soldiers,  too,  became  weary  of  the  long  marches,  and 
begged  their  general  to  return  as  soon  as  possible.  All 
this  made  it  possible  for  Mithridates  not  only  to  return  to 
his  own  country,  but  also  to  enlist  the  support  of  other 
kings,  and  gather  a  large  army  with  which  he  was  able  to 
inflict  a  severe  defeat  on  Lucullus.  At  this  time  Lucullus 
was  ordered  to  hand  his  army  over  to  Glabrio,  and  the  war, 
now4  that  it  has  been  renewed  with  such  vigor,  has  become 
very  dangerous. 

420  CHAPTER  X 

Now  that  we  must  select  a  man  competent5  to  take 
charge  of  such  a  perilous  war,  the  choice  will  not  be  a 
difficult  one,  since  we  have  a  general  whom  all  acknowledge 
to  be  most  skillful 6  in  military  affairs.  Fresh 7  from  school 


1  Do  not  use  a  temporal  clause. 

2  Use  a  relative.    What  position  should  it  have  ? 

3  Future  infinitive.  4  "  now  .  .  .  renewed  "  —  use  a  participle. 
5  See  174,  T.            6  See  24.         1  What  does  this  word  really  mean  ? 


212  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  TART  III 

he  was  trained  in  military  discipline  in  his  father's  army. 
When  a  mere  youth  he  was  in  charge  of  an  army  of  his 
own.  His  varied  experience  on  land  and  sea  has  made  him 
acquainted  with  all  kinds  of  warfare.  He  has  gained  more 
victories  and  celebrated  more  triumphs  than  any  other 
general  of  ancient1  or  modern  times.  In  view  of  all  these 
facts,  is  there  any  doubt  that  he  is  the  one  man  who  can 
bring  this  war  to  a  close  ? 

421  CHAPTER   XI 

There  is  no  man  who  can  show  that  Pompey  does  not 
possess  all  the  virtues  of  a  commander  to  a  greater  degree 
than  any  one  whom  we  have  seen  or  heard.  Cicero  said 
that  many  powerful  enemies,  not  only  abroad  but  also  in 
Italy,  bore2  witness  to  this  effect:  that  Gaul,  Spain,  and 
Africa  had  been  freed  from  danger  by  his  bravery,  dili- 
gence, and  wise3  counsel;  that  Pompey  had  cleared  the 
sea  of  pirates  in  one  year,  although  they  had  such  firm 
control  of  every  harbor  and  bay  that  none  of  the  revenues 
were  safe ;  that  the  Romans  could  not  defend  their  allies ; 
and  that  even  Roman  merchants  could  not  set  sail  except 
in  winter. 

422  CHAPTER   XII 

In  olden  times  it  was  the  special 4  province  of  the  Roman 
people  to  protect  the  interests  of  their  allies,  and  not  to 
guard  their  own  domains ;  but  during  the  war  with  the 
pirates,  not  only  ambassadors  from  foreign  nations  were 
captured,  but  our  own  merchants  were  not  safe,  and  even 

1  "  of  ancient  .  .  .  times  "  =  of  those  who  now  are  or  were  in  ancient  times. 

2  "  bore  witness  "  =  were  witnesses.  3  "  wise  counsel  "  =  one  word. 
4  "  special  province  "  =  propnus. 


CICERO,   POMPEY'S   MILITARY   COMMAND  213 

our  children  were  seized  while  Roman  officers  were  present. 
Such  was  the  situation  when  the  Romans  very  wisely  ap- 
pointed Pompey  to  take  charge  of  the  war  with  the  pirates. 
If  they  had  appointed  a  less  skillful  general,  doubtless  you 
would  now  behold  the  enemy's  ships  in  the  Tiber.  Pompey, 
however,  undertook  the  war  with  the  same  zeal  that  one 
would  employ  in  the  pursuit  of  gain.  Even  before  the  sea 
was  fit  for  navigation,  he  sent  out  ships  in  all  directions  to 
defend  the  allies  of  Rome ;  and  then,  after  defeating 1  the 
pirates  in  many  engagements,  he  brought  the  long  and 
widely  scattered  war  to  a  close  in  the  middle  of  the  summer. 
Would  not  such  a  general  be  likely  to  follow  up  Mithri- 
dates  with  the  greatest  zeal,  wisdom,  and  bravery  ? 


423  CHAPTER   XIII 

But  bravery  and  zeal  are  not  the  only  qualities  that  we 
should  look  for  in  a  perfect  commander.  He  ought  also  to 
be  a  man  of  the  greatest  integrity,  self-control,  and  kind- 
ness. Without2  mentioning  any  names,  Cicero  said  that 
there  were  commanders  who  sold  offices  and  drew  money 
from  the  public  treasury  to  use  for  their  own  affairs ;  that 
the  Romans  could  easily  understand  what  took  place  abroad 
from3  their  recollection  of  how  some  generals  had  marched 
through  Italy.  Then,  after  a  comparison4  with  other 
generals,  he  made  the  Romans  understand  that  Pompey 
was  a  general  of  great  self-control  and  kindness,  and  that 
he  never  allowed  his  army  to  harm  a  people  which 5  had 
once  6  been  subdued. 


1  See  89,  i.  2  Use  ablative  absolute. 

8  "  from  their  recollection  of"  =  when  they  recollected. 

4  Avoid  the  use  of  the  noun.        6  Do  not  use  a  relative  clause.        6  Omit. 


214  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  III 

424  CHAPTER   XIV 

Pompey  could  finish  this  war  very  quickly  because  no 
lust  called  him  aside  to  pleasure,  and  because  he  did  not  allow 
his  soldiers  to  remove  the  statues  and  paintings  from  the 
Greek  cities.  Our  allies  had  heard  that  our  ancestors  were 
men  of  great  self-restraint ;  but  our  commanders,  by 1  taking 
everything  that  they  could  lay  their  hands  on,  made  them 
think  that  they  had  been  falsely  informed.  It  is  not  sur- 
prising,2 therefore,  that  the  allies  thought  that  Pompey  was 
like  the  old  Romans.  Furthermore,  he  was  so  approach- 
able that  even  the  humblest  man  dared  to  speak  to  him 
about  his  troubles.  In  view  of  these  facts,  citizens,  ought 
we  to  hesitate  to  put  in  charge  of  this  war  a  man  who  is 
endowed  by  nature  with  so  many  fine  qualities  ? 

425  CHAPTER   XV 

You  were  not  ignorant,  fellow-citizens,  that  the  opinion  3 
the  allies  have  of  our  generals  is  a  powerful4  factor  in 
carrying  on  a  war ;  therefore  you  v_ery  wisely  demanded  for 
that  war  Pompey,  a  general  whose  reputation  alone  was 
almost  strong  enough  to  bring  the  enemy  to  terms.  One 
can  easily  show  what  an  influence  he  holds.  Why  did 
grain  suddenly  become  cheaper  than  in  times  of  great 
crops,  after  he  had  been  put  in  charge  of  the  naval  war  ? 
And,  to  cite  another  example  of  his  ability,  when  our  army 
had  suffered  a  severe  reverse,  when  Mithridates  was  flushed 
with  victory,  and  when  many  enemies  were  threatening  our 

1  " by  taking  everything"  —  ablative  absolute.  2  to  be  wondered  at. 

3  Avoid  the  use  of  a  corresponding  noun  in  Latin. 

4  "  powerful  factor  "  —  do  not  use  the  corresponding  words  in  Latin.     Express 
the  idea  in  another  way. 


CICERO,   POMPEY'S    MILITARY   COMMAND  215 

allies,  there  is  no  doubt  that  you  would  have  lost  all  of 
Asia,  had  Pompey  not  arrived  at  the  nick  of  time.  Do  you 
think  that  the  Mithridatic  war  would  now  be  so  dangerous, 
if 1  Pompey  had  been  put  in  charge  of  it  before  ? 

426  CHAPTER   XVI 

The  fact  that  ambassadors  from  the  Cretans  came  to 
Pompey  when  he  was  in  far-distant  lands,  and  asserted 
that  they  preferred  to  surrender  to  him  rather  than  to  any 
other  Roman  commander,  shows  how  great  is  his  influence 
among  our  enemies.  Why,'is  there  any  doubt  that  Mithri- 
dates  would  not  long  resist  our  interests  in  Asia,  if  Pompey 
were  commander  there,  when  he  sent  an  ambassador  to 
Spain  to  Pompey  personally,2  when3  he  was  only  an  am- 
bassador there  ?  I  think  I  ought  at  this  point  to  say  a  few 
words  about  his  good  fortune,  for  we  all  realize  that  good 
fortune  is  as  4  important  in  completing  great  undertakings 
as  bravery  and  other  qualifications.  He  has  managed  affairs 
at  home  and  in  his  campaigns  with  such  success  that  not 
only  the  enemy,  but  even  the  elements,5  have  obeyed  his 
will,  as6  it  were.  The  common  safety,  therefore,  demands 
that  you  confer  the  management  of  this  war  upon  Pompey. 

427  CHAPTER   XVII 

In  addition  to  these  advantages  that  I  have  enumerated, 
the  fact  that  Pompey  is  already  on  the  ground  with  an 
army  is  another  reason  why 7  he  should  be  selected  for  this 

1  Review  169,  4  and  5.  2  See  74,  i. 

8  "  when  .  .  .  there"  —  do  not  use  a  temporal  clause. 

4  "  is  as  important "  =  is  of  as  much.  6  elements  =  winds  and  tempests. 

6  "  as  it  were  "  —  use  videor  in  its  proper  relation  to  the  preceding  clause. 


qua  re. 


2l6  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART   III 

war.  And  yet  there  are  patriotic  men,  whose  influence  is 
very  powerful,  who,  while  they  acknowledge  that  Pompey 
possesses  in  the  highest  degree  all  the  qualities  of  a  general, 
think  that  it  is  not  consistent1  with  the  highest  interests 
of  the  state  to  bestow  so  mucji  power  upon  one  individual. 
Facts,  however,  speak2  louder  than  words.  These  same 
gentlemen  used  the  same  argument  when  we  were  about 
to  select  a  general  to  put  an  end  to  the  naval  war.  If  their 
opinion  had  prevailed  at  that  time,  do  you  think  we  would 
now  possess  such  a  vast  empire  ? 

428  CHAPTER   XVIII 

There  were  many  states  smaller  than  ours  which  were 
powerful  enough  to  3  defend  their  own  coasts,  and  yet  the 
Roman  people,  who  possessed  such  possibilities4  in  naval 
affairs  before  the  Gabinian  law  was  passed,  were  deprived 
of  the  use  of  their  harbors  and  coasts  through  bad  manage- 
ment. Although  our  ancestors  overcame  King  Perses  and 
laid  low  the  powerful  fleets  of  the  Carthaginians,  we  were 
not  a  match  for  the  pirates.  Don't  you  think  our  officers 
ought  to  have  been  ashamed  to  oppose  the  selection  of 
Pompey  from  that  very  rostra  which  had  been  adorned  by 
the  spoils  gained  by  our  great  generals  ? 

429  CHAPTER   XIX 

We  must  all  acknowledge  that  Hortensius  and  others 
spoke  with  good  intentions  against  Pompey,  and  yet  I  have 
no  doubt  that  they  are  now  ashamed  of  their  words,  when 

1  See  37.  2  "  speak  louder  "  —  what  does  this  expression  really  mean  ? 

3  Do  not  use  the  infinitive,      4  Avoid  the  use  of  a  corresponding  noun  in  Latin. 


CICERO,   POMPEY'S   MILITARY  COMMAND  2 1/ 

they  see  that  Pompey  has  accomplished 1  the  defeat  of  the 
pirates  in  one  year.  But  is  it  not  still  more  unworthy  of 
these  gentlemen  that  they  oppose2  the  appointment  of 
Gabinius  as  a  lieutenant,  especially  when  Pompey  requests 
it  ?  If  Gabinius  got  Pompey  put  in  command  of  the  naval 
war,  should  he  not  have  a  share  in  the  glory  of  that  com- 
mander ?  At  any  rate,  if  the  consuls  do  not  bring  before 
the  senate  the  question  of  his  appointment,  nothing  but  the 
veto  of  the  praetor  will  prevent  me  from  3  doing  so. 

430  CHAPTER   XX 

Catulus,  however,  argues 4  that  if  we  should  stake  every- 
thing upon  Pompey,  and  anything  should  happen  to  him, 
there  would  be  nobody  on  whom  we  could  rely.  Although 
Catulus  is  a  man  of  great  influence,  and  one  who  is  very 
serviceable  to  the  state,  yet  I  differ  with  him  very  strongly, 
feeling,5  as  I  do,6  that  we  should  enjoy  the  services  of  our 
great  men  while  they  live.  When  he  urges  us  to  follow 7 
the  examples  of  our  ancestors,  he  forgets  that  we  have  often 
in  our  history  placed  all  our  hope  on  a  single  individual ;  in 
fact,  if  it  were  necessary,  I  could  mention  many  great  men 
who  have  been  put  at  the  head  of  affairs  at  critical  points. 

431  CHAPTER   XXI 

But,  to 8  speak  further  about  the  ability  of  Pompey,  did 
you  ever  hear  of  a  private  citizen  and  a  mere  youth  gaining 
a  brilliant  victory  under  his  own  command  ?  He  did  9  it. 

1  "accomplished  the  ...  pirates"  —  cf.  in  text  effecit  ut  .  .  .  videremur. 

2  "oppose  the  appointment"  —  cf.  in  text  obtrectatum  esse  .  .  .  ne  legaretur. 
8  See  150.  4  dic5.  5  Do  not  use  the  participle. 

6  "  as  I  do  "  —  is  this  essential  to  the  thought  of  the  clause  ?     May  it  be  omitted  ? 

7  pareo.  8  Do  not  use  the  infinitive.  9  Do  not  use  facio.    See  81,  i. 


2l8  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART   III 

What  is  so  unusual  as  to  intrust  the  duty  of  two  consuls  to 
a  young  man  ?  Afterward,  although  it  was  not  customary 
to  give  an  army  to  a  man  that  had  not  held  office,  the 
management  of  affairs  in  Africa  was  intrusted  to  him,  and 
he  soon  brought l  home  a  victorious  army  ;  and,  after  being 
exempt  from  the  law,  was  allowed  to  celebrate  a  triumph, 
though2  only  a  knight.  I  mention  all  this3  that  Catulus 
may  see  that  many  new  precedents  have  been  established 
in  the  case  of  Pompey. 


432  CHAPTER   XXII 

If  the  outcome4  of  events  shows  that  Hortensius  and 
Catulus  did  not  act  right  in  trying  to  prevent  us  from 
putting  Pompey  in  charge  of  the  naval  war,  let  us  see  that 
their  opinions  do  not  prevail  now.  If5  their  judgment  on 
public  affairs  and  the  ability  of  Pompey  had  been  better 
then,  we  would  be  able  to  put  more  confidence  in  them 
now.  As  I  have  said  before,  Pompey  has  such  self-control, 
as  well  as  bravery,  that  it  is  difficult  to  say  whether  our 
allies  hate  more  the  avaricious  generals  that  have  been  sent 
to  them  than  the  enemy  fear  Pompey.  Hortensius  and 
Catulus  know  how  our  allies  have  been  pillaged,  therefore 
I  cannot  understand  how  they  can  consider6  the  best 
interests  of  our  friends  and  oppose  the  appointment  of 
Pompey  to  the  leadership. 

1  Avoid  the  use  of  so  many  coordinate  verbs. 

2  Omit  "  though  only."     The  emphasis  on  "  knight  "  may  be  shown  in  Latin  by 
its  position. 

3  Use  the  relative.    What  position  ? 

4  "  outcome  of  events  "  =  things  themselves. 

5  "  if  their  judgment  on  ...  had  been  better  "  =  if  they  had  judged  more  wisely 
concerning. 

6  Use  the  participle. 


CICERO,   POMPEY'S   MILITARY  COMMAND  219 

433  CHAPTER   XXIII 

Therefore,  since  the  generals  who  have  been  sent  against 
Mithridates  have  accomplished  nothing  except1  to  enrich 
themselves  by  plundering  the  property  of  our  allies  and  the 
shrines  of  their  temples,  it  is  high  time,  citizens,  that  we 
cease  to  think  of  ourselves  only,  and  that  we  send  to  Asia 
a  man  capable2  of  looking  after  the  interests  of  our  allies 
as  well  as  of  defeating  the  enemy.  Pompey  is  a  man  who 
is  fit  to  accomplish  all  this.3  He  is  not  a  commander  who 
will  think  more  of  becoming  rich  than  of  pursuing  the 
enemy,  and  the  fact  that  our  allies  will  be  glad  to  have  him 
come  among  them  is  a  proof  of  this.  I  have  said  a  great 
deal  about  the  men  who  object  to  this  law;  but  don't  for- 
get that  there  are  very  many  men,  who  are  noted4  for  their 
deeds  on  land  and  sea,  who  feel  that  you  should  intrust 
Pompey  with  this  great  authority  without  delay. 

434  CHAPTER   XXIV 

Cicero  had  now  shown  the  Romans  that  the  war  was 
very  important  and  inevitable,5  and  that  they  had  only  one 
general  capable  of  bringing  it  to  an  end.  He  then  told 
Manlius  that  he  would  devote  whatever  talent  and  influence 
he  had  to  passing6  the  law,  and  he  urged  him  not  to  be 
frightened  from  his  opinions  by  anybody.  There  were 
some  people  who  felt  that  Cicero  spoke  in  behalf  of  the 
Manilian  law  to  gain  the  favor  of  Pompey,  who  was  the 
leading  man  in  the  state  at  that  time ;  but  should  we  not 
believe  that  Cicero  was  sufficiently  patriotic 7  to  do  this  for 
the  highest  interests  of  the  state,  and  not  for  his  own 
benefit  ? 

1  "  except  to  "  =  nisi  ut.        2  See  174.  i.        3  Use  the  relative.        4  exsisto. 
5  necessarius.  °  constituo.          "•  Cf.  the  text,  Ch.  XVII,  line  10. 


THE   CITIZENSHIP   OF   ARCHIAS 

435  CHAPTER   I 

Aulus  Licinius  had  a  right  to  claim  the  advantage  of 
whatever  talent  Cicero  possessed.  For  Cicero  said  that 
as  far  back  as  he  could  remember  Licinius  had  been  his 
teacher  in  the  liberal  arts,  and  therefore  nobody  ought  to 
be  surprised  that  he  wished  to  help  him ;  for,  although  he 
did  not  have1  the  same  kind  of  ability  as2  Licinius,  poets 
and  orators  were  bound  together  by  a  certain  common 
bond  of  relationship. 

436  CHAPTER   II 

The  case  was  being  tried  before  a  praetor  who  was  a 
most  excellent  man,  and  in  the  presence  of  a  large  crowd. 
Therefore  Cicero  urged  the  judges  not  to  think  it  strange 
that  he  should  not  use  the  ordinary3  court  language,  but 
should  prefer  to  adopt  a  style  of  speech  that  is  more 
adapted  to  the  defendant.  "  I  beg  of  you,"  said  he,  "  to 
allow  me  to  speak  rather  freely  about  the  study  of  litera- 
ture. If  you  should  do  this,  I  certainly  think  I  could  per- 
suade you  to  enroll  this  man  as  a  citizen,  even  if  he  were 
not  one."  4 

1  "  he  did  have  "  =  in  se  fuit.  2  quae. 

3  Cf.  in  text  inusitato.  4  Omit. 

220 


CICERO,   ARCIIIAS  221 

437  CHAPTER   III 

In  his  youth  Aulus  Licinius  was  trained  in  the  arts,  and 
having  devoted  himself  to  writing  soon  excelled  everybody 
in  the  city  of  Corinth.1  He  became  so  famous  for  his  Greek 
learning  that  he  was  deemed  worthy  of  the  acquaintance 
and  hospitality  of  many  learned  men  both  in  Italy  and  in 
Greece.  When  in  Italy  he  was  presented  with  citizenship 
by  many  Greek  cities,  which  shows  that  there  were  some 
who  had  ability  to  estimate  genius.  On  coming  to  Rome 
he  became  acquainted2  with  many  prominent  men,  who 
not  only  treated  him  with  the  greatest  respect,  but  even 
admitted  him  into  their  homes.  Although  still  a  young 
man,  his  acquaintance  was  cultivated  by  almost  everybody 
on  account  of  his  genius,  learning,  and  native  worth. 


438  CHAPTER   IV 

On  leaving  Rome  in  company  with  Lucullus  he  arrived 
at  Heraclia,  a  state  that  enjoyed  most  favorable  treaty 
rights.  Then,  deeming3  himself  worthy  of  the  citizen- 
ship, he  got  himself  enrolled  on  the  ground  that  he  had 
lived  at  Rome  a  long  time.  Afterward  a  certain  Gratius 
claimed  that  he  was  not  a  Roman  citizen,  because  he  could 
not  prove  by  the  records  that  he  had  been  enrolled  as  a 
citizen  either  at  Rome  or  some  allied  city.  Now  don't  you 
think  it  was  absurd  that  Gratius  should  demand  the  rec- 
ords, which  all  knew  had  been  burned,  and  pay  no  atten- 
tion4 to  the  oaths  of  respectable  men  who  saw  Licinius 
present  himself  before  the  praetor  ? 

1  Not  genitive.  2  "  became  acquainted  with  "  =  cognosce. 

8  Do  not  use  the  participle.          4  "  pay  no  attention  to  "  =  repudio. 


222  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  — PART   III 

439  CHAPTER   V 

The  records  neither  of  Appius  nor  Gabinius  were  care- 
fully kept,  but  Metellus,  by  whom  Licinius  was  enrolled, 
was  so  careful  and  conscientious  that  he  used  to  be  wor- 
ried by  the  erasure  of  a  single  name.  Furthermore,  if  the 
Greek  cities  were  in  the  habit  of  giving  the  citizenship  to 
actors  and  men  of  ordinary  ability,  do  you  think  they 
would  have  rejected  Licinius,  a  man  of  such  great  genius  ? 
Yet  Gratius  asks  for  the  census,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  he 
knew  Archias  was  not 1  at  Rome  either 1  at  the  last  census 
or 1  the  one  before  that.  In  view  2  of  all  these  arguments 
who  can  doubt  that  Aulus  Licinius  is  a  Roman  citizen  ? 

440  CHAPTER   VI 

Cicero  was  greatly  pleased  with  Licinius,  because  he 
supplied  him  with  something3  to  refresh  his  mind  with 
after  a  day's  labor,  and  with  the  material4  for  his  speeches 
on  a  great  variety  of  business.  Cicero  said  that  anybody 
ought  to  be  ashamed  so  to  devote  himself  to  literature  that 
he  could  not  help  his  friends  or  contribute  to  the  good  of 
his  fellow-countrymen.  "  For  my  part,5  "  said  he,  "  I  am 
not  ashamed  to  confess  that  I  devote  as  much  time  to 
these  studies  as  others  spend  on  pleasure  and  recreation. 
Unless  the  teachings  of  this  man  and  the  examples  derived 
from  Greek  literature  had  convinced  me  that  fame  and 
integrity  should  be  considered  of  paramount6  worth,  I 
would  not  have  been  willing  to  expose  myself  to  such 
dangers  for  your  safety." 

1  "not  .  .  .  either  ...  or"  =  neither  .  .  .  nor. 

2  Cf.  in  the  text,  Quae  cumita  sint. 

3  "  something  with  "  =  whereby  =  ubi.          4  Avoid  the  use  of  a  noun. 

5  "  For  my  p^rt  "  —  this  merely  emphasizes  the  pronoun  I. 

6  What  does  this  word  mean  ? 


CICERO,  ARCHIAS  223 

441  CHAPTER  VII 

Some  one  may  ask  why  some  of  our  great  generals  have 
not  been  trained  in  literature.  My  reply  is  that  there  have 
been  men  of  such  great  natural  endowments  that,  even 
without  systematic1  training,  they  have  shown2  themselves 
to  be  wise,  dignified,  and  brave.  How  much  greater  would 
such  men  have  been,  had  they  added  the  benefits  of  learn- 
ing to  their  excellent  natural  abilities  !  Such  were  Scipio 
Africanus,  Cato  the  elder,  and  others,  men  who  knew  that 
these  studies  were  of  great  value  to  them  in  attaining  vir- 
tue. Learning  is  confined3  neither  to  time,  age,  nor  place, 
therefore  I  think  we  should  all  seek  these  studies  for  the 
pleasure  they  give  us,  even  if  no  direct4  benefit  can  be 
shown. 

442  CHAPTER  VIII 

Roscius,  who  died  recently  at  an  advanced  age,  was  a 
man  of  such  grace  that  he  won  the  admiration  of  all  of  us  by 
the  mere  movements  of  his  body;  do  you  think,  then,  that 
we  ought  to  neglect  Archias,  who  is  noted  for  the  speed 
and  agility  of  his  intellect  ?  Why,5  I  have  seen  him  recite 
on  the  spur  of  the  moment,  without 6  writing  a  single  word, 
excellent  poetry  on  current7  events.  Let  us  look  upon  the 
poets  as  men  of  divine  inspiration.  If  they  could  make  the 
rocks  move,  and  the  wild  beasts  stop  their  course,  certainly 
we  who  have  been  trained  in  all8  that  is  good  ought  to  be 
moved  by  their  songs. 

1  "  systematic  training  "  =  ratio  ac  disciplina. 

2  "  have  shown  themselves  "  =  exsisto. 
8  "  is  confined  to  "  =  is  of. 

4  =  real,  true.  6  Quid  ? 

6  Express  the  idea  of  this  clause  by  a  temporal  clause. 

7  Express  by  a  relative  clause  ;  see  71,  7. 

8  "  all  that  is  good  "  —  all  the  best  things. 


224  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  III 

443  CHAPTER   IX 

If  many  nations  claimed  Homer  as  their  citizen  even 
after  his  death,  certainly  we  should  not  reject  this  poet 
while  he  is  living,  one  who  has  devoted  much  of  his  time 
to  the  celebration  of  Roman  wars  and  victories.  We  like 1 
to  hear  those  who  speak  in  our  praise.  This  man  has 
written  about  the  Mithridatic  war,  about  our  achievements  2 
in  the  Pontus  under  the  command  of  Lucullus,  and  about 
the  rescue  3  of  Cyzicus  from  the  destruction  of  war.  Cer- 
tainly, then,  it  would  not  be  to  our  credit  not  to  accept  as 
a  citizen  a  man  whose  writings  have  adorned  not  only  our 
generals,  but  also  the  whole  Roman  people. 

444  CHAPTER   X 

Do  not  think  it  is  a  disadvantage4  to  us,  judges,  that 
Archias  uses  the  Greek  language,  for  I  would  call  your 
attention  to  the  fact  that  Greek  is  read  far  more  widely 
than  Latin,  and  that,  therefore,  if5  this  man  is  the  herald 
of  our  glory,  our  deeds  will  penetrate  to  the  uttermost  parts 
of  the  earth.  The  greatest  generals  have  always  bestowed 
especial  honor  upon  poets  and  writers,  for  the  greater  a 
man  is  the  more  he  is  influenced  by  the  desire  for  glory. 
Who  would  have  heard  of  Achilles,  had  he  not  had  Homer 
to  proclaim  his  deeds  ?  When  Sulla  was  in  Spain,  he  gave 
a  reward  to  a  poet  of  little 6  worth  who  had  written  a  short 
poem  in  his  honor,  but  he  told  him  not  to  write  any  more. 
I  suppose  he  would  have  refused  Archias,  if  he  had  asked 
him  for  the  citizenship. 

1  "  We  like  to  hear  "  =  we  hear  most  gladly. 

2  Avoid  the  use  of  a  single  noun. 

3  Cf.  ab  urbe  condita  =  from  the  founding  of  the  city.         4  See  37. 
c  "  if  .  .  .  glory  "  —  abl.  absolute.         6  "  of  little  worth  "  =  malus. 


CICERO,  ARC  HI  AS  22$ 

445  CHAPTER   XI 

It  must  be  admitted  that  all 1  good  men  wish  to  be  praised. 
If  this  were  not  the  case,  would  those  philosophers  who 
write  treatises  on  the  contempt  of  glory  inscribe  their  names 
to  their  books  ?  I  confess  that  I  would  have  desired  no 
other  reward  for  the  dangers  that  I  underwent  in  your  be- 
half than  that  this  man  should  have  written  the  history2 
of  my  consulship.  If  we  did  not  all  have  a  certain  manly 
quality  to  arouse  us  to  labor,  what3  reason  would  we  have 
to  toil  and  worry  ourselves  about  the  numerous  cares  of  life  ? 

446  CHAPTER   XII 

Surely  we  who  are  engaged  in  public  life  ought  not  to 
seem  so  narrow-minded4  as  to  think  that  after  death  we 
shall  cease  to  remember  what  we  have  done  in  life.  The 
most  distinguished  men  have  been  exceedingly  careful5  to 
leave  behind  them  a  statue  that  would  represent  to  the 
living  the  form  and  features  of  the  dead ;  should  we  not 
much  more  desire  to  leave  to  posterity  a  sketch  of  our  pur- 
poses and  virtues  prepared  by  men  of  the  greatest  ability  ? 
For  these  reasons,  gentlemen  of  the  jury,  I  entreat  you  to6 
preserve  in  your  number  this  man  who  is  already  a  citizen 
of  Rome  by  law,  and  whose  virtue  and  ability  are  attested 
by  many  witnesses. 

1  "  all  good  men  "  =  optimus  quisque.  2  res. 

8  "  what  .  .  .  toil "  —  cf.  in  text,  quid  est  quod  .  .  .  exerceamus. 

4  See  29. 

5  "  exceedingly  .  .  .  leave  "  =  desired  with  the  greatest  care  to  leave. 

6  Do  not  use  the  infinitive. 


LATIN    PROSE   COMP.  —  15 


THE    ORATION    FOR   MARCELLUS 

447  CHAPTERS   I   AND   II 

Cicero  said  that  the  mercy  and  magnanimity  of  Caesar 
forced  him  to  break  his  customary l  silence  and  to  speak 
once  more  before  the  senate.  The  restoration  of  Marcellus 
was  very  pleasing  to  Cicero,  for  he  was  deeply  pained  that 
his  companion  in  study  and  in  public  life  was  not  allowed 
in  Rome  with  him.  The  fact  that  Caesar  has  pardoned 
Marcellus  is  an  omen  of  good  for  the  future,  since  by  this 
act  Caesar  has  shown  his  ability2  and  willingness2  to  sub- 
ordinate all  personal  considerations  to  the  welfare  of  the 
state.  Your  achievements,  Caesar,  so  far  excel  those  of 
any  other  hero  that  eloquence  3  cannot  fitly  describe  them. 
And  yet  the  glory  of  this  deed  far  outshines  all  your  vic- 
tories, for  the  reason  that  this  honor  belongs  to  you  alone, 
while  the  credit  for  winning  battles  must  be  shared  with 
the  soldiers  and  with  fortune. 

448  CHAPTERS   III    AND    IV 

Your  triumphs  in  war,  magnificent  as  they  are,4  were  such 
as  could  be  won  by  force  of  arms,5  but  this  triumph  over 
resentment  and  suspicion,  over  your  feelings  and  personal 
power,  can  be  gained  only  by  the  spirit  that  makes  men 

1  Express  this  word  by  a  clause.  2  Do  not  use  a  noun. 

8  verba.  4  "  as  they  are  "  —  need  this  be  expressed  ? 

6  "  force  of  arms  "  —  force  and  arms. 
226 


CICERO,  MARCELLUS  22/ 

like  the  gods.  Your  victories  on  the  field  of  battle  will 
always  command  attention,  but  your  qualities  of  mind  will 
inspire  the  love  of  all  mankind.  Time  will  destroy  the 
memorials  of  your  victories  in  battle,  but  one  who  has  acted 
generously  and  wisely  in  a  moment  of  anger  will  never  fade 
from  the  hearts  of  men.  You  have  not  only  surpassed  all 
other  leaders  in  the  civil  war,  but  you  have  even  shown 
yourself  superior  to  victory  itself,  for  you  have  given  back 
to  the  vanquished  the  very  things  that  they  hoped  to  secure 
when  the  war  was  begun. 

449  CHAPTERS   V   AND   VI 

The  restoration  of  Marcellus  is  especially  significant  as l 
indicating  how  Caesar  regards2  those  who  opposed  him  in 
the  contest  with  Pompey.  And  that  Caesar  would  have 
avoided  war,  if  he  could,  is  attested  by  the  fact  that  he 
showed  so  much  kindness  to  Marcellus  and  myself,  who 
both  favored  peace.  Caesar's  rival,  if  victorious,  would 
have  been  cruel,  and  heaven  apparently  has  made  all  hope 
of  security  depend  on  the  gentleness  and  wisdom  of  the  one 
who  was  the  conqueror.  Therefore  I  urge  you  to  rejoice  in 
the  exercise  of  those  noble  qualities,  because  victories  are 
not  given  us  for  all  time  by  fortune,  while  magnanimity 
is  a  boon  from  heaven.  Don't  cease  to  show  us  that  you 
are  always  master  of  yourself. 

450  CHAPTERS   VII    AND   VIII 

Now  may  I  be  allowed  to  refer  to  your  fear  that  your 
life  will  be  in  danger.  Who  could  harbor3  so  dreadful  a 

1  What  idea  does  this  convey  ? 

2  "  how  .  .  .  those  "  =  what  feelings  Caesar  has  toward  those. 
8  "  harbor  "  =  hold. 


228  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  — PART  III 

purpose  ?  Surely  none  of  your  friends.  And  yet  you  have 
no  foes,  for  those  who  were  hostile  to  you  have  been  made 
your  warmest  friends  by  your  magnanimity.  But  let  us 
magnify  the  danger  in  order  to  increase  our  watchfulness, 
since  on  the  preservation  of  your. life  depends  the  safety  of 
all.  The  country  is  prostrate,  and  you  alone  can  quicken 
all  its  interests.  For  this  reason  I  shudder  when  I  think 
of  your  statement  that  you  have  lived  long  enough  as l  far 
as  years  and  glory  are  concerned.  To  be  sure,  you  have 
won  renown  beyond  that  of  all  other  men ;  but,  to  reach 
the  highest  point  of  fame  that  lies  within  your  reach,  you 
have  yet  to  lift  up  this  prostrate  nation. 

451  CHAPTERS    IX,    X,    AND    XI 

In  addition  to  your  victories  and  the  restoration  of  your 
enemies,  you  have  still  to  restore  the  republic.  When  all 
this2  has  been  accomplished,  then,  perhaps,  some  one  may 
say  you  have  lived  enough.  The  years  of  your  life  will  not 
all  be  spent  here,  for  there  will  be  nobody  who  will  be  born 
a  hundred  years  hence  who  will  not  know  the  splendid 
qualities  of  your  life.  Our  welfare  and  that  of  our  de- 
scendants is  bound  up  in  your  life ;  we  offer  to  sacrifice 
our  lives  in  the  preservation  of  yours  if  occasion  arises.  In 
conclusion,  I  wish  to  express  something  of  the  gratitude 
that  I  and  my  associates  feel  for  your  generosity  and  mag- 
nanimity. For  my  own  part,  I  am  particularly  grateful  for 
your  kindness  to  me  personally  in3  the  restoration  of  my 
dear  friend  Marcellus. 

1  "  as  ...  concerned  "  =  for  years  and  glory. 

2  Use  the  relative.    What  should  its  position  be  ? 

3  "  in  the  .  ,  .  Marcellus  "  —  ablative  absolute. 


THE   ORATION   FOR   LIGARIUS 

452  CHAPTERS   I   AND  II 

A  strange  charge  is  brought  against  Ligarius, — that  he 
was  in  Africa.  Pansa  has  admitted  the  truthfulness  of  the 
accusation ;  therefore  I  am  in  a  dilemma,1  for  I  had  ex- 
pected that  I  would  have  to  prove  this  fact  to  Caesar. 
There  is,  then,  nothing  for  me  to  do  but  to  plead  for 
mercy.  The  defendant  confesses,  Tubero,  that  he  joined 
the  same  party  to  which  you  and  your  father  belonged. 
When  Considius  left  Africa  to  return  to  Rome,  all  the  pro- 
vincials2 requested  him  to  appoint  Ligarius  to  serve  in  his 
place.  At  the  outbreak  of  war,  Pompey's  friends  in  Africa 
urged  Ligarius  to  take  command  of  the  forces  in  Pompey's 
interests,  but  he  steadily  refused.  Afterward  Varus  went 
to  Africa  and  assumed  control.  The  fact  that  Ligarius  re- 
mained in  the  province  had  nothing  whatever  to  do  with  the 
war,  —  his  stay  there  was  due  to  necessity,  not  to  choice. 

453  CHAPTERS    III    AND    IV 

Of  my  own  free  will  I  favored  Pompey,  but  at  the  close 
of  the  war  received  a  full  pardon  at  the  hands  of  that  noble 
man  before  whom  I  speak.  Tubero  and  his  father  deliber- 
ately espoused  the  cause  of  Pompey,  and  fought  with  him, 
yet  they  were  freely  pardoned  by  Caesar.  And  now  we 

1  Do  not  use  a  noun.    Consider  the  real  meaning  of  this  word.        2  See  71,  7. 

229 


230  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION  —  PART  III 

appear  before  our  magnanimous  conqueror,  the  one  to  de- 
fend, the  other  to  accuse,  a  man  who  did  the  very  thing  that 
you,  Tubero,  wished  to  do  yourself,  but  could  not.  Your 
desire l  to  keep  him  in  exile  is  exceedingly  cruel,  for  you 
thus  deprive  him  not  only  of  his  country,  home,  and  brothers, 
but  almost  of  his  very  life. 

454  CHAPTERS   V   AND   VI 

Tubero,  you  are  a  man  of  such  virtue,  learning,  and 
kindness  that  I  cannot  understand  why  you  wish  to  op- 
pose2 the  pardon  of  Ligarius.  There  are  some  people  who, 
after  a  victor  has  been  kind  toward  them,  do  not  wish  any- 
body else  to  be  pardoned.  If  you  had  always  been  friendly 
to  Caesar  yourself,  you  would  have  some  reason3  for  urging 
him  not  to  pardon  Ligarius.  It  is  strange  that  he  should 
be  accused  rather  than  others,  that  the  accusation  should 
come  from  one  who  fought  on  the  same  side,  and  that  there 
should  be  any  new  charge  to  bring  against  him.  He  may 
be  called  unfortunate,  but  he  does  not  deserve  to  be  called 
criminal  any  more  than  you  or  I  do. 

455  CHAPTERS    VII,  VIII,    IX  ~ 

Tubero's  complaint  against  Ligarius  was  that  he  did  not 
receive  him  into  the  province.  If  Tubero  had  secured  con- 
trol of  Africa,  do  you  not  think  he  would  have  handed  it 
over  to  Pompey  ?  Nobody  can  doubt  that  he  would  have 
done  so,  for  as  soon  as  Ligarius  was  prevented  from  landing 
in  Africa,  he  went  off  to  Pompey,  and  not  to  Caesar.  And 

1  Express  the  idea  by  a  clause. 

2  "  oppose  the  pardon,"  cf.  in  text,  ne  impetremus  oppugnabis. 

3  "  have  some  reason  for  "  =  have  why  you  should. 


CICERO,  LIGARIUS  231 

yet,  in  spite  of  these  services,  Pompey  was  lukewarm 1  in  his 
attachment  to  Tubero.  May  it  not  be  true  that  resentment2 
for  a  fancied2  personal  injury  influenced  Tubero  to  take 
this  action  against  Ligarius  ? 


456  CHAPTERS   X,    XI,    XII 

Although  there  are  extenuating3  circumstances,  yet  the 
entire  case  rests  with  Caesar's  forgiving  spirit.  I  beg  of 
you,  Caesar,  to  remember  how  many  friends  you  would 
please  by  the  restoration4  of  Ligarius.  Take  into  considera- 
tion also  the  grief  of  these  brothers,  who  are  so  closely  at- 
tached to  that  one  in  exile.  And  do  not  forget  the  service 
which  Titus  Ligarius  rendered  you,  and  the  fact  that  the 
restoration 4  of  the  exiled  brother  would  bind  them  all  closely 
to  you.  As  in  the  case  of  Marcellus,  you  have  an  oppor- 
tunity to  exercise  those  qualities  that  have  led  men  to  con- 
sider you  almost  divine. 

1  Cf.  languidiore  studio.  2  Recast  this  entire  sentence. 

3  Consider  the  real  meaning  of  this  expression,  and  express  the  idea  in  Latin. 

4  Ablative  absolute. 


EXERCISES    FOR    GENERAL    REVIEW 

457  [Review  sections  1-51.] 

i.  He  was  a  man  of  great  bravery,  and  yet  in  many  matters  he 
showed  too  little  foresight.  2.  When  he  needed  money,  he  could 
always  persuade  his  father.  3.  I  will  have  lasting  friendship  with 
you,  if  you  will  use  your  influence  in  my  behalf.  4.  My  brother 
and  sister  were  worthy  of  very  great  praise  for  their  wisdom. 
5.  The  enemy  advanced  five  miles  farther  than  we  did.  6.  We 
were  deprived  of  provisions,  because  we  remained  there  many 
days.  7.  When  Cicero  had  been  elected  consul,  he  performed  his 
duties  very  boldly.  8.  After  we  came  to  Rome,  they  demanded 
many  favors l  of  us.  9.  He  put  me  in  charge  of  fortifications  that 
were  many  miles  long.  10.  I  am  thoroughly  ashamed  of  her,  be- 
cause she  is  not  skillful  in  such  matters.  1 1 .  He  was  pardoned 
when  we  found  that  the  book  was  not  very  valuable.  12.  Your 
weapons  were  like  mine,  and  were  very  useful  to  me. 

458  [Review  sections  58-96.] 

i.  The  people  I  saw  in  Athens  were  his  friends.  2.  Each  of 
us  enjoys  his  own  friends,  but  not  those  of  other  people.  3.  Cicero 
took  as  much  time  for  study  as  other  men  do  for  pleasure.  4.  After 
Caesar  had  fortified  the  camp  and  encouraged  his  men,  he  waited 
for2  the  enemy  to  attack  him.  5.  All  the  bravest  soldiers  fought  in 
different  parts  of  the  battle,  although  many  had  been  killed  in  doing 
so.3  6.  You  will  not  set  out  to  accomplish  this  with  a  youth  for  a 
leader,  will  you  ?  7.  Having  finished  matters  at  Rome,  Caesar  left 
the  city  for  the  purpose  of  engaging  Pompey's  forces.  8.  Did  you 

i  Omit.  2  See  156,  2.  «  id. 

232 


EXERCISES   FOR  GENERAL   REVIEW  233 

believe  me  when  I  told  you  that  ?  No.  9.  There  have  been  two 
citizens  famous  in  Rome,  one  of  whom  conquered  provinces,  the 
other  preserved  the  city.  10.  This  is  a  very  easy  thing  to  do,  is  it 
not?  ii.  You  ought  to  come,  if  anybody  calls  you.  12.  Hanni- 
bal, having  drawn l  the  Romans  into  an  ambush,  surrounded  and 
killed  a  large  number  of  them. 

459  [Review  sections  102-136.] 

i.  Do  not  fear  the  enemy;  let  us  remember  that  Caesar  is  our 
leader.  2.  Caesar  told  the  Gauls  that  they  might  enjoy  their  own 
laws.  3.  I  have  no  doubt  that  Caesar  would  have  pardoned  more 
of  his  enemies,  had  he  lived  longer.  4.  We  ought  to  obey  the  laws 
of  our  country.  (Express  in  three  ways.)  5.  Ought  we  not  to 
have  praised  him  for  his  courage  ?  6.  Some  one  may  hesitate  to 
ask  us  where  we  are  going.  7.  We  have  had  a  residence  at  Rome 
for  a  long  time.  8.  If  the  letters  should  contain  nothing  new, 
should2  we  blame  Cicero  for  his  zeal  and  prudence  ?  9.  What 
could  I  do,  when  my  father  told  me  what  he  saw  ?  10.  Would 
that  a  more  skillful  leader  were  in  charge  of  the  fortifications,  now 
that  they  have  been  finished  !  n.  If  every  soldier  does  not  do 
his  duty,  I  fear  that  we  shall  not  be  victorious.  12.  Had  Caesar 
been  cruel  by  nature,  he  would  have  killed  many  of  his  enemies 
after  the  defeat  of  Pompey. 

460  [Review  sections  141-175.] 

i.  The  senate  voted  not  to  follow  Caesar's  opinion,  but  to  put 
the  conspirators  to  death.  2.  Catiline  could  not  prevent  Cicero 
from  disclosing  all  his  plans.  3.  Pompey  was  not  greedy  enough 
to  order3  the  houses  of  the  allies  to  be  plundered.  4.  Cicero  called 
the  senate  together  to  lay  before  them  Catiline's  plans.  5.  Cicero 
advised  Catiline  to  leave  the  city  if  he  wished  to  free  the  consul 
from  fear.  6.  For  many  years  Caesar  prevented  the  Germans  from 

1  induco.       2  Consider  carefully  the  real  meaning  of  this  auxiliary.       3  Use  iubeo. 


234  LATIN   PROSE   COMPOSITION— PART   III 

invading  Italy.  7.  When  Caesar  ordered1  the  enemy  to  give  hos- 
tages, they  used  to  obey.  8.  The  general  said,  "  Wait  until  you  see 
the  whites2  of  their  eyes."  9.  The  Germans  were  so  thoroughly 
frightened  that  they  did  not  stop  fleeing  until  they  came  to  the 
Rhine.  10.  I  think  the  Helvetians  would  not  have  emigrated, 
had  they  known  how  powerful  Caesar  was.  1 1 .  They  were  pun- 
ished for3  trying  to  burn  the  city.  12.  We  will  thank  Cicero  for 
persuading  Catiline  to  go  into  exile.  13.  Cicero  was  the  only  man 
who  was  fit  to  be  consul  at  such  a  crisis.  14.  He  sent  a  messen- 
ger to  order  the  enemy  to  surrender.  15.  He  said  he  would  wait 
for  the  arrival 4  of  his  friends. 

461.  At  their  interview  Caesar  showed  Ariovistus  that  he  was 
kindly  disposed  toward  him  ;  yet  he  could  not  allow  him  to  wage  war 
on  the  Aedui,  who  were  allies  of  the  Roman  people.     Ariovistus  re- 
plied that,  since  he  had  crossed  the  Rhine  only  on  invitation,  and 
had  then  been  attacked  by  the  Gauls,  there  was  no  reason  why 5  they 
should   not  pay  their  taxes  now  that  they  had   been  defeated. 
Certainly  the  friendship  of  the  Roman  people  ought  not  to  pre- 
vent him  from  having  what  is  justly  his.     If  he  was  the  first  to 
come  into  Gaul,  the  Roman  people  had  no  business  there ;  there- 
fore if  they  desired  his  friendship  and  help  in  any  wars  they  wished 
to  wage,  they  must  lead  their  army  out  of  that  part  of  Gaul  at  once. 
Caesar  refused  to  obey  Ariovistus,  and  in  the  battle  that  followed 
Ariovistus  was  severely  defeated. 

462.  From  the  numerous  battles  that  Caesar  fought  with  the 
Gauls,  one6  can  easily  understand  how  skillful  he  was  in  military 
affairs.     He  would7  march  so  rapidly  and  appear  so  unexpectedly 
among  those  who  were  meditating  revolt,  that  they  had  no  oppor- 
tunity of  perfecting  their  arrangements.     On  one  occasion  the  Ve- 
neti,  who  live  along  the  seacoast,  realizing  that  Caesar  had  no  fleet, 

1  Use  impero.  2  "  whites  .  .  .  eyes  "  —  their  very  eyes. 

3  Use  a  relative  clause.  4  Do  not  use  a  noun.  5  qua  re. 

6  Do  not  use  unus.  "  What  does  this  auxiliary  mean  ? 


EXERCISES   FOR  GENERAL   REVIEW  235 

felt  sure  that  they  could  raise 1  the  standard  of  revolt  and  prevent 
the  Romans  from  ruling  them  any  longer.  But  Caesar  quickly  sent 
his  officers  in  different  directions  to  hold  the  other  Gauls  to  their 
allegiance,2  and  then  collected  a  fleet  with  which  to  fight  the 
Veneti.  He  found  that  the  ships  of  the  Veneti  were  so  strong 
that  the  Romans  could  not  injure  them  by  their  customary3 
methods,  so  he  ordered  his  men  to  seize  their  rigging  with  long 
poles  and  thus  board  their  ship.  These  tactics 4  were  very  useful 
to  the  Romans,  and  enabled  them  to  capture  the  enemy's  ships 
one  by  one. 

463.  During  the  consulship  of  Cicero,  a  senator  named  Catiline 
formed  a  plan  to  destroy  the  government,  and  persuaded  several 
men  of  noble  birth  to  join  with  him.    But  Cicero  was  on  the  lookout 
to  see  that  the  republic  suffered  no  harm,  and  knew  where  his  asso- 
ciates in  crime  met  and  what  plans  they  adopted.     He  therefore 
called  the  senate  together  to  lay  the  whole  matter  before  them. 
The  result  was  that  the  citizens  were  so  enraged  that  they  would 
have  driven  Catiline  from  the  city,  had  he  not  left  that  very  night 
of  his  own  accord.     There  is  no  patriotic  citizen  who  will  not  ac- 
knowledge that  Cicero  should  be  accorded  the  highest  praise  for 
disclosing  such  a  foul  conspiracy. 

464.  Although  Catiline  had  left  Rome,  it  would  have  been  a 
difficult  matter  to  secure  evidence  against  those  conspirators  who 
remained,  if  a  most  fortunate  occurrence  had  not  happened.    Cicero 
was  informed  that  certain  ambassadors  from  the  Allobroges,  who 
had  come  to  Rome  at  this  time,  were  being  urged  by  the  conspir- 
ators to  incite  an   insurrection  in  Gaul.     So  Cicero  asked   the 
ambassadors  to  secure  letters  from  the  conspirators  in  their  own 
handwriting.     As  the  Gauls  were  leaving  Rome,  they  were  arrested, 
and  these  very  letters,  with  unbroken  seals,  were  seized  as  proofs  of 
the  conspirators'  guilt.     A  few  days  later  the  senate  was  assembled, 

1  "  raise  .  .  .  revolt"  =  make  a  rebellion.  8  officium. 

2  Express  this  adjective  by  a  clause  in  Latin.  4  res. 


236  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  PART   III 

and  after  a  long  consultation  they  voted  that  the  conspirators  who 
remained  in  the  city  should  be  put  to  death. 

465.  Before  Caesar  set  out  from  Rome  the  Helvetians  decided 
to  burn  all  their  villages  (vicus)  and  abandon  their  country  because 
they  were  being  hard  pressed  by  the  Germans.     But  as  soon  as 
Caesar  was  informed  of  this  design,1  he  hastened  from  the  city,  and 
after  gathering  as  large  an  army  as  possible,  pitched  his  camp  near 
Geneva  (Genava),  in  order  to  prevent  the  Helvetians  from  crossing 
the  Rhone  (Rhodanus)  into  the  Roman  province.     Then  the  Hel- 
vetians sent  envoys  to  Caesar  and  said,  "We  desire  to  journey 
through  the  province  without  causing  any  injury,  and  we  ask  that 
we  may  be  allowed  to  do  this  with  your  good  will."     [Yale,  1900.] 

466.  Render  into  Latin  the  following :  — 

When  Cicero,  according  to  custom,  ascended  the  rostra  on  the 
last  day  of  the  year  to  give  an  account  to  the  people  of  the  events 
of  his  consulship,  Metellus  forbade  him  to  speak.  "  The  man,"  he 
said,  "  who  condemned  our  fellow-citizens  unheard,  shall  not  him- 
self be  listened  to."  Then  Cicero  cried  out,  "  I  declare  that  I  have 
saved  the  republic  and  the  city."  The  people  applauded,  and  with 
one  voice  responded  that  he  had  spoken  the  truth. 

He  was  never  able  to  persuade  his  brother  to  go  to  Rome. 

The  consul  did  not  know  what  plan  to  adopt. 

Caesar  was  killed  March  fifteenth. 

Write  the  following  passage  in  indirect  discourse  intro- 
duced by  Cicero  locutus  est :  — 

Vos,  Quirites,  quoniam  iam  nox  est,  venerati  Jovem  in  vestra 
tecta  discedite ;  et  ea,  quamquam  iam  est  periculum  depulsum, 
tamen  aeque  ac  priore  nocte  custodiis  vigiliisque  defendite.  Id  ne 
vobis  diutius  faciendum  sit,  atque  ut  in  perpetua  pace  esse  possitis, 
providebo.  [Wellesley,  1901.] 

i  Omit. 


EXERCISES   FOR  GENERAL   REVIEW  237 

467.  In  the  consulship  of  Cicero,  Catiline  collected  a  band  of 
worthless  men  to  destroy  the  Roman  commonwealth.     When  Cic- 
ero saw  that  the  conspirators  had  established  a  camp  in  Etruria, 
and  that  the  number  of  the  enemy  grew  every  day,  and  that  the 
state  was  in  the  greatest  danger,  he  begged  of  the  senators  to  de- 
cree that  the  consuls  should  see  (to  it)  that  the  state  should  suffer 
no  harm.     By  this  speech  he  brought  it  about  (efficere}  that  Cati- 
line left  Rome  and  went  to  the  camp  of  Manlius,  which  was  at 
Faesulae.     This  he  would  not  have  done  if  he  had  not  seen  that 
all  his  plans  had  been  revealed  (to  be  revealed  =  pa fere).     [Yale, 
1901.] 

468.  i.  When  he  had  finished  the  war  with  the  Germans,  Caesar 
thought  that  for  many  reasons  he  ought  to  go  to  Rome.     But  he 
wished  first  to  cross  the  Rhine  before  other  Germans  had  crossed 
over  into  Gaul,  because  he  had  heard  that  a  body  had  set  out  to 
take  possession  of  the  left  bank,  and  they  would  harass  the  Gauls 
if  they  were  allowed  to  do  this.  % 

2.  Do  we  seem  to  be  so  mean-spirited,  all  of  us  who  have  passed 
our  lives  in  the  service  of  the  state,  that  when  up  to  the  very  end 
we  have  not  drawn  a  calm  breath,  we  should  think  that  all  things 
are  going  to  perish  along  with  us  ?  Have  other  men  left  statues, 
the  likeness  of  the  body  and  not  of  the  soul,  and  ought  we  not  much 
rather  to  leave  a  remembrance  of  our  virtue  ?  [Princeton,  1900.] 

469.  Although  only  a  small  part  of  the  summer  was  left,  Caesar 
determined  to  cross  into  Britain,  for  he  had  observed  that  in  nearly 
all  the  wars  with  the  Gauls  aid  had  been  furnished  to  the  enemy 
by  the  inhabitants  of  that  island.     Since,  however,  he  could  learn 
nothing  from  the  Gauls  about  the  nature  of  the  island  and  of  its 
people,  and  was  afraid  that  some  misfortune  might  happen  to  him 

'if  he  acted  incautiously,  he  sent  a  lieutenant  to  find  out  all  he  could 
about  that  portion  of  Britain  which  was  nearest  to  Gaul. 

In  the  meantime  Caesar  gathered  together  about  eighty  ships  in 
which  to  carry  across  the  troops  if  a  favorable  report  was  made  by 


238  LATIN   PROSE  COMPOSITION  —  TART  III 

his  lieutenant.  When  after  five  days  this  officer  had  returned  and 
reported  all  that  he  had  seen,  Caesar  at  once  set  sail  with  two 
legions  of  infantry  and  ordered  the  cavalry  to  follow  with  all 
possible  speed. 

The  cavalry,  however,  waited  more  than  five  days  before  setting 
out,  and  then  proceeded  so  slowly  that  one  battle  had  already  been 
fought  with  the  enemy  before  they  came  within  sight  of  Caesar  and 
the  infantry.  [Harvard,  1897.] 

470.  Caesar,  knowing  that  the  enemy  were  near,  gave  orders 
that  six  legions  in  light  marching  order  should  precede  the  baggage 
and  fortify  the  camp.     The  Nervii  supposed  that  each  legion  would 
arrive  followed  by  its  own  baggage.     If  the  Romans  had  come  to 
the  river  in  this  fashion,  they  would  have  been  defeated ;  but  the 
Nervii  waited  until  they  caught  sight  of  the  first  baggage  train,  and 
by  that  time  there  were  so  many  soldiers  on  the  hill  that  the 
Romans  were  not  overpowered    by  the  first  rush.     Yet  even  so 
one  cannot  doubt  that  Caesar's  difficulties  were  great.     He  saw 
that  his  cavalry  had  been  routed,  and  that  the  barbarians  were 
rushing  from  the  forest  to  the  river.     There  was  no  time  to  send  a 
staff  officer  to  tell  the  soldiers  what  to  do.     But,  well  trained  as 
they  were  by  previous  campaigning,  the  soldiers  knew  their  duty. 
[Harvard,  1900.] 

471.  The  Spartans,  getting  wind  of  the  conspiracy,  recalled  Pau- 
sanias  ;  but,  being  unable  to  find  any  clear  proofs,  acquitted  him  on 
the  capital  charge,  while  punishing  him  by  a  fine.    When,  however, 
he  continued  to  correspond  with  the  Persians,  he  was  detected  in  the 
following  manner.     A  slave  who  was  sent  to  Persia,  and  who  had 
noticed  that  none  of  those  dispatched  on  like  errands  ever  returned, 
feared  that  if  he  obeyed  his  master's  injunctions  he  should  meet 
with  death.     He  therefore  delivered  the  letter  to  the  ephors,  and 
afterward,  in  a  conference,  forced  Pausanias  to  confess  his  crime  so 
plainly  that  the  ephors,  who  were  concealed  near  by  and  heard  the 
confession,  were  able  to  arrest  this  disloyal  citizen.     [Harvard, 
1899.] 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY 


NOTE.  —  Words  in  SMALL  CAPITALS  are  synonyms  of  the  first  word  given. 


abandon,  relinquo,  ere,  liqui,  lictus, 
LEAVE  BEHIND  ;    abicid,  icere,  ieti, 

iectus,  THROW  FROM  Or  AWAY. 

ability,  ingenium,  t,  n. 

able,  am  able,  possum,  posse,  potui. 

about,  around,  circum,  prep.  \v.  ace.; 

about,  circiter,  adv.,  used  w.  numer- 
als ;   about,  concerning,  de  w.  abl. 
absent,  absens,  gen.  absentis. 
accept,  accipid,  cipere,  cepT,  ceptus. 
accomplish,  conficio,  e re,  feci,  fectus. 
accord,  his  own  accord,  sud  sponte. 
account,  on  account   of,  propter,  ob, 

preps,  w.  ace. 

accuse,  accuse,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
accustomed,    be    accustomed,    soled, 

ere,    solitus    sum ;     cdnsuescd,    ere, 

suevi,  suet  us. 
acknowledge,  confiteor  ,erl,  cdnfessus 

stun. 

across,  trans,  prep.  w.  ace. 
adopt,  insisto,  ere,  stitl,  — ;    capio,  ere, 

cepi,    caplus ;    instituo,    ere,    stitui, 

stitutus.     See  use. 
advance,   progredior,   gredt,   gressus 

sum. 
advise,  moned,  ere,  ui,  itus ;  sudded, 

ere,  suasT,  sttasus. 
Aedui,  Aediti,  drum,  m.  pi. 
affair,  res,  ret,  f. 
afraid,  be  afraid  of,  timed,  ere,  ui.  — 

See  fear, 
after,  postquam,  conj. 


against,  in,  contra,  preps,  w.  ace. 
aid,    aiixilium,  I,  n.;    iuvo,  are,  iiivT, 

iutus. 

alarm,  commoveo,  ere,  movt,  motus. 
Alexander,  Alexander,  drl,  m. 
alive,  be  alive,  be   living,  vivo,   ere, 

vixi,  victus. 
all,    omnis,   e,   EVERY,  THE  WHOLE, 

ENTIRE,     pi.,     ALL     (persons),     ALL 

(things)  ;  totus,  a,  «///,  ALL  THE,  THE 
WHOLE,  ENTIRE,  TOTAL  ;  universns, 
a,  urn,  ALL  (taken  together), 

WHOLE,  ENTIRE,  UNIVERSAL;    cutlftl, 

ae,  a,  ALL  (united  in  a  body),  ALL 

TOGETHER. 

allow,  patior,  T,  passits  sum  ;  licet,  ere, 

liciiit  or  licitum  est,  used  imperson- 

ally. 

ally,  socius,  I,  m. 
almost,  prope,  adv. 
alone,  solus,  a,  urn. 
already,  iam,  adv. 
also,  et,  etiam. 
although,  quamquam,  quamvis,  cum, 

conjs.     See  171.  87.  6. 
always,  semper,  adv. 
am,  sum,  esse,  fuT,  futfirus. 
ambassador,  legatus,  t,  m. 
among,  inter,  prep.  w.  ace.  ;  in,  prep. 

w.  abl.  and  ace. 
ancestors,  maid  res,  ttm,  m.  pi. 
and,  et,  -g^^•e,  dc  or  atque,  conjs.    See  82. 


angry,  be  angry  with,  trdscor,  i, 
tus  sum,  w.  dat. 


Trd- 


239 


240 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


announce,  nuntid,  are,  dm,  dtus. 
another,  alius,  a,  ud. 
answer,  responded,  ere,  spondt,  spdnsus. 
any,  anybody,  any  one,  anything,  ali- 

quis  ;  in  a  negative  sentence,  iillus  ; 

after  si,  nisi,  ne,  and  num,  quis. 
apologize,  satis/acid,  ere,  feet,  factus. 
approach,  appropinqud,  are,  dvl,  dtus, 

COME    NEAR    TO,     DRAW     NIGH,     W. 

dat. ;     aded,   adtre,   adlvt    or    adil, 

aditus,  GO  TO,  VISIT,  w.  ace. 
arise,  coorior,  tri,  ortus  sum. 
arm  one's  self,  passive  of  anno,  are, 

dm,   dtus;   anna    capid,    ere,   cept, 

captus. 

arms,  anna,  drum,  n.  pi. 
army,  exercitus,  us,  m. 
around,  about,  circum,  w.  ace. 
arrest,    comprehends,    ere,    prehendJ, 

prehensus. 

arrival,  adventus,  us,  m. 
arrive,  pervenid,  ire,  vent,  ventus. 
as  much  ...  as,  tantus  .  .  .  quan- 

tus,  a,  um ;  tarn  .  .  .  quam. 
as  soon  as,  simul  dc   (atque~}  ;  cum 

primum. 
as  soon  as  possible,  quam  primum, 

adv. 
ashamed,  something  causes  one  to  be 

ashamed,  pudet,  pudere,  puduit,  or 

puditum  est.     See  27. 
ask,  rogd,  are,  dvi,  dtus ;  ask  advice 

of,  cdnsuld,  ere,  cdnsulm,  consultus, 

w.  ace.;   ask  for,  demand,  postulo, 

are,  dm,  dtus,  w.  ace.;   quaero,  ere, 

sTvt,  situs  ;  posed,  peto.     See  1 5 . 
Aspasia,  Aspasia,  ae,  f. 
assault,  make  an  assault,  signa  infero, 

inferre,  Intuit,  ill  dtus  ;  to  make  an 

assault  on  the  enemy,  in  hosfis  signa 

tnferre. 


assemble,  convenio,  ire,  vent,  ventus. 

at  all,  omnlno,  adv. 

at  the  house  of,  apud,  prep.  w.  ace. 

Athenians,  Athenienses,  ium,  m.  pi. 

Athens,  Athenae,  drum,  f.  pi. 

attack,  impetum  facto,  facere,  feet, 
factus ;  ingredior,  ingredi,  ingres- 
sus  sum ;  to  attack  the  enemy,  in 
hastes  impetum  facere. 

attempt,  conor,  art,  dtus  sum. 

avoid,  vito,  are,  dm,  dlus. 

B 

band,  company,  manus,  us,  f. 
battle, proelium,  t,  n.;  pngna,  ae,  f. 
be  born,  descended,  ndscor,  T,  ndtus 

sum. 
be  without,  be  deprived  of,  cared,  ere, 

tit,  itus. 
bear,  fero,    ferre,   tult,   Idtns ;    bear 

with,  perfero,  ferre,  tuli,  Idtus. 
because,  quod,  quia,  quonia m,  conjs. 

See  173. 

become,  be  mz&e,  fid,  fieri,  factus  sum. 
before,  ante,  prep.  w.  ace.;   antequam, 

priusquam,  conjs.;  the  night  before, 

superidre  node. 
beg,  beg  for,  drd,  are,  dm,  dtus  ;  petd, 

ere,  tvt  or  it,  ttus.^ 
began,  coept  or  coeptus  sum,  coepisse, 

defective  verb  ;   coeptus  sum  is  only 

used  with  passive  infinitives. 
begin,  incipid,  cipere,  cept,  ceptus  ;  be- 
gin a  battle,  proelium  com  mitt d,  ere, 

mist,  missus. 

behalf,  in  behalf  of,  pro,  w.  abl. 
Belgians,  Belgae,  drum,  m.  pi. 
believe,  credo,  ere,  credidt,  crediturus. 
besiege,  oppiignd,  are,  dm,  dtus. 
betake  one's  self,  se  confer  re ;  con- 
ferd,  cdnferre,  contult,  colldtus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


241 


betray,  prodo,  ere,  didi,  ditus. 

bid  (at  an  auction),  liceor,  liceri,  lid- 

tus  sum. 

bind,  vincio,  ire,  vinxt,  vinctus. 
blame,  culpo,  are,  dm,  dtus. 
blood,  sanguis,  sanguinis,  m. 
board,  board  ship,  transcendo,  ere,  ai, 

— ,  in  ndvem. 

boat,  linter,  lintris,  f.  ;    ndvis,  is,  f. 
body,  corpus,  carports,  n. 
boldness,  auddcia,  ae,  f. 
born,  be  born,  ndscor,  i,  ndtus  sum. 
book,  liber,  libn,  m. 
both  .   .   .  and,  et  .  .  .  et. 
bound,  be  bounded,  pass,  of  confined, 

ere,  ui,  ntus. 
boy,  puer,  i,  m. 
brave,yOr/w,  e;  auddx,  acts. 
bravely,  fortiter,  audacter,  advs. 
bravery,  virtus,  utis,  f. 
bridge,  pans,  pontis,  m. 
brother,  f  rater,  frdtris,  m. 
building,  tecta,  drum,  n.  ;   aedijicium, 

f,  n. 
burn,  burn  up,  combnro,  urere,  ussl, 

ustus ;  burn  alive,  igni  cremo,  I. 
business,  negStium,  i,  n. 
but,  sed,  autem  ;  but  if,  sin,  conjs. 
buy,  emo,  ere,  emi,  emptus. 
by,  d,  ab,  prep.  w.  abl. 


Caesar,  Caesar,  art's,  m. 

call,  appello,  are,  dm,  dtus,  ADDRESS, 

CALL  BY    NAME,    ENTITLE  ;    nomind, 

are,  dvi,  dtus,  NAME,  CALL  by  name  ; 

convoco,    are,    dm,   dtus,    SUMMON, 

CALL  together. 
camp,  castra,  drum,  n.  pi. 
can,  possum,  posse,  potul ;  can  not  but, 

facer  e  non  possum  quln,  w.  subj. 

LATIN   PROSE  COMP. —  l6 


capture,  capio,  capere,  cepi,  captus. 

care,  cura,  ae,  f. 

care  f  Ql,pro  video,  ere,  vidi,  msus,  w.  dat. 

carefully,  diligenter,  adv. 

Catiline,  Catillna,  ae,  m. 

cattle,  pecus,  oris,  n. 

cause,  causa,  ae,  f. 

cavalry,  equitdtus,  us,  m.;  eques,  itis, 
m.  (pi.). 

cease,  desino,  ere,  ivl  or  it,  itus. 

certainly,  certe,  adv. 

children,  liberl,  drum,  m.  pi. 

choose,  aeligo,  ere,  legl,  lectus. 

Cicero,  Cicero,  onis,  m. 

citizen,  civis,  is,  m.  and  f. 

city,  urbs,  urbis,  f. 

collect,  colligo,  ligere,  legi,  lectus. 

come,  venid,  ire,  veni,  ventus. 

command,  impero,  are,  dvi,  dtus,  w. 
dat.;  iubed,  ere,  iussl,  iussus ;  be  in 
command  of,  praesum,  esse,  fui. 

commander,  imperdtor,  oris,  m. 

companion,  ally,  socius,  i,  m.;  comes, 
itis,  m.  and  f. 

compare,  comparo,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

compel,  cdgd,  ere,  coegt,  codctus ;  com- 
pello,  ere,  pull,  pulsus. 

complain,  complain  of,  queror,  t, 
questus  sum. 

conceal,  celo,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

conquer,  vinco,  ere,  vicT,  victus. 

conspiracy,  coniurdtw,  onis,  f. 

conspirators,  coniurdfi,  drum,  m.  pi. 

consul,  consul,  ulis,  m. 

consult,  consulo,  ere,  consulu'i,  consul- 
tits,  w.  ace.;  w.  dat.,  consult  for, 
consult  the  interests  of. 

contain.    See  hold. 

control,  imperittbi,  i,  n. 

converse,  colloquor,  loqui,  lociitus  sum. 

convince.     See  persuade. 


242 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


Corinth,  Corinthus,  i,  f. 
country,  terra,  ae,  f.,  LAND,  EARTH, 
COUNTRY ;    patria,   ae,    f.,   NATIVE 

COUNTRY,  FATHERLAND  J    rus,  riiris, 

n.,  COUNTRY  as  opposed  to  city ; 
into  the  country,  rus ;  in  the  coun- 
try, riiri. 

courage,  bravery,  virtus,  utis,  f. ; 
auddcia,  ae,  f. 

covetous,  avidus,  a,  urn. 

cowardly,  igndvus,  a,  um. 

Crassus,  Crassus,  i,  m. 

crime,  scelus,  ens,  n. 

critical  point,  crisis,  discrimen,  inis,  n. 

cross,  transed,  Ire,  ivi  or  it,  itus. 

cruel,  crfidelis,  e. 


danger,  periculum,  t,  n. 

dare,  audeo,  ere,  ausus  sum. 

day,  dies,  ei,  m.  and  f.;  to-day, hodie ; 
yesterday,  hesternd  die. 

dear,  car  us,  a,  um. 

death,  mors,  mortis,  f.;  put  to  death, 
need,  are,  dvi,  dtus. . 

decree,  aecernd,  ere,  crevi,  cretus  ;  de- 
cree of  the  senate,  sendtus  consul- 
turn,  i,  n. 

deed,  factum,  i,  n. 

deep,  altus,  a,  um. 

defeat,  conquer,  vincd,  ere,  vici,  victus. 

defend,  defendo,  ere,  fendi,  fensus. 

defendant,  reus,  i,  m. 

delay,  moror,  art,  dtus  sum. 

deliberate,  dellbero,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

demand,  postulo,  are,  dvi,  dtus.     See 

IS- 

democrats,  populdres,  ium,  m. 
denies,  says  not,  nego,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
depart,  discedo,  ere,  cessi,  cessurus  ;  de- 

cedo,  ere,  cessi,  cessilrus. 


deprive,  eripio,  ripere,  ripui,  reptus ; 

privo,  are,  dvi,  dtus;  be  deprived 

of,    lack,    cared,    ere,     ui,    itiirus. 

See  39. 

depth,  altitudo,  inis,  f. 
desert,  abandon,  forsake,  aesero,  serere, 

ser'ui,  sertus.     See  abandon, 
desire,  void,  velle,  volui. 
destroy,  deled,  ere,  evi,  etus. 
destruction,  exitium,  i,  n.,  A  GOING 

OUT,  GOING  TO  NOUGHT,  RUIN  ;    in- 

teritus,  us,  m.,  A  GOING  AMONG 
things  so  as  to  be  no  longer  seen, 

BECOMING  LOST,  GOING  TO  RUIN  ; 
pernides,  ei,  f.,  KILLING  UTTERLY, 
SLAUGHTER,  OVERTHROW,  DESTRUC- 
TION ;  inter necio,  onis,  f.,  destruc- 
tion, ANNIHILATION. 

determine,  constitud,  ere,  ui,  utus. 

devastate,  vastd,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

die,  morior,  mori,  mortuus  siim. 

differ,  differo,  differre,  distuli,  dlld- 
tus. 

difficult,  difficilis,  e. 

diligently,  diligenter,  adv. 

diminish,  aeminud,  ere,  aeminui,  de- 
mi  nfitus. 

direction,  pars,  partis,  f. 

disaster,  calamitds,  dtis,  f. 

disclose.     See  expose. 

disregard,  neglect  (advice),  omittd, 
mittere,  mist,  missus. 

district,  territory,  field,  ager,  agri,  m. 

do,  facid,  facere,  fed,  factus. 

doubt,  dubitd,  are,  dvi,  dtus  ;  there  is 
no  doubt  that,  non  est  dubium  quin, 
w.  subj. 

doubtful,  dubius,  a,  um. 

drive  away,  aepelld,  ere,  aepuli,  depul- 
sus ;  drive  out,  expelld,  ere,  expuli, 
expulsus  ;  eicid,  ere,  eieci,  eiectus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


243 


duty,  officium,  T,  n. 

dwell,    dwell    in,    incolo,    ere,    colm, 

cultus ;  inhabito,  I. 
dwelling,  domidlium,  i,  n. 

E 

each,  quisque. 

each  other.     See  68. 

eagerly,  cupide,  adv. 

earth,   orbis  terrdrum,  orbis  terrae ; 

or  bis,  is,  m. 
easily,  facile,  adv. 
easy,  facilis,  e,  adj. 
either  .  .  .  or,  out .  .  .  aut,  vel .  .  .  vel. 
elect,  creo,  are,  dvi,  dins. 
embassy,  legdtio,  onis,  f. 
emigrate  =  go  out  from  territory, 
enable,  efficio,  ere,  fed,  fee  f  us. 
encourage,  cohortor,    art,  dtus   sum, 

EXHORT,        ANIMATE,       ADMONISH  ; 

consolor,  art,   dtus  sum,   COMFORT 

GREATLY,  CHEER. 

end,//>m,  is,  m. 

enemy,  hostis,  is.  m.  and  f.,  AN  EN- 
EMY OF  ONE'S  COUNTRY,  inimtcus,  J, 

m.,  A  PERSONAL  ENEMY. 

engage.     See  fight. 

enjoy,  fruor,  fruT,  fructus  sum  ;  en- 
joy, use,  iitor,  iifi,  iisus.  See  44. 

enjoyment,  fructtis,  us,  m. 

enough,  satis. 

especially,  praesertim,  adv. 

establish,  constitud,  ere,  ui,  iitus. 

Europe,  Europa,  ae,  f. 

even  if,  etiam  si. 

ever,  semper,  ALWAYS  ;  uniquam  (un- 
quani),  AT  ANY  TIME. 

every,  each,  quisque ;  everyone,  quis- 
que, quaeque,  quodqne  (quicqiee, 
qtiictque). 

evidence,  indicium,  T,  n. 


except,  praeter,  prep.  w.  ace. 
exchange,  inter,  and  reflex,  pronoun, 

do,  dare,  dedT,  datus. 
execute,  perform,  adminislro,  are,  dm, 

dtus. 

exhort,  cohortor,  art,  dtus  sum. 
exile,  exsilium,  t,  n. 
expect,  hope  for,  spero,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
expose,  bring  to  light,  patefacio,  ere, 

feel,  factus ;    expose    (to    danger), 

offero,  offerre,  obtrili,  obldtus. 
eye,  oculus,  i,  m. 


fact,  res,  rei,  f. 

faithful, jft/i/if,  e. 

fair,  pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchrum. 

fa.me,gtorta,  ae,  f. 

family  (i.e.  stock),  genus,  eris,  n.; 
gens,  ntis,  f. 

famous,  cldrus,  a,  Tim. 

far,  longe,  adv. 

farmer,  agricola,  ae,  m. 

father,  paler,  patris,  m. 

fault,  culpa,  ae,  {.. 

fear,  timor,  oris,  m.;  metus,  us,  m.; 
to  fear,  -vereor,  erl,  itus  sum  ;  timed, 
ere,  ui ;  metud,  ere,  metui,  metutus. 

feel  thankful,  gratiam  habeo,  ere,  ui, 
itus. 

fellow  =  man,  sometimes  by  ille. 

fellow-citizen,  civis,  is,  m. 

fertile,  oplmus,  a,  um  ;  fertilis,  e. 

few,  pauci,  ae,  a. 

field,  ager,  agrT,  m.;  in  the  field,  mili- 
tiae  (loc.  case). 

fifteen,  quindecim,  indecl. 

fifty,  quinquaginta,  indecl. 

fight,  pugno,  are,  avl,  dtus,  used  im- 
personally in  the  passive  ;  e.g.  pug- 
ndtum,  it  is  fought,  they  fight. 


244 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


find,  invenio,  ire,  veni,  ventus,  COME 
UPON,  DISCOVER;  reperio,  ire,  reperl 
and  repperi,  repertus,  MEET  WITH, 
FIND  OUT;  cognosce,  ere,  cognovi,  cog- 

nitus,   BECOME    ACQUAINTED    WITH, 
LEARN,  KNOW. 

finish,  conficio,  ficere,  fed,  fectus. 

first,  primus,  a,  um. 

fit,  fitted,  aplus,  a,   um ;  idoneus,  a, 

um. 

five,  quinque,  indecl. 
flee ,  fugio,  fugere,  ffigi,  fugitus  ;  terga 

verto,  ere,  verti,  versus. 
fleet,  classis,  is,  f. 
flight,  fuga,  ae,  f.;   put  to  flight,  in 

fugam  do,  dare,  dedi,  datus  ;  fugo, 

are,  dm,  dtus. 

flow,y?«<?,  ere,Jluxi,Jluxus. 
follow,  follow  close  after,  subsequor, 

i,  seciitus  sum. 

following,  posterus,  a,  um.    See  59.  3. 
foolish,  stupid,  dmens,  gen.  dmentis  ; 

stultus,  a,  um. 
foot,  pes,  pedis,  m. 
for,  pro,  prep.  w.  abl.;   nam,  conj.; 

for  a  long  time,  now  for  a  long  time, 

iam  diil,  iam  dildum.     See  102.  3; 

103.  2. 

for  the  future,  in  reliquum  tempus. 
for  the  most  part,  mdximam  partem. 
for  the  sake  of,  causa,  abl.  and  placed 

after  its  limiting  gen. 
force,  vis,  vis,  f.;   force,  band,  mantis, 

us,  f.;   forces,  troops,  copiae,  drum, 

f.  pi. 

foresight,  prudentia,  ae,  f. 
forest,  silva,  ae,  f. 
forget,  oblivlscor,  i,  oblltus  sum. 
form,  make,y««'0,  facer e,  feel,  factus  ; 

form,  draw  up,  instruo,  ere,  struxl, 

structus. 


former,  ille. 

fortifications,  moenia,  ium,  n. 

fortify,  miinio,  Ire,  ivl,  itus. 

found,  build  (a  city),  condo,  ere,  con- 

didi,  conditus. 
four,,  quatluor,  indecl. 
free,  set  free,  llbero,  are,  dvi,  dlus  ; 

free,  liber,  llbera,  llberum. 
friend,  amlcus,  i,  m. 
frighten   thoroughly,  perterreo,  ere, 

ul,  itus. 
from,  out   of,    e,  ex,    prep.   w.    abl.; 

from,  away  from,  from  near,  d,  ab, 

abs,  prep.  w.  abl.;   de,  down  from, 
front,  first,  primus,  a,  um. 
full,  plemis,  a,  um. 


gate,  porta,  ae,  f. 

gather,  come  together,  convenio,  ire, 

vent,  ventus. 
Gaul,  Gallia,  ae,  f. 
Gauls,  Galli,  drum,  m.  pi. 
general,    imperdtor,    or  is,   m.;     dux, 

ducis,  m.  and  f. 
German,  Germdnus,  a,  um. 
Germans,  German^,  drum,  m.  pi. 
Germany,  Germdnia,  ae,  f. 
get  a  firm  footing,~Jirmtter  tnsisto, 

ere,  stiti,  — . 
get  possession  of,  potior,  potlri,  po- 

fitus  sum. 

get  together.     See  collect, 
gift,  donum,  i,  n. 
girl,  puella,  ae,  f. 
give,   do,    dare,    dedi,    datum;    give 

back,  reddo,  ere,  reddidl,  redditus ; 

give    up,    abicio,  icere,   eci,  iectus ; 

give  up,  desist  from,  desisto,  sistere, 

stiti,  stitiirus. 
glad,  laetus,  a,  um. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


245 


glory,  gloria,  ae,  f. 

go,  eo,  Ire,  tvi,  itus ;  go  back,  redes, 
red  ire,  redii,  redilus ;  go  to,  visit, 
adeo,  ad  ire,  adtvl  or  adil,  aditus. 

god,  deus,  del,  m. 

good,  bonus,  a,  ttm. 

government,  imperium,  t,  n. 

grain,  frumentum,  t,  n. 

grant,  do,  dare,  dedi,  datus. 

great,  magnus,  a,  urn ;  how  great, 
quantus,  a,  um. 

greedy,  azndus,  a,  um  ;  cupidus,  a,  um. 


handwriting,  manus,  us,  f. 

happens,  it  happens,  comes  to  pass, 
the  result  is,  accidit,  isse  ;  contingit, 
contigisse,  contigit ;  Jit,  fieri,  factum 
est ;  these  verbs  are  often  used  with 
a  substantive  clause  as  subject. 

happy,  bedtus,  a,  um. 

harass,  lacesso,  cessere,  cesswi  or  il, 
cessttus. 

hardly,  vix,  adv. 

harm,  detrimentum,  t,  n. 

hasten,  make  haste,  mature,  are,  dvi, 
dtus, 

hate,  odl,  odisse,  perf.  with  pres. 
meaning. 

haul,  draw,  diicd,  ducere,  duxl,  ductus  ; 
traho,  ere,  trdxi,  tractus. 

have,  habeo,  ere,  ui,  itus. 

he,  she,  it,  is,  ea,  id. 

hear,  audio,  ire,  ivi,  itus. 

height,  depth,  altitude,  inis,  f. 

help,  succurro,  ere,  succurri,  succur- 
sus ;  ittvo,  are,  iilvi,  iiltiis. 

here,  hie,  adv.  ;   to  be  here,  adsum. 

hesitate,  dubito,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 

high,  deep,  altus,  a,  um. 

highest,  summits,  a,  um. 


hill,  collis,  is,  m. 

himself,  herself,  itself.     See  66. 

hinder,      impedid,      Ire,      tm,      itus, 

ENTANGLE,  EMBARRASS,  HINDER ; 
reprimo,  ere,  pressT,  pressus,  PRESS 
BACK,  KEEP  BACK,  RESTRAIN,  HIN- 
DER. 

hindrance,  impedlmentum,  i,  n. 

his,  her,  its,  suits,  a,  um,  when  refer- 
ring to  the  same  person  or  thing  as 
the  subject  of  its  sentence,  other- 
wise eius.  See  67. 

hitherto,  adkiic,  adv. 

hold,  tened,  ere,  uT,  tentus. 

home,  homeward,  domum  ;  at  home, 
do  ml. 

hope,  spes,  speT,  f.;  to  hope,  spero, 
are,  dvi,  dtus. 

horse,  equus,  T,  m. 

hostage,  obses,  obsidis,  m.  and  f. 

hour,  hora,  ae,  f. 

house,  domus,  t  (fts),  f.,  the  generic 
word;  ftctum,  i,  n.,  that  which 
covers,  THE  ROOF,  by  metonymy, 
HOUSE;  at  the  house  of,  0/w^and 
ad,  preps,  w.  ace. 

how  great,  quantus,  a,  um. 

how  many,  quot,  indecl.  adj.;  quam 
multi,  ae,  a. 

hundred,  centum,  indecl. 

hurl,  conicio,  icere,  ieci,  iectus. 


I,  ego.     See  64. 

if,  si,  conj.;   if  only,  modo,  dum,  dum 

modo,  conjs. 

ignorant,  Tgnarus,  a,  um. 
illustrious,  clarus,  a,  um. 
implore,  invoke,  call  upon,  voco,  are, 

dvi,  dtus. 
important.     See  29. 


246 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


in,  in,  prep.  w.  abl. 

in  the  vicinity  of,  ad,  prep.  w.  ace. 

inactivity,  inertia,  ae,  f. 

incite,  inflammo,  are,  dvi,  at  us. 

indeed,  at  least,  quidem,  adv. ;  placed 
immediately  after  the  emphatic 
word. 

infantry,  pedites,  urn,  m.  pi.;  pedita- 
tus,  its,  m. 

inflict  punishment,  supplicium  sumo, 
ere,  sumpsi,  silmptus  ;  to  inflict  p'un- 
ishment  on  a  soldier,  de  milile  sup- 
plicium siimere  ;  infero,  ferre,  tuli, 
latus. 

influence,  auctoritds,  dtis,  f.;  have  in- 
fluence, exert  influence,  valeo,  ere, 
til,  itiirus. 

inform  any  one,  aliquem  certiorem 
facto,  facere,  fed,  factus ;  be  in- 
formed, certior,  fit),  fieri,  factus 
sum. 

inhabitant,  incola,  ae,  m. 

injure,  harm,  noceo,  ere,  ui,  iturus. 

inquire,  quaero,  ere,  quaesiv7,  quaeslttis. 

intend,  esse  in  animo,  and  dat. 

intercessor,  deprecdtor,  oris,  m. 

interest,  inter  sum,  esse,  fuT,  futiirus  ; 
used  impersonally.  See  28. 

interview,  conference,  colloquium,  i,  n. 

into,  in,  prep.  w.  ace.  ' 

invade,  ingredior,  i,  ingressus. 

invite,  send  for,  arcesso,  ere,  arcessivi, 
arcessitus  ;  invitd,  are,  dm,  dtus. 

island,  tnsula,  ae,  f. 

it,  is,  ea,  id. 

Italy,  Italia,  ae,  f. 


join  battle,  proelium  committo,  ere, 
mist,  missus;  join  together,  unite, 
conitingo,  ere,  iunxt,  iunctus. 


journey,  iter,  itineris,  n.  ;  to  journey, 
iter  facio,  facere,  feet,  factus. 

judge,  index,  iildicis,  m.;  iudico,  are, 
d-vi,  dtus. 

just,  aequus,  a,  urn. 

justice,  aequitds,  dtis,  f. 

justly,  hire,  abl.  of  manner. 


keep,  hold,  habeo,  ere,  ta,  itus ;  keep, 
restrain,  confined,  ere,  ui,  tentum. 

kill,  interficio,  ficere,  feel,  feet  us. 

king,  rex,  rcgis,  m. 

know,  know  how,  scio,  scire,  stivi, 
scltus ;  nosed',  ere,  novi,  notus.  See 
106;  not  know,  nescio,  ire,  ivl,  — . 


Labienus,  Ldbienus,  i,  m. 

land,  terra,  ae,  f. 

large,  magnus,  a,  um. 

lasting,  perpetuus,  a,  um. 

lately,  ml  per,  -adv. 

latter,  hie. 

law,  lex,  legis,  f. 

lay  before,  report,  defero,  deferre,  de- 
tuli,  ae  latus ;  lay  waste,  vasto,  are, 
dvi,  dtus. 

laziness,  pigritia,  ae,  f. 

lazy,  piger,  pigra,  pigrum. 

lead,  diico,  ere,  diixi,  ductus ;  lead 
across,  trddiico,  ere,  duxi,  ductus ; 
lead  down,  dediico,  ere,  diixi,  ductus  ; 
lead  out,  edtlcd,  ere,  dilxi,  duc- 
tus;  lead  to,  addilco,  ere,  dilxi, 
ductus. 

leader,  dux,  ducts,  m.  and  f. 

learn,  cognosce,  ere,  cognom,  cognitus. 

leave  behind,  leave,  relinquo,  ere, 
liqui,  lictus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY 


247 


leave   Off,    cease,    desino,  ere,  desivi, 

desitus. 
left,  sinister,  sinistra,  sinistrum.    See 

.remaining, 
legate,  Icgdtus,  f,  m. 
legion,  legid,  onis,  f. 
leisure,  otium,  i,  n. 
less,  minor,  minus  ;  gen.  minor  is. 
lessen,  levo,  are,  dm,  dtus. 
letter,  litterae,  drum,  f.  pi.;    epistula, 

ae,i. 

liberality,  llberdlitas,  dtis.  f. 
liberty,  libertds,  dtis,  f. 
lieutenant,  legdtus,  t,  m. 
life,  vita,  ae,  f. 
light,  daylight,  lux,  lucis,  f. 
like,  similis,  e ;  like,  wish,  void,  velle, 

volui. 

line,  line  of  battle,  aci'es,  et,  f. 
linger  around.     See  remain, 
little,  parvus,  a,  urn;  too  little,  pa- 
ruin,  adv. 
live,    vivo,    ere,    vtxi,    victus  ;    vltam 

dego,  ere,  dcgl,  — . 

long,  long  for,  desire  eagerly,  cupio, 
.     cupere,  cuplvl  or  cupii,  cup~itus. 
long,  a  long  time,  longer,  longest,  diu, 

dintius,  difitissime,  adv. 
long,  longus,  a,  um  ;  long,  as  long  as. 

See  while. 

long  since,  iam  pndem,  adv. 
look  at,  intueor,  eri,  intuitus  sum. 
love,    amor,   oris,  m.;   to  love,   anib, 

are,  dvi,  dtus. 


cid,  facer  e,  fed,  fact  us  ;  make 
an  assault.  See  assault;  make  re- 
quital, gratiam  refero,  referre,  reltuli, 
reldtus.  —  I  shall  requite  you,  tibi 
gratiam  referam  ;  make  upon,  in- 


fer o,  inferre,  intuit,  Hiatus.  —  to 
make  war  upon  the  Gauls,  Gallls 
belhtm  inferre ;  make  use  of,  utor, 
utl,  iisus  sum. 

man,  vir,  virl,  m.,  A  MAN  as  distin- 
guished from  a  woman;  homo,  inis, 
m.  and  f.,  MAN,  A  HUMAN  BEING. 

many,  multl,  ae,  a  ;  many  times,  saepe. 

march,  Her,  itineris,  n.;  to  march, 
iter  /ado,  fa  cere,  fed,  factus. 

marry  (of  a  man),  in  mdtrimonium 
duco  ;  (of  a  woman),  ml  bo,  nitbere, 
nflpsi,  nilptus. 

may.     See  118,  119. 

meantime,  in  the  meantime,  interim, 
intered,  advs. 

meditate.    See  think  about. 

meet,  to  meet,  se  ofrvium  ferre  ;  you 
met  me,  mihi  te  obvium  tulisti ;  go 
to  meet,  obviam  (or  obvius,  a,  um} 
eo,  ire,  ivi,  itus,  w.  dat. ;  meet  with, 
invenio,  ire,  vetii,  ventus,  w.  ace. 

memory,  memoria,  ae,  f. 

messenger,  nilntius,  t,  m. 

method,  ratio,  onis,  f. 

middle,  middle  of,  medius,  a,  um. 

mile,  mille  passuum. 

military  affairs,  r'es_  militdris,  rei 
militdris. 

mind,  wens,  mentis,  f.,  UNDERSTAND- 
ING, INTELLECT,  REASON;  animus, 

l,  m.,  WILL,  DESIRE,  PURPOSE;  FEEL- 
ING, AFFECTION,  SENTIMENT. 

mistake,  be  misunderstood,  erro,  are, 

dvi,  dtus. 

money,  pecnnia,  ae,  f. 
v^QlQ,plfis,plnris,  n.;    amplius,  magis, 

advs. 

mother,  mdter,  mdtris,  f. 
mountain,  mons,  mantis,  m. 
mourn,  liigeo,  ere,  lilxi,  luctus. 


248 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


move,  moved,  movcre,  movi,  mdtus. 
much,  mullus,  a,  um. 
multitude,  multitiidd,  inis,  f. 
must.     See  in. 
my,  meus,  a,  um. 

N 
name,  nomen,  ndminis,  n.;   to  name. 

See  call, 
narrow,  contracted,  small,  parvus,  a, 

um  ;  narrow  limits,  angustiae,  drum, 

f.  pi.;    angustus,  a,  um. 
nature,  ndtiira,  ae,  f. 
near,  pr ope,  fere,  advs. 
nearest,  proximus,  a,  um. 
nearly,  paene,  adv. 
need,  opjis,  indecl.  n.,  iisus,  us,  m. 
need,  egeo  or  indiged,  ere,  u~,  — . 
negligence,  nequitia,  ae,  f. 
neighborhood,   in  the  neighborhood 

of,  ad,  prep.  w.  ace. 
neighbors,  finitimi,   drtim,   m.   pi.; 

vicinus,  i,  m. 
neither  .  .  .  nor,  neque  .  .  .  neque,  nee 

.  .  .  nee. 

never,  numquam  {nunquani),  adv. 
nevertheless,  yet,  still,  tamen ;   ni- 

hild  minus,  advs. 
new,  novus,  a,  ^tln. 
nick  of  time,  discrimen,  inis,  n. 
night,  nox,  noctis,  f.;    night  before, 

nox  superior. 

no,  nullus,  a,  Tim.     See  81. 
nobody,  no  one,  nemo,  gen.  and  dat. 

supplied  from  nullus. 
not,  ndn,  ne,  adv.;    not  even,  ne  .  .  . 

quidem,  w.  the  emphatic  word  be- 
tween ne  and  quidem. 
not  only  .  .  .  but  also,  non  sdlum  .  .  . 

sed  etiam. 
not  yet,  ndndum,  adv. 


nothing,  nihil,  indecl. 
now,  nunc,  iam,  advs. 
numerous,  creber,  ere  bra,  crebrum. 

0 

oath;  ms  iiirandum,  iilris  iurandi,  n. 

Obey,  pared,  ere,  uT,  — . 

Occupy,  occupo,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

officer,  legdtus,  i,  m. 

Often,  saepe,  adv. 

old,  senex,  gen.  senis ;  old,  having 
been  born,  ndtus,  a,  um ;  he  is 
twenty  years  old,  vlginfi  annos  nd- 
tus est. 

On,  in,  prep.  w.  ace.  after  verbs  of  mo- 
tion, w.  abl.  after  verbs  of  rest. 

on  this  side  of,  cis,  prep.  w.  ace. 

once,  at  once,  statim,  adv. 

one,  iinus,  a,  um. 

one  another.     See  68. 

one  by  one,  singuli,  ae,  a. 

opinion,    sententia,    ae,    f.,  OPINION, 

DECISION,      SENTENCE,     JUDGMENT  ; 

opinio,  onis,  f.,  OPINION,  SUPPOSI- 
TION, REPUTATION,  BELIEF. 

opportunity,  potestds,  dtis,  f. 

opposite,  adversus,  a,  um. 

or,  aut ;  in  double  questions,  an;  or 
not,  in  direct  double  questions,  an 
non;  in  indirect  double  questions, 
necne.  See  80. 

Order,  in  order  that,  ut,  conj.  See 
144. 

order,  by  order,  iussu,  abl.  sing.  m. 

Order,  command,  tubed,  ere,  iussi,  iits- 
sus  ;  imperd,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

ordinary,  mediocris,  e. 

other,  some  .  .  .  others,  alii  .  .  . 
alii. 

Ought,  debed,  ere,  ut,  itus ;  debeo  de- 
notes a  moral  obligation.  See  in. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


249 


our,  nosier,  nostra,  nostrum. 
overcome,  superd,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
own.     See  69. 


pardon,  ignoscd,  ere,  igndvi,  ignotus  ; 

pardon   for   sake  of,   conddnd,  are, 

dvi,  dtus. 

parent,  parens,  ends,  c. 
part,  pars,  partis,  f. 
patience,  patientia,  ae,  f. 
patriotic,  bonus,  a,  urn;  amans   ret 

piiblicae. 
pay,  pendo,  ere,  pependi,  pensus  ;  pay 

one's    respects,     salutd,    are,     dm, 

dtwn. 

peace,  pax,  pads,  f. 
perfect,  perfectus,  a,  urn. 
perform,  fungor,  fungi,  functus  sum, 

EXECUTE,      DISCHARGE,       OBSERVE  ; 

gerd,    ere,   gessT,   gestus,     MANAGE, 

WAGE,    TRANSACT,    ACCOMPLISH. 

peril,  pericuhitn,  i,  n. 

perilous,  periculdsus,  a,  um. 

perish,  pereo,  Ire,  ii,  itus. 

permit,  allow,  suffer,  patior,  pati,  pas- 

sus  sum. 

persist,  perseverd,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
persuade,  persuaded,   suddere,  sudsi, 

sudsus. 
pity,     miseret,     miserere,      miseruit. 

See  27. 
place,  locus,  i,  m. ;   pi.  loci  and  loca, 

locdrum,  m.  and  n. 
plan,  cdnsilium,  T,  n.,  DETERMINATION, 

RESOLUTION,  PURPOSE  ;   ratio,  onis, 

f.,  COURSE,  MANNER,  METHOD,  FASH- 
ION. 

please,  delecto,  dre,  dvi,  dtus,  w.  ace. ; 

placed,  ere,  uT,  itus,  w.  dat. 
pleasing,  grdtus,  a,  um. 


pleasure,  delectatio,  onis,  f. 

pledge, yW?.y,  ei,  f. 

plunder,  pillage,  diripio,  ere,  ui,  rep- 

tus. 

pole,  long  pole,  longurius,  i,  m. 
poor,  pauper,  gen.  patiperis. 
possession,  possessio,  onis,   f. ;    often 
expressed  by  neuter  plural;  e.g.  him- 
self and  his  possessions,  se  suaque  ; 
take  possession  of,  occupo,  dre,  dvi, 
dtus,  w.  ace. ;    get  possession    of, 
potior,  irl,  itus  sum. 

power,  bodily  strength,  vis,  vis,  f.  (pi. 
vires) . 

powerful,  potens,  gen.  potentis  ;  pow- 
erful, to  be  very  power {\A,  pliirimum 
posse,  or  valere. 

practically  acquainted  with,  perl- 
tus,  a,  um,  w.  gen. 

praetor,  praetor,  oris,  m. 

praise,  laus,  laudis,  f.;  to  praise, 
laudo,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 

prefer,  maid,  mdlle,  mdlui. 

prepare,  paro,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 

present,  be  present,  adsum,  adesset 
adfuT. 

preserve,  conserve,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 

prevent,  deterred,  ere,  ui,  itus ;  pro- 
hibed,  ere,  ui,  itus. 

price,  pretium,  t,  n. 

prisoner,  reus,  i,  m. 

promise,  polliceor,  eri,  pollicitus  sum. 

proper,  idoneus,  a,  um. 

property,  res,  rerum,  f.  pi.;  bona, 
drum,  n.  pi. 

prosperity,  secundidres  res. 

provided  that,  modo,  dum,  dum  modo, 
conjs.  See  172. 

province,  provinda,  ae,  f. 

provision,  make  provision,  provided, 
ere,  vidi,  visus. 


250 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


prudence,  prfldentia,  ae,  f. 

punish,  piinid,  ire,  ivT,  itus. 

punishment,  supplicium,  i,  n.;  to 
inflict  punishment  upon  any  one,  de 
aliqud  supplicium  sumo,  ere,  sumpsl, 
silmptum ;  to  suffer  punishment, 
poends  persolvd,  ere,  solvi,  soliltus  ; 
supplicium  do,  I. 

purpose,  for  the  purpose  of,  causa, 
abl.  of  cause  and  stands  after  its 
limiting  genitive. 

put  in  charge  of,  praef-cid,  ere,  feci, 
fectus. 

put  to  death,  need,  are,  dvi,  dtum. 

put  to  flight,  infugam  do,  dare,  dedi, 
datus ;  fugo,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 


quarrel,  dissentio,  onis,  f. 
question,  quaestio,  onis,  f. 
quickly,  celeriter,  adv. 

R 

rank,  line  of  battle,  acies,  el,  f. 

rapidly,  celeriter,  adv. 

rather,  more,  magis,  adv. 

read,  lego,  ere,  leg!,  lectus. 

ready,  pardtus,  a,   um ;    get   ready, 

compard,  are,  am,  dtus, 
rear,  novissimum  agmen.    • 
reason,  cause,  causa,  ae,  f. 
recall,  revocd,  are,  dm,  dtus. 
receive,  accipio,  cipere,  cepi,  ceptus. 
recommend,   urge,   hortor,   dri,   dtus 

sum  ;  cohortor. 

redoubt,  fortress,  castellum,  I,  n. 
refrain,  temper  d,  are,  dm,  dtus,  w.  dat. 

of  reflexive  pronoun;   abstined,  ere, 

ui,  tentus. 
refuse,  recfisd,  are,  dm,  dtus;    negd, 

are,  dm,  dtus. 


regard,  duco,  ere,  cfuxi,  ductus. 

reign,  regnd,  are,  dm,  dtus. 

relieve,  liberd,  are,  dm,  dtus. 

remain,  stay,  remaned,  ere,  mdnsi, 
mdnsiirus. 

remaining,  reliquus,  a,  um. 

remember,  memim,  meminisse ;  remi- 
niscor,  t,  — . 

remind,  admoneo,  ere,  ui,  itus. 

renew,  redintegro,  are,  dm,  dtus. 

repent,  paenitet,  ere,  paenituit. 

reply,  responded,  ere,  spondl,  sponsus. 

rescue,  eripio,  eripere,  eripm,  erep- 
tus. 

residence,  domicilium,  J,  n. 

resources,  ops,   opis,   f.  pi.;    aid  (in 
sing.). 

rest  of,  reliquus,  a,  um ;  the  rest, 
ceteri,  ae,  a. 

restrain,  reprimd,  ere,  presst,  pressus ; 
retineo,  ere,  tinui,  tentus. 

retain,  hold,  teneo,  ere,  ul,  tentus. 

return,  revertor,  t,  versus  sum;  re- 
verto,  ere,  revertl ;  the  present,  im- 
perfect, and  future  tenses  have  the 
passive  form;  reded,  ire,  ii,  itus; 
reddd,  ere,  redidl,  reditus  (trans.}. 

revolt,  rebellid,  onis,  f. 

revolution,  new  form  of  government, 
nova  imperia  (n.  pi.),  res  novae. 

Rhine,  Rh'enus,  I,  m. 

rich,  dives,  itis  ;  locuples,  etis,  adjs. 

rigging,  f  fines,  ium,  m. 

right,  ins,  iuris,  n.;  dexter,  dextra, 
dextrum,  adj. 

river,  flumen,  flilminis,  n. 

road,  via,  ae,  f. ;    iter,  itineris,  n. 

rock,  saxum,  I,  n. 

Roman,  Rdmdnus,  a,  um. 

Rome,  Roma,  ae,  f. 

route,  fugo,  are,  dm,  dtus. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


251 


rule,  regnum,  i,  n.;  imperium,  i,  n. ; 
rego,  regere,  rexi,  rectus  ;  rule  over, 
impero,  are,  dvi,  dtus,  w.  dat. 

run,  curro,  ere,  cucurri,  cursus. 


safe,  tutus,  a,  urn,  WELL  GUARDED, 

SECURE,  OUT  OF  DANGER  ;    salvus,  a, 

um,  incolumis,  e,  UNHARMED,  UN- 
INJURED, WELL,  SOUND. 

safety,  salus,  iiiis,  f. 

sake,  for  the  sake  of,  causa. 

same,  the  same,  idem,  eadem,  idem. 

save,  servo,  are,  dm,  dtus ;  conserve, 
dre,  dvi,  dtus ;  conserve  is  servo  in- 
tensified by  the  prefix  con  and  prop- 
erly signifies  KEEP  THOROUGHLY, 

SAVE  COMPLETELY. 

say,  aico,  aicere,  dixi,  dictus ;  say  not, 

nego,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 
scatter,  rout,  fugo,  dre,  dvi,  dtus. 
scheme.     See  plan, 
sea,  mare,  maris,  n. 
seal,  signum,  i,  n. 
see,  video,  ere,  vidi,  visus. 
seek,  peto,  ere,  petivi,  petitus. 
seem,  videor,  eri,  visus  sum. 
seize,  occupo,   dre,  dvi,   dtus ;    capio, 

ere,  cepi,  captus ;   comprehendo,  ere, 

comprehendl,  comprehcnsus. 
self,  ipse,  a,  um. 

sell,  vend?,  ere,  vendidi,  venditus. 
senate,  senator,  oris,  m. 
send,  mitto,  ere,  niisi,  missus. 
Sequani,  Sequarii,  drum,  m.  pi. 
set  fire  to,  incendo,  ere,  cendi,  census. 
set  Out,  march,  depart,  projiciscor,  T, 

profectus  sum. 
several.     See  many, 
severe,  gravis,  e. 
she,  generally  omitted.     See  64. 


shield,  scutum,  T,  n. 

ship,  ndvis,  is,  f. 

short,  brevis,  e. 

show,  doceo,  ere,  ui,  doctus. 

shudder  at,  horreo,  ere,  no  perf.,  nor 

sup.,  governs  ace. 
sick,  aeger,  aegra,  aegrum. 
side,  on  this  side  of,  cis,  prep.  w.  ace. 
signal,  signum,  i,  n. 
silent,  keep  silent,  taceo,  ere,  tti,  itum. 
since,  cum,  quoniam,  conjs.     See  87. 
sister,  soror,  oris,  f. 
sit,  be  seated,  sedeo,  ere,  seal,  sessus. 
six,  sex,  indecl. 
sixteen,  sedecim,  indecl. 
size,  magnitude,  inis,  f. 
skillful,  practically  acquainted  with, 

perltus,  a,  um. 

slaughter,  occido,  ere,  cidi,  cisus. 
slave,  servus,  i,  m. 
slay,  kill,  inter jicio,  ere,  JecT,  fectus. 
small,  parvus,  a,  um. 
SO,  tain,  ita,  sic,  advs.;   so  great,  tan- 

tus,  a,  um. 

soldier,  miles,  militis,  m. 
some  one,  something,  some,  aliquis, 

quidam,  nescio  quis. 
some  .  .  .    others,  alii  .  .  .  alii. 
SQTL,  filius,  i,  m. 
soon,  as  soon  as  possible,  quam  pri- 

mum. 
speak,  loquor,,  T,  lociitus   sum  ;    dico, 

ere,  dixi,  dictus. 
stand,  sto,  stare,  steti,  status. 
start  out  for.     See  set  out. 
state,  res  publica,  rei publicae,  f. 
stay,  remaned,  ere,  mansi,  mansurus. 
still,  etiam  mine,  tauten,  advs. 
storm,    exptigno,    dre,   dvi,    dtus;   a 

storm,  tempest,  tempestas,  dtis,  f. 
stranger,  alienus,  i,  m. 


252 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


street,  road,  via,  ae,  f. 

strong,  firmus,  a,  urn. 

study,  studium,  i,  n. 

stupid,  stultus,  a,  urn;  amens,  gen. 

amentis. 

subdue,  pacify,  pdco,  are,  dm,  dtus. 
such,  so  great,  tantus,  a,  um ;  such, 

of  such  a  kind,  tails,  e ;  such  .  .  . 

as,   tantus  .  .  .  quantus,   when  re- 
ferring  to   size  ;    tails  .  .  .  qudlis, 

when    referring    to    kind,    nature, 

quality. 

suddenly,  subito,  repente,  advs. 
suffer,  patior,  pati,  passus  sum  ;  allow, 

permitto,  3;   sino,  ere,  sivi,  situs; 

endure,  perfero,  3. 
suicide,  to    commit  suicide,   mortem, 

dat.  of  reflex.,  conscisco,  sciscere,  sclvi, 

scitus. 

suitable,  idoneus,  a,  um. 
summon,  voco,  are,  dm,  dtus. 
supplies,  commedtus,  us,  m.,  used  in 

both   sing,    and   pi.;     supplies    (of 

grain),  res  frumentdria. 
suppose,  existimo,  are ,  dvi,  dtus. 
surely,  profecto,  adv. 
surpass,  excel,  antecello,  ere,  no  perf. 

nor  sup. ;  praecedo,  ere,  cessi,  cessus  ; 

supero,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 
surrender,  d'edo,  ere,  dedidi,  deditus  ; 

a  surrender,  deditio,  onis,  f. 
surround,  circumdo,  are,  dedl,  datus ; 

circumvenio,  ire,  ilent,  ventTts. 
swamp,  paliis,  iidis,  f. 
sword,  gladius,  i,  m. 


table,  mensa,  ae,  f. 

take,  capio,  capere,  cepi,  captus ;  take 

away,   removed,   ere,    movl,    motus ; 

take  from,  eripio,   eripere,   eripui, 


ereptus ;  take  part,  be  engaged  in 
anything,  versor,  art,  dtus  sum  ; 
take  possession  of,  occupo,  are,  dvi, 
dtus,  w.  ace.;  take  the  lead  of, 
praesum  esse,  ful,  futurus. 

task,  pensum,  i,  n. 

tax,  stipendium,  i,  n. 

teach,  doceo,  ere,  docul,  doctus. 

tell,  died,  ere,  dlxl,  dictus ;  ndrro, 
are,  dm,  dtus. 

temple,  templum,  t,  n. 

ten,  decem,  indecl. 

terrify,  perterreo,  ere,  m,  itus. 

territory,  fines,  itim,  m.  pi.;  ager, 
agri,  m. 

than,  quam,  adv.     See  42. 

thank,  gratids  ago,  agere,  egi,  actus. 

thankful,  feel  thankful,  gratiam  habeo, 
ere,  ui,  itus. 

that,  ille,  is ;  that,  in  order  that,  tit ; 
that  not,  ne,  ut  non. 

the  .  .  .  the,  quanta  .  .  .  tanto ; 
quo  .  .  .  eo. 

one  ...  the  other,  alter  .  .  .  alter  ; 
the  one  party  .  .  .  the  other,  alteri 
.  .  .  alteri. 

their,  suus,  a,  um,  when  referring  to 
same  person  or  thing  as  the  sub- 
ject of  its  sentence,  otherwise, 
eorum. 

there,  in  that  place,  ibi,  adv. 

they,  generally  omitted.     See  64. 

thing,  circumstance,  reason,  etc.,  res, 
ret,  f. 

think,  puto,  are,  dvT,  dtus ;  arbitror, 
art,  dtus  sum ;  think  upon,  think 
of,  cogito,  are,  dvi,  dtus,  w.  ace. 

third,  tertius,  a,  um. 

this,  hie,  is. 

though,  although,  cum,  w.  subj.  See 
87,  6. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


253 


thousand,  mille,  indecl.  in  sing.;  pi., 
milia,  ium. 

three,  tres,  tria. 

through,  throughout,  per,  prep.  w.  ace. 

till,  until,  dum,  donee,  quoad,  conjs. 
See  156. 

time,  tempus,  oris,  n.;  for  all  time,  in 
perpetuum,  sc.  tempus ;  at  one  and 
the  same  time,  simul,  adv.;  now  for 
a  long  time,  iam  diil,  iam  dudum, 
ad  vs.;  the  second  time,  a  second 
time,  iterum,  adv. 

to,  ad,  prep.  w.  ace. 

to-day,  hodie,  adv. 

towards,  ad,  prep.  w.  ace. 

town,  oppidum,  T,  n. 

troops,  copiae,  drum,  f.  pi.;  miles, 
itis,  m. ;  manus,  its,  m. 

true,  verus,  a,  um. 

trust,  hope,  spero,  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

trusting  \Q,fretus,  a,  um,  w.  abl. 

try,  experior,  Iri,  expertus  sum. 

twice,  bis,  num.  adv. 

two,  duo,  duae,  duo. 

U 

unbroken,  integer,  gra,  grum. 
under,  sub,  prep.  w.  ace. 
understand,  intellego,  ere,  lexi,  lectus. 
undertake,  carry  out,  perform,  conjicio, 

ficere,  feci,  fectus. 
unexpecting,  inopTndns,  antis. 
unfortunate,  miser,  miser  a,  miserum. 
unless,  nisi,  conj. 
unpopularity,  invidia,  ae,  f. 
until,  till,  dum,  donee,  quoad,  conjs. 

See  156. 

unwilling,  invitus,  a,  um  ;  be  unwill- 
ing, nolo,  nolle,  noluT. 
unworthy,  indtgnus,  a,  um, 
upon,  in,  prep.  w.  ace. 


urge,  cohortor,  art,  dtus  sum. 

use,  usus,  us,  m. ;   iitor,  utl,  usus  sum. 


valor,  virtus,  utis,  f. 

valuable.     See  29. 

very,  valde,  adv.;   when  a  noun  is  to 

be  emphasized,  ipse  is  used;  e.g.  the 

very  city,  urbs  ipsa. 
very  much,  vehementer,  adv. 
vicinity,  in  or  into  the  vicinity  of,  ad, 

prep.  w.  ace. 
victor,  victor,  oris,  m. 
victory,  victoria,  ae,  f. 
village,  vlcus,  i,  m. 
violence,  vts,  vis,  f. 
virtue,  virtus,  ntis,  f. 
voice,  vox,  vocis,  f. 
vote,  censed,  ere,  censui,  census. 

W 

wage,  carry  on,  gero,  ere,  gessl,  gestus. 

wait  for,  await,  wait  to  see,  exspecto 
(expecto},  are,  dvi,  dtus. 

wall,  murus,  T,  m.,  the  general  term; 
moenia,  ium,  n.  pi.,  CITY  WALLS, 
RAMPARTS,  BULWARKS;  paries,  pa- 
rietis,  m.,  WALL  OF  A  HOUSE. 

war,  helium,  i,  n. 

warn,  moneo,  ere,  monul,  monitus. 

way,  via,  ae,  f. 

weapon,  telum,  f,  n. 

weary,  defessus,  a,  um. 

well,  bene,  adv. 

when,  cum,  ubi,  ut.     See  152,  153. 

where,  ubi,  adv. 

whether,  utrum,  num,  — ne.    See  80. 

while,  dum,  conj.;  for  a  little  while, 
paulisper,  adv.;  a  little  while  ago, 
paulo  ante.  See  87. 


254 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


who,  which,  what,  qui,  quae,  quod, 
rel.  pron. ;  quis,  quae,  quid,  and  qtii, 
quae,  quod,  interrog.  pron.  and  adj. 

whole,  wholly.     See  all. 

why,  cur,  quid. 

wide,  Idtiis,  a,  urn. 

width,  Idtitndd,  inis,  f. 

wife,  uxor,  or  is,  f. ;   coniunx,  ugis,  f. 

willing,  be  willing,  void,  velle,  volui. 

wing,  cornii,  Us,  n. 

winter,  hiems,  hiemis,  f.;  pass  the 
winter,  hiemd,  are,  dvi,  dtus  ;  winter 
quarters,  hiberna,  drum,  n.  pi.,  sc. 
castra. 

wisdom,  sapientia,  ae,  f. 

wise,  sapiens,  gen.  sapientis. 

wish,  desire,  be  willing,  void,  velle, 
volui. 

with,  in  company  with,  cum,  prep.  w. 
abl. ;  with,  near  to,  at  the  house  of, 
apud,  prep.  w.  ace.;  with  respect  to, 
de,  prep.  w.  abl. 

withdraw,  d'eficio,  ficere,  feet,  fectus; 
to  withdraw  from  allegiance  to  the 
king,  a,  rege  dcjicere ;  withdraw,  be- 
take one's  self,  se  recipid,  cipere, 
cepi,  ceptus ;  se  cdnferd,  3. 

without,  sine,  prep.  w.  abl.;  be  with- 
out, cared,  ere,  m,  itus,  w.  abl. 


withstand,  obstd,   stare,   stiff,  status, 

w.   dat.;     sustined_,   ere,  ut,  tetitns, 

w.  ace. 
witness,  testis,  m.  and  f. ;  witness,  see, 

video,  ere,  vldi,  vlsus. 
wonder,  mtror,  drl,  dtus. 
work,  labor,  or  is,  m.;   labdrd,  are,  avl, 

dtus. 
worthy,  dTgnus,  a,  urn ;    it  is  worth 

while,  tanti  est. 

write,  scrlbd,  ere,  scripsi,  scriptus. 
wrong,  iniuria,  ae,  f.;   wrong-doing, 

mischief,  maleficium,  t,  n. 


year,  annus,  i,  m. 

yesterday,  hesterno  die. 

yet,  tamen,  adv. 

you,  tu.     See  64. 

your,  tuus,  a,  urn,  when  addressing 
one  person;  vester,  vestra,  vestrum, 
when  addressing  more  than  one. 

yourself,  tuT,  etc.     See  66,  69. 

youth,  a  young  man,  iuvenis,  is,  m.; 
adulescens,  entis,  m.  and  f. 


zeal,  studium,  t,  n.   - 


GRAMMATICAL    INDEX 


[FIGURES  REFER  TO  SECTIONS] 


Ablative,  syntax  of,  39-52;  abl.  of  ac- 
companiment, 46;  of  cause,  43;  of 
degree  of  difference,  48;  of  man- 
ner, 45;  of  material,  40;  of  means, 
43;  of  source,  40;  of  price,  50;  of 
quality,  49;  of  separation,  39;  of 
specification,  47  ;  of  time,  51;  with 
a  comparative,  42;  with  deponents 
(utor,  fruor,  etc.),  44;  with  ex  or 
de  for  partitive  gen.,  23;  abl.  abso- 
lute, 89. 

ac  (atque),  with  idem,  76. 

Accompaniment,  expressed  by  cum  and 
abl.,  46. 

Accusative,  syntax  of,  12-18;  cognate 
ace.,  13;  double  ace.,  14-15;  of 
duration  of  time,  16;  of  exclama- 
tion, 18;  of  extent  of  space,  16;  of 
place  to  which,  17;  with  verbs  of 
aiding,  pleasing,  etc.,  32,  I ;  with 
verbs  of  pitying,  repenting,  etc.,  27; 
with  verbs  of  remembering,  etc., 
25,2. 

Accusing,  etc.,  verbs  of,  with  gen., 
26. 

Action,  nouns  of,  21. 

adiuvo,  32,  i. 

Adjectives,  agreement  of  attributive 
adjs.,  5  ;  agreement  of  predicate 
adj.,  6 ;  agreement  with  natural 
gender,  7;  gen.  with  adjs.,  24. 


Agent,  expressed  by  dat.,  95 ;  by  a,  ab 

with  abl.,  41. 
Agreement,  of  adjs.,  5-7;   of  apposi- 

tives,   1-2;   of  predicate  nouns,  4; 

of  collective  noun  and  a  verb,  9; 

of  subject  and   predicate,    10;    of 

verb,  8. 
aliquis,  72. 

alius,  distinction  from  alter,  73. 
Although,  171,  87,  6. 
an,  in  direct  questions,  80. 
Answers,  81. 
Antecedent,  incorporation  of,  71,   5; 

agreement  of  relative  with,  71,  I,  2; 

sometimes  omitted,  71,  3. 
antequam,  154. 

Apposition,    1-3;     appositive  =  Eng- 
lish clause  of  time,  etc.,  3. 
As  soon  as,  152. 

Before,  with  clauses,  154. 

causa,  with  gen.  of  gerund,  etc.,  142,  2. 

Causal  clauses,  with  cum,  1 73,  2 ;  with 
quod,  quia,  quoniam,  173,  i;  ex- 
pressed by  participle,  87,  3. 

Causal  relatives,  173,  4. 

Cause,  abl.  of,  22. 

Characteristic,  gen.  of,  22 ;  abl.  of, 
49;  relative  clauses  of,  174. 

Collective  noun  with  singular  verb,  9. 


255 


256 


GRAMMATICAL   INDEX 


Comparative,  with  or  without  quam, 
42. 

Concession,  expressed  by  participle, 
87,6. 

Concessive  clauses,  171. 

Conditions,  121-127;  contrary  to  fact, 
123;  apodosis  in  indicative,  123; 
future  ("less  vivid"),  125;  future 
("more  vivid"),  124;  simple 
(where  apodosis  states  a  fact), 
122;  in  ind.  disc.,  169;  expressed 
by  participle,  87,  2. 

Conjunctions,  list  of,  and  uses,  82. 

cum,  causal,  173,  2;  concessive,  171, 
2;  temporal,  153;  clauses  with  = 
English  perf.  participle,  85,  2;  = 
English  present  passive  participle, 

85,  3- 

cum  primum  =  as  soon  as,  152. 
cupio,  constr.  with,  148,  3. 

Dative,  syntax  of,  31—37;  reference, 
36;  of  agent,  95;  of  indirect  ob- 
ject, 31;  of  interest,  36;  of  pos- 
sessor, 34;  of  purpose  or  end,  37; 
with  verbs  compounded  with  prepo- 
sitions (ad,  ante,  etc.),  32;  with 
adjectives,  35;  retained  with  pas- 
sive of  intransitives,  32,  2. 

debeo,  past  tenses  with  pres.  inf.,  112. 

Declaratory  sentences  in  ind.  disc., 
1 60. 

Degree  of  difference,  abl.  of,  48. 

Deliberative  subjunctive,  no. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  58-61. 

Deponents,  with  abl.,  44;  participles 
of,  85,  I. 

Descriptive  genitive,  22. 

Direct  reflexive,  65,  I. 

Discourse,  indirect.  See  Indirect 
discourse. 


Disjunctive  questions.  See  Double 
questions. 

domus,  constr.,  17,  i,  3. 

Double  dative,  37. 

Double  questions,  80. 

Doubting,  verbs  of,  constr.,  136. 

dum,  in  proviso,  172;  representing 
present  passive  participle,  85,  3;  = 
until,  156;  =  while,  102,  2. 

dum  modo,  in  proviso,  172. 

Duration  of  time,  ace.  of,  16. 

etsi  =  even  if,  171,  3. 
Exclamation,  in  the  ace.,  18. 
Extent  of  space,  ace.  of,  16. 

Fearing,  verbs  of,  constr.,  135. 
Feeling,  nouns  of,  21. 
For,  with  temporal  expressions,  16. 
Forgetting,  verbs  of  constr.  with,  25. 
Future  time,  in  the  subjunctive,  94. 

Genitive,  syntax  of,  20-29;  with  ad- 
jectives, 24;  with  nouns  of  action 
or  feeling,  21 ;  of  charge,  26;  of  in- 
definite value,  29;  objective,  21,  2; 
partitive,  23;  with  verbs  of  accus- 
ing, 26;  with  impersonal  verbs,  27; 
with  interest,  etc.,  28;  with  verbs 
of  remembering,  ej:c.,  25. 

Gerund  and  gerundive,  syntax  of,  91- 
95  5  gerund  and  gerundive  distin- 
guished, 91,  92;  cases  of  gerund, 
91;  gerundive  used  instead  of 
gerund,  93  ;  gerundive  denoting 
necessity  or  obligation,  95;  gerund- 
ive of  intransitive  verbs  used  im- 
personally, 95,  2 ;  gerundive  with 
mei,  tui,  sui,  etc.,  93,  2. 

hie,  59. 

Hindering,  verbs  of,  constr.,  150. 


GRAMMATICAL   INDEX 


257 


Historical  present,  102,  I. 
Historical  tenses,  131,  2. 
Hortatory  subjunctive,   115;    in  ind. 
disc.,  162,  3. 

iam,  iam  diu,  etc.,  with  pres.  and 
imp.  tenses,  102,  3,  103,  2. 

idem,  76. 

ille,  61. 

Imperative,  114;   in  ind.  disc.,  162,  2. 

Impersonal  verbs  with  gen.,  27. 

Indefinite  pronouns,  72. 

Indicative  mode,  tenses  of,  102-106; 
conditions  contrary  to  fact,  123,  i. 

Indirect  discourse,  158-169;  tenses 
of  infin.  in,  161;  tenses  of  subjunc- 
tive in,  166;  conditions  in,  169; 
hortatory  subjunctive  in,  162,  3; 
imperative  in,  162,  2;  questions  in, 
134;  wishes  in,  162,  3. 

Indirect  questions,  134. 

Indirect  reflexive,  65,  2. 

Infinitive,  formation  of,  109;  as  ob- 
ject, 148;  in  ind.  disc.,  160;  tenses 
of,  161. 

Instrument.     See  Means. 

inter  nos,  se,  etc.,  68. 

Interest,  expressed  by  dat.,  36. 

interest,  const,  with,  28. 

Interrogative  pronouns,  75,  79. 

Intransitive  verbs,  with  dat.,  32;  used 
impersonally  in  the  passive,  32,  2. 

ipse,  74. 

is,  63. 

Islands,  names  of  small,  in  constr.  of 
place,  17. 

iste,  60. 

iubeo,  with  ace.,  32,  i;  with  infin., 
148,  i. 


licet,  119. 


Manner,   abl.   of,    45 ;    expressed   by 

participle,  87,  4. 
Material,  abl.  of,  with  ex,  40. 
Means,  abl.  of,  43;   means  and  agent 

distinguished,  43,  I ;   expressed  by 

participle,  87,  5. 

Measure  of  difference.     See  Degree, 
miseror,  constr.  with,  27,  i. 
modo,  in  proviso,  172. 

natus,  with  abl.  of  origin  or  source, 
40. 

ne,  with  verbs  of  fearing,  135;  in  ob- 
ject clauses,  147  ;  with  verbs  of 
hindering,  150. 

-ne  .  .  .  an,  in  double  questions,  80. 

Necessity,  expressed  by  the  gerundive, 

95- 

Negative  command.     See  Prohibition. 
Negatives,  with  connectives,  82,  7. 
No,  81. 

non  dubito  =  not  to  hesitate,  136,  i. 
nonne,  in  questions,  78,  2. 
nostrum  and  vestrum,   as  partitive 

gen.,  64,  i. 
num.,  in  indirect  questions,  78,  3. 

Object  clauses,  146. 

Objective  genitive,  21,  2. 

Obligation,   expressed   by   gerundive, 

95- 

omnis,  contrasted  with  quisque,  72,  2. 
Origin  or  source,  abl.  of,  40. 

Participles,  formation  of,  85 ;  English 
present  =  Latin  perf.  of  some  depo- 
nent verbs,  85,  4  ;  expresses  time, 
cause,  manner,  etc.,  87  ;  perf.  ac- 
tive, how  represented  in  Latin,  85, 
2;  present  passive,  how  represented 
in  Latin,  85,  3. 


LATIN   PROSE   COMP. —  17 


258 


GRAMMATICAL  INDEX 


Partitive  genitive,  23;   substitutes  for, 

23,  I. 

Passive,  of  intransitive  verbs,  32,  2. 
Periphrastic  conjugation,  94,  95. 
Personal  pronouns,  64. 
Pity,  verbs  of,  constr.,  27. 
Polite  subjunctive,  1 1 8. 
Possessive  pronouns,  67,  69. 
Possessor,  dat.  of,  34. 
postquam,  posteaquam,  constr.  with, 

152. 

"Potential"  subjunctive,  118. 
Predicate  nouns,  4. 
Prepositions,    in     composition     with 

verbs,  33. 
Present,  historical,   102,  I ;    sequence 

with,  131,  2  (a). 
Price,  abl.  of,  50. 

Primary  tenses.    See  Principal  Tenses. 
Principal  tenses,  131. 
priusquam,  154. 
Prohibition,  116. 
Pronouns,  syntax,  etc.,  58-76. 
Provided  that  (proviso),  172. 
Purpose,  clauses  of,  141-143. 

Quality,  gen.  of,  22;   abl.  of,  49. 

quam,  in  comparisons,  42. 

quamquam,  171. 

quamvis,  171. 

Questions,  direct,  78,  79;  double  or 
disjunctive,  80;  indirect,  134;  of 
doubt,  indignation,  etc.,  no;  rhe- 
torical, 163. 

qui,  preceded  by  is,  63,  i;  in  result 
clauses,  145,  I;  in  purpose  clauses, 

143.  I- 
quia,  173,  i. 
quidam,  72;   quldam  ex  instead  of 

gen.  of  whole,  23,  I. 
quilibet,  72. 


qum,  with  verbs  of  hindering,  150,  2; 

with  verbs  of  doubting,  136. 
quis  (indefinite),  72. 
quisquam,  72. 
quisque,   distinguished   from   omnis, 

72,  2;  with  a  superlative,  72,  3. 
quivis,  72. 

quo,  in  purpose  clauses,  143,  2. 
quoad  =  until,  156. 
quod  (causal),  173,  i. 
quominus,  with  verbs   of  hindering, 

150. 
quoniam,  173,  i. 

Reciprocals,  68. 

ref  ert  =  it  concerns,  28. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  65,  66. 

Relative  clauses,  in  general,  71,  175; 
characteristic,  174;  of  cause  and 
concession,  173,  4;  of  purpose, 
143,  i;  of  result,  145,  I. 

Remembering,  verbs  of,  constr.  with, 

25- 

Result,  clauses  of,  144,  145. 
rus,  constr.,  17,  i. 

se,  66,  69. 

Secondary  tenses.  See  Historical 
tenses. 

Separation,  abl.  of,  39. 

Sequence  of  tenses,  131,  132. 

simul  atque  (ac)  =  as  soon  as,  152. 

Specification,  abl.  of, -47. 

Subjunctive,  deliberative,  no;  horta- 
tory, 115;  of  polite  or  modest  asser- 
tion, 118;  "potential,"  118;  in 
prohibitions,  116,  2;  in  wishes 
(optative),  129;  of  characteristic, 
174;  in  causal  clauses,  173,  4;  in 
purpose  clauses,  141-143;  in  result 
clauses,  145,  I;  in  object  clauses, 


GRAMMATICAL   INDEX 


259 


146,  147;  in  temporal  clauses,  153, 
154,  156;  in  conditions,  123,  125; 
in  concessive  clauses,  171 ;  in  clauses 
of  proviso,  172;  tenses  of,  in  ind. 
disc.,  1 66;  future  time  in,  94. 

sui,  with  gerundive,  93,  2. 

Supine,  syntax  of,  96. 

suus,  67,  69. 

talis,  use  of  is  like,  63,  3. 

Temporal  clauses,  152-156;  with  dum, 
102,  i,  155,  156;  with  antequam 
and  priusquam,  154. 

Tenses,  of  participle,  84,  85;  of  in- 
dicative, 102-106;  historical,  de- 
fined, 131,  2;  of  infinitive,  108,  109; 
of  subjunctive  in  ind.  disc.,  166; 
principal,  defined,  131;  sequence 
of,  132. 

That,  158,  caution. 

Time,  how  long,  1 6;  when  or  within 
what  period,  51;  clauses  of,  ex- 
pressed by  participle,  87,  I, 


Towns,  in  constructions  of  place  to 
which,  17. 

Until,  154,  2,  156. 

ut,  in  clauses  of  result,  145;  of  pur- 
pose, 143;  =  as,  when,  in  temporal 
clauses,  152;  with  verbs  of  fearing, 
135;  in  object  clauses,  147. 

ut  primum  =  as  soon  as,  152. 

utor,  etc.,  constr.  with,  44. 

utrum  .  .  .  an,  in  double  questions,  80. 

Value,  indefinite,  gen.  of,  29. 

Verbs,  agreement  with  subject,  8;  with 
two  ace.,  list,  14,  15;  with  gen., 
list,  25,  26;  with  dat,  list,  32,  33; 
with  abl.,  list,  44;  with  inf.  as  object, 
list,  148,  3;  taking  object  clauses, 
list,  147;  with  ind.  disc.,  160. 

Vestrum.    See  Nostrum. 

Want,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  39. 
Wishes,  128,  129;   in  ind.  disc.,  162,  3. 

Yes,  8 1,  2. 


Lane's   Latin  Grammars 


LANE'S  LATIN  GRAMMAR $1.50 

FOR  USE  IN  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES.  By  GEORGE  M.  LANE, 
Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Late  Professor  Emeritus  in  Harvard  University. 
In  many  respects  this  is  the  most  thorough,  philosophical,  and  com- 
plete Latin  Grammar  ever  published  in  this  country,  representing,  as  it 
does,  the  crowning  work  and  ripest  conclusions  of  one  of  the  most 
eminent  teachers  of  the  language.  The  work  has  the  distinction,  rarely 
accorded  to  a  text-book,  of  being  regarded  both  as  a  literary  and  as  a 
scientific  event.  Its  preparation  engaged  the  author,  during  the  intervals 
of  teaching  at  Harvard  University,  for  nearly  thirty  years.  After  his 
death  the  work  was  taken  up  and  completed  by  his  colleague,  Dr.  Morris 
H.  Morgan,  of  Harvard  University.  Some  of  the  distinguishing 
features  and  merits  of  the  book  are  comprehensiveness  and  accuracy  in 
detail,  precision  of  definition  and  statement,  combined  with  a  remark- 
ably clear  arrangement  and  singular  aptness  of  illustration.  The  sup- 
plementary aids  are  an  important  feature.  These  include  a  chapter  on 
Versification  written  by  Dr.  Herman  W.  Hayley,  a  former  pupil  of 
Professor  Lane,  and  brief  expositions  of  such  important  subjects  as 
Rules  of  Quantity  and  Figures  of  Prosody,  Occasional  Peculiarities  of 
Verbs,  Indirect  Discourse,  Use  of  Pronouns  and  Numerals.  The  book 
contains  also  a  complete  Index  of  Subjects  and  an  Index  of  Latin 
Words  with  references. 

LANE  AND  MORGAN'S  SCHOOL  LATIN  GRAMMAR  .  .  $1.00 
Prepared  by  MORRIS  H.  MORGAN,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Professor  of 
Classical  Philology  in  Harvard  University. 

This  book  is  intended  for  the  use  of  students  of  Latin  during  their 
course  in  secondary  schools.  It  is  based  on  "  Lane's  Latin  Grammar 
for  Schools  and  Colleges,"  and  furnished  abundant  material  for  careful 
training  in  Latin  pronunciation,  for  the  study  of  leading  principles  under 
which  Latin  words  are  formed,  for  thorough  drill  in  inflections,  and  for 
acquiring  a  good  working  knowledge  of  the  most  important  principles  of 
Latin  syntax  and  composition.  The  arrangement  of  the  material  is  clear 
and  logical  with  cross-references  to  the  to  the  larger  grammar. 


Copies  sent,  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  »  Cincinnati  »  Chicago 


(238) 


REVISED  EDITION 

VIRGIL'S     AENEID 

With  an  Introduction,  Notes,  and  Vocabulary  by  HENRY  S.  FRIEZE, 
late  Professor  of  Latin  in  the  University  of  Michigan.  Revised  by 
WALTER  DENNISON,  Professor  of  Latin  in  the  University  of 
Michigan. 

First  Six  Books  ....     $1.30        Complete $1.50 

Complete  Text  Edition $0.50 

This  Work  differs  in  many  respects  from  the  former  edition.  Such 
changes  and  alterations  have  been  introduced  as  are  necessary  to 
make  the  book  conform  to  modern  demands,  and  many  important  addi- 
tions have  also  been  made. 

The  Introduction  has  been  enlarged  by  the  addition  of  sections 
on  the  life  and  writings  of  Virgil,  the  plan  of  the  Aeneid,  the  meter, 
manuscripts,  editions,  and  helpful  books  of  reference. 

The  Text  has  been  corrected  to  conform  to  the  readings  that  have 
become  established,  and  the  spellings  are  in  accord  with  the  evidence  of 
inscriptions  of  the  first  century  A.D.  To  meet  the  need  of  early 
assistance  in  reading  the  verse  metrically,  the  long  vowels  in  the  first  two 
books  are  fully  indicated. 

The  Notes  have  been  thoroughly  revised  and  largely  added  to.  The 
old  grammar  references  are  corrected  and  new  ones  (to  Harkness's 
Complete,  Lane  &  Morgan's,  and  Bennett's  Grammars)  added.  The 
literary  appreciation  of  the  poet  is  increased  by  parallel  quotations 
from  English  literature.  The  irregularities  of  scansion  in  each  book 
are  also  given  with  sufficient  explanations. 

The  Vocabulary  has  been  made  as  simple  as  possible  and  includes 
only  those  words  occurring  in  the  Aeneid.  The  parts  of  compound 
words  are  not  indicated  separately  when  they  appear  unmodified  in 
the  compound  form.  The  principal  parts  of  verbs  are  given  which  are^ 
understood  to  be  in  actual  use. 

The  Illustrations  for  the  most  part  are  new  and  fresh,  and  have 
been  selected  with  great  care  with  a  view  to  assisting  directly  in  the 
interpretation  of  the  text.  There  are  also  maps  showing  the  wan- 
derings of  Aeneas,  the  vicinity  of  Cumae,  and  pre-historic  Rome, 
and  a  full-page  facsimile  of  one  of  the  best  manuscripts  of  Virgil,  the 
Codex  Palatinus. 

American  Book  Company,  Publishers 

(256) 


HARKNESS      AND      FORBES'S 

Caesar's    Commentaries 
on  the  Gallic  War 

With  Introduction,  Notes,  and  Vocabulary.     By  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  Ph.  D.,  LL.D., 

Professor  Emeritus  in  Brown  University.     Assisted  by  CHARLES  H.  FORBES,  A.  B., 

Professor  of  Latin  in  Phillips  Academy,  Andover,  Mass. 

Price,  $1.25 


THIS  WORK,  is  preeminently  a  student's  edition  of  Caesar's  Commentaries 
on  the  Gallic  War,  and  has  been  prepared  with  special  reference  to   the 
present  needs  of  preparatory  and  secondary  schools.     While  it  is  remark- 
able for  its  simplicity,  yet  it  contains  everything  which  is  needed  for  studying  the 
author.     Attention  is  called  particularly  to  the  following  special  features  of  the 
book: 

1.  This  edition  is  furnished  with  an  Introduction  containing  an  outline 
of  the  life  of  Caesar,  a  description  in  brief  of  the  scenes  of  his  military  operations 
in  Gaul,   Germany,   and    Britain,    and  a  short   treatise   on   the   military  system 
of  the  Romans,  together  with  a  list  of  valuable  works  on  subjects  treated  in  the 
Introduction. 

2.  The  text  is  chiefly  that  of  the  critical  edition  of  H.  Meusel,  Berlin, 
1894,  now  quite  generally   accepted  as  the  standard.     Each   important   chapter 
begins  with  a  brief  summary  in  English. 

3.  The   notes  are  intended  to  guide  the  faithful  efforts  of  the  student  and 
to  interest  him  in  the  stirring  events  recorded  in  fhe  Commentaries.     Special  atten- 
tion has  been  given  to  the  difficult  subjects  of  the  subjunctive  mood  and  of  the 
indirect  discourse. 

4.  The  vocabulary  gives  special  attention  to  etymology,  but  the  treaN 
ment  is   made  as  simple  as  possible  with  the  sole  aim  of  aiding  the  student  in 
understanding  and  appreciating  the  significant  elements  of  words.     The  important 
subject  of  idioms  and  phrases  receives  due  attention. 

5.  The  illustrations  are  entirely  appropriate  and  unlike  those  in  most 
other  works  of  a  similar  nature.     They  have  in  no  instance  been  introduced  merely 
for  purposes  of  decoration.      Among  the  most  striking  features  of  the  work  are  the 
nine  colored  plates  illustrative  of  the  military  system  of  the  Romans,  which  have 
been  made  only  after  consultation  with  the  highest  authorities,  and  are  here  repro- 
duced in  their  natural  colors.     Besides  these,  there  are  many  other  illustrations, 
eleven  plans  of  battles,  seven  campaign  maps,  and  a  general  map  of  Gaul. 


AMERICAN        BOOK      COMPANY 

(157)  PUBLISHERS 


Cicero's  Orations 

AND   SELECTIONS    FROM    THE  'LETTERS 

EDITED    BY 

WILLIAM    R.  HARPER,  Ph.D.,  D.D.,  LL.D. 
President  of  the  University  of  Chicago 

AND 

FRANK   A.  GALLUP,  A.M. 
Professor  of  Latin,  Colgate  Academy 

Half  Leather,  12mo,566  pages,  with  Maps  and  Illustrations.    Price,  $1.30 


This  edition  of  Cicero  contains  in  addition  to  selected 
letters'  all  the  orations  required  by  all  the  colleges 
throughout  the  country.  It  is  intended  to  be  distinctly 
practical  and  aims  solely  to  meet  the  needs  of  secondary 
and  preparatory  schools. 

The  Orations  have  been  arranged  in  the  order  in  which  it  is  thought 
they  can  be  read  to  the  best  advantage  and  include,  besides  the  four 
against  Catiline,  those  for  Archais,  Milo,  Marcellus,  and  Ligarius, 
Pompey's  Commission,  and  the  Fourteenth  Philippic. 

The  Letters  have  been  selected  with  special  reference  to  their  fitness 
for  reading  at  sight  and  for  this  purpose  they  have  no  equal  in  Roman 
literature. 

The  Introduction  includes  a  well  balanced  life  of  Cicero  with  a  just 
estimate  of  his  standing  and  character  and  many  helpful  features  which 
will  give  the  student  a  comprehensive  knowledge  of  Roman  life  and 
politics. 

The  Notes  suggest  rather  than  tell  the  student  and  help  him  to  get, 
instead  of  getting  for  him,  that  acquaintance  with  the  orator  and  with 
the  language  which  is  the  result  of  true  study. 

The  Vocabulary  shows  great  care  and  thoroughness  and  meets  the 
requirements  of  the  average  student. 

The  Maps  are  accurate  and  drawn  especially  for  this  work  and  the 
Illustrations  are  happily  chosen  to  illustrate  both  text  and  time. 


Copies  sent,  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price, 

American   Book  Company 

\lew  York  »  Cincinnati  •  Chicago 

(260) 


A  Term  of  Ovid 

EDITED  BY  CLARENCE  W.  GLEASON,  A.M.  (HARVARD) 
Of  Roxbury  Latin  School 

Cloth,  12mo,  209  pages.     With  Notes  and  Illustrations.     Price,  75  cents 


TEN  STORIES  FROM  THE  METAMORPHOSES 

I.  Atalanta's  Last  Race.  II.  Pyramus  and  Thisbe.  III.  Apollo's  Un- 
requited Love  for  Daphne.  IV.  How  Phaethon  Drove  His  Father's 
Chariot.  V.  The  Death  of  Orpheus.  VI.  The  Touch  of  Gold.  VII. 
Philemon  and  Baucis.  VIII.  The  Impiety  and  Punishment  of  Niobe. 
IX.  The  Flood.  X.  Perseus  and  Andromeda. 

This  book  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of  students 
pursuing  Latin  Courses  (i)  in  which  but  a  single  term  is 
given  to  the  study  of  Ovid  ;  (2)  in  which  this  author  is 
not  taken  up  until  after  Vergil  or  Cicero;  (3)  or  in  which 
Ovid  has  not  hitherto  been  included  among  the  school 
texts  read.  It  is  believed  that  the  book  will  be  found  a 
natural  and  easy  link  between  the  prose  of  the  second  or 
third  year  and  the  beginning  of  Vergil. 

The  first  three  stories  are  accompanied  by  a  parallel 
version  in  the  order  of  ordinary  Latin  prose  with  the 
quantities  marked. 

The  divisions  into  feet  and  the  caesuras  are  indicated 
in  the  first  hundred  lines  by  an  unobtrusive  but  effective 
device,  in  order  to  facilitate  the  acquisition  of  the  art  of 
scansion,  which  is  sometimes  difficult. 

The  text  is  accompanied  by  synonyms,  both  of  words 
not  usual  in  prose  and  of  common  words  in  extraordinary 
uses.  The  notes  are  full,  and  are  designed  to  meet  the 
actual  needs  of  the  student. 

The  book  contains  a  complete  vocabulary  with  refer- 
ences to  the  text  by  lines. 


Copies  senf,  prepaid^  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  •  Cincinnati  »  Chicago 

(264) 


Latin  Literature  of  the  Empire 

Selected  and  Edited  with  Revised  Texts  and  Brief  Introductions 

BY  ALFRED   GUDEMAN,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor  of  Classical  Philology,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

In  Two  Volumes.     Cloth,  12mo.     Per  Volume,  $1.80 

VOL.  I — PROSE.  Selections  from  Velleius,  Curtius,  Seneca  Rhetor, 
Justinus  (Trogus  Pompeius),  Seneca,  Petronius,  including  Cena 
Trimalchionis,  Pliny  the  Elder,  Quintilian,  Tacitus,  Pliny  the 
Younger,  Suetonius,  Minucius  Felix  Octavius,  Apuleius — Ammianus 
Marcellinus,  and  Boethius. 

VOL.  II — POETRY.  Pseudo  Vergiliana,  Aetna,  Manilius,  Calpurnius, 
Nemesianus,  Phaedrus,  Lucan,  Valerius  Flaccus,  Seneca,  the 
Octavia  (anonymous),  Persius,  Statius,  Silius  Italicus,  Martial, 
Juvenal,  Pervigilium  Veneris,  Ausonius,  and  Claudianus. 


The  works  of  Latin  Literature  of  the  post-Augustan 
period  have  hitherto,  with  a  few  notable  exceptions,  been 
virtually  excluded  from  the  classical  curricula  of  colleges 
and  universities. 

The  present  collection  has  been  made  primarily  for  the 
use  of  students  in  higher  classes  in  colleges.  The  selec- 
tions will  be  found  useful  as  collateral  reading  in  con- 
nection with  lectures  on  classical  literature,  and  will  also 
furnish  suitable  material  for  sight  reading. 

The  selections  themselves  contain  nothing- that  is  not 
eminently  worthy  of  perusal.  They  are  in  every  case 
sufficiently  extensive  to  give  a  continuous  and  coherent 
story,  which  at  the  same  time  exhibits  the  author  at  his 
best.  The  text  follows  the  best  modern  editions,  the 
deviations  from  the  standard  texts  being  briefly  recorded 
in  critical  appendices. 


Copies  sent,  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  »  Cincinnati  «  Chicago 

(265) 


Introduction  to   the   Study  of 
Latin    Inscriptions 

BY  JAMES  C.  EGBERT,  JR.,  Ph.D. 
Adjunct  Professor  of  Latin,  Columbia  University 

Half  MoroccOi  large  12mo,  468  pages.     With  numerous  illustrations  and 
exact  reproductions  of  inscriptions     ....     Price,  $3  50 


This  work  is  designed  as  a  text-book  for  the  use  of 
students  in  Universities  and  Colleges,  and  also  to  furnish 
an  account  of  this  branch  of  archaeological  study  for 
general  readers.  It  has  been  prepared  in  the  belief  that 
a  knowledge  of  epigraphy  forms  an  essential  part  of  the 
equipment  of  a  teacher  of  the  classics,  and  that  the  sub- 
ject itself  has  become  so  important  as  to  justify  its  intro- 
duction, in  elementary  form  at  least,  into  the  curriculum 
of  undergraduate  studies. 

A  distinctive  feature  of  the  book  is  the  number  and 
character  of  its  illustrations, — there  being  over  seven 
hundred  cuts  and  diagrams  of  inscriptions,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  illustrating  the  text,  and  for  practice  in  reading. 
Of  these,  over  one  hundred  are  photographic  repro- 
ductions, showing  the  forms  of  the  letters  and  the 
arrangement  of  the  inscriptions.  The  work  is  also  sup- 
plied with  an  exhaustive  bibliography  and  valuable  tables 
of  abbreviations,  archaisms,  etc. 


Copies  of  Egbert's  Latin  Inscriptions  will  be  sent,  prepaid,  to  any  address 
on  receipt  of  the  price  by  the  Publishers  : 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  •  Cincinnati  •  Chicago 

(26$ 


Roman  Life  in  Latin  Prose  and  Verse 

ILLUSTRATIVE  READINGS  FROM  LATIN 
LITERATURE 

SELECTED   AND   EDITED   BY 

H.  T.  PECK,  PH.D. 

Professor  of  the  Latin  Language  and  Literature  in  Columbia  University. 

AND 

ROBERT  ARROWSMITH,  PH.D. 
Cloth,  12mo,  256  pages .    Price,  $1.50 


This  work  gives  a  representative  survey  of  Latin  Lit- 
erature, intended  to  be  read  in  advanced  academic  or 
college  work,  as  supplementary  to  a  regular  course  in 
Latin  Literature,  or  to  be  itself  the  fundamental  work 
in  such  a  course.  The  selections  range  from  the  popular 
songs  which  antedate  written  literature,  to  the  Christian 
hymns  of  the  third  century,  covering  the  early  dramatists, 
historians,  orators,  philosophers,  the  writers  of  satire  and 
epigram,  the  lyric  and  epic  poets,  the  collectors  of  anec- 
dotes, letter  writers,  and  authors  of  prose  works,  and 
including  other  material  of  a  popular  nature,  such  as 
lampoons,  parodies,  epitaphs,  advertisements,  announce- 
ments of  ball  games,  theatrical  and  gladiatorial  notices, 
etc.  To  each  selection  is  prefixed  a  concise^account  of 
the  author,  when  known,  and  of  his  works,  with  a  brief 
bibliography.  For  convenience  in  sight  reading  the  text 
is  provided  with  a  translation  of  the  more  difficult  words, 
and  is  followed  by  a  fuller  commentary  on  special  points 
of  interest. 


Copies  of  Roman  Life  in  Latin  Prose  and  Verse  will  be  sent,  prepaid, 
to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price  by  the  Publishers  : 

American    Book   Company 

New  York  •  Cincinnati  »  Chicago 

(268) 


Stories    from    Aulus    Gellius 

EDITED  FOR  SIGHT  READING 

BY 

CHARLES  KNAPP,  PH.D. 

Instructor  in  Latin,  Barnard  College,  New  York 


Paper.  12mo,  93  pages  .         .        .         .         .        .         .  Price,  30  cents 


The  Noctes  Atticse  of  Aulus  Gellius  is  a  representative  work,  since 
it  not  only  reflects  perfectly  the  nature  of  the  subjects  which  engaged 
the  attention  of  the  literary  men  of  the  second  century  A.D.,  but  also 
forcibly  depicts  the  spirit  in  which  their  labors  were  prosecuted.  Of 
especial  interest  and  value  are  the  numerous  quotations  from  early 
writers  whose  works  are  no  longer  extant.  For  such  portions  as  yet 
remain  of  the  oldest  Latin  literature,  we  are  almost  wholly  indebted  to 
quotations  by  various  grammarians.  In  this  connection  the  obligations 
of  Latin  scholarship  to  Gellius  are  far  from  small.  Fully  two  hundred 
and  seventy-five  authors  are  mentioned  or  directly  quoted  in  his  work, 
while  the  number  of  individual  works  cited  is  twice  or  thrice  as  large. 
In  giving  these  quotations  from  the  older  writers,  he  often  adds  infor- 
mation concerning  their  careers,  or  their  works,  and  in  this  way  his 
contributions  to  our  knowledge  of  the  history  of  Latin  literature  are 
very  valuable.  For  example,  practically  all  that  is  known  of  the  life  of 
Plautus,  the  greatest  comic  poet  of  Rome,  is  derived  from  the  third 
chapter  of  the  third  book  of  the  Noctes  Atticse. 

The  commentary  gives  sufficient  assistance  to  enable  students  to 
read  the  selections  as  rapidly  and 'intelligently  as  possible,  and  without 
the  need  of  any  helps  beyond  those  furnished  by  the  book  itself.  The 
text,  in  point  of  language  and  spelling,  is  in  the  main  that  of  Hertz,  as 
given  in  his  critical  edition.  Throughout  the  book  all  vowels  known  to 
be  long  have  been  carefully  marked. 


Copies  of  Knapp's  A  ulus  Gellius  will  be  sent,  prepaid,  to  any  address  on 
receipt  of  the  price  by  the  Publishers  : 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  »  Cincinnati  *  Chicago 

(270) 


MORRIS  &•  MORGAN'S  LATIN  SERIES 

HORACE'S   ODES,  EPODES 
and  CARMEN  SAECULARE 

EDITED,    WITH    INTRODUCTION   AND   COMMENTARY, 
BY   CLIFFORD   HERSCHEL   MOORE, 

ASSISTANT    PROFESSOR   OF   LATIN   AND    GREEK,    HARVARD    UNIVERSITY. 

Cloth,  1 2mo,  465  pp.    Price,  $1.50.  Text  edition.     Price,  40  cents. 

'"PHIS  edition  of  Horace's  lyrical  poems  has  been 
prepared  for  the  needs  of  freshmen  and  sopho- 
mores. The  introduction  is  intended  to  give  the 
necessary  information  as  to  the  poet's  life  and  writ- 
ings. The  text  is  the  vulgate,  although  in  some 
passages  the  better  manuscript  edition  has  been  pre- 
ferred. Inasmuch  as  young  students  require  no  little 
help  if  they  are  to  understand  as  well  as  translate  the 
Odes  and  Epodes,  the  editor  has  not  limited  his  com- 
mentary to  the  baldest  aids,  but  has  tried  to  give 
such  assistance  in  interpretation  as  may  help  students 
to  some  appreciation  of  Horace's  art  and  charm. 
The  relation  of  the  poet  to  his  Greek  models  is 
shown  by  frequent  quotations.  To  all  the  more 
difficult  Greek  passages  translations  have  been  ap- 
pended. A  number  of  quotations  from  the  later 
Latin  writers  are  also  given  to  indicate  in  some 
degree  the  ready  acceptance  which  Horace's  phrases 
found  among  his  successors. 

For  list  of  the  entire  series  and  descriptive  catalogue  of  text-books 
in  the  Ancient  Languages,  write  to  the  Publishers, 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY 
NEW  YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO 

BOSTON    ATLANTA    DALLAS     SAN  FRANCISCO 

(271; 


Latin   Dictionaries 


HARPER'S  LATIN   DICTIONARY 

Founded  on  the  translation  of  "Freund's  Latin-German  Lexicon." 
Edited  by  E.  A.  ANDREWS,  LL.D.  Revised,  Enlarged,  and  in  great 
part  Rewritten  by  CHARLTON  T.   LEWIS,  Ph.D.,  and  CHARLES 
SHORT,  LL.D. 
Royal  Octavo,  2030  pages      .       Sheep,  $6.50  ;  Full  Russia,  $10.00 

The  translation  of  Dr.  Freund's  great  Latin-German  Lexicon, 
edited  by  the  late  Dr.  E.  A.  Andrews,  and  published  in  1850,  has  been 
from  that  time  in  extensive  and  satisfactory  use  throughout  England  and 
America.  Meanwhile  great  advances  have  been  made  in  the  science  on 
which  lexicography  depends.  The  present  work  embodies  the-  latest 
advances  in  philological  study  and  research,  and  is  in  every  respect  the 
most  complete  and  satisfactory  Latin  Dictionary  published. 

LEWIS'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY  FOR  SCHOOLS 
By  CHARLTON  T.  LEWIS,  Ph.D. 
Large  Octavo,  1200  pages      .      Cloth,  $4  50  ;  Half  Leather,  $5.00 

This  dictionary  is  not  an  abridgment,  but  an  entirely  new  and  inde- 
pendent work,  designed  to  include  all  of  the  student's  needs,  after 
acquiring  the  elements  of  grammar,  for  the  interpretation  of  the  Latin 
authors  commonly  read  in  school. 

LEWIS'S  ELEMENTARY  LATIN  DICTIONARY 
By  CHARLTON  T.  LEWIS,  Ph.D. 
Crown  Octavo,  952  pages.     Half  Leather  ....       $2.00 

This  work  is  sufficiently  full  to  meet  the  needs  of  students  in 
secondary  or  preparatory  schools,  and  also  in  the  first  and  second  years' 
work  in  colleges. 

SMITH'S  ENGLISH-LATIN   DICTIONARY 

A   Complete  and  Critical  English-Latin  Dictionary.     By  WILLIAM 
SMITH,  LL.D.,  and  THEOPHILUS  D.  HALL,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  Uni- 
versity College,  London.     With  a  Dictionary  of  Proper  Names. 
Royal  Octavo,  765  pages.     Sheep $4.00 


Copies  sent)  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  »  Cincinnati  «  Chicago 

(278) 


Greek    Dictionaries 


LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S  GREEK-ENGLISH  LEXICON 

Revised  and  Enlarged.  Compiled  by  HENRY  GEORGE  LIDDELL, 
D.D.,  and  ROBERT  SCOTT,  D.D.,  assisted  by  HENRY  DRISLER, 
LL.D.  Large  Quarto,  1794  pages.  Sheep  .  .  .  $10.00 
The  present  edition  of  this  great  work  has  been  thoroughly  revised, 

and  large  additions  made  to  it.     The  editors  have  been  favored  with  the 

co-operation  of  many  scholars  and  several  important  articles  have  been 

entirely  rewritten. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S   GREEK-ENGLISH    LEXICON— Intermediate 

Revised  Edition.     Large  Octavo,  910  pages. 

Cloth,  $3.50  ;  Half  Leather,  $4.00 

This  Abridgment  is  an  entirely  new  work,  designed  to  meet  the 
ordinary  requirements  of  instructors.  It  differs  from  the  smaller 
abridged  edition  in  that  it  is  made  from  the  last  edition  of  the  large 
Lexicon,  and  contains  a  large  amount  of  new  matter. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S  GREEK-ENGLISH  LEXICON— Abridged 

Revised  Edition.  Crown  Octavo,  832  pages.  Half  Leather  $1.25 
This  Abridgment  is  intended  chiefly  for  use  by  students  in  Secondary 

and  College  Preparatory  Schools. 

THAYER'S  GREEK-ENGLISH   LEXICON  OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT 
Being    Grimm's   Wilke's    Clavis    Novi   Testaments      Translated, 
Revised,  and  Enlarged  by  JOSEPH  HENRY  THAYER,  D.D.,  LL.D. 
Royal  Quarto,  727  pages       .       Cloth,  $5.00  ;  Half  Leather,  $6.50 
This  great  work  embodies  and  represents  the  results  of  the  latest 
researches  in  modern  philology  and  biblical  exegesis.     It  traces  histori- 
cally the  signification  and  use  of  all  words  used  in  the  New  Testament, 
and  carefully  explains  the  difference  between  classical  and  sacred  usage. 

YONGE'S  ENGLISH-GREEK  LEXICON 

By  C.  D.  YONGE.     Edited  by  HENRY  DRISLER,  LL.D. 

Royal  Octavo,  903  pages.     Sheep $4.50 

AUTENRIETH'S  HOMERIC  DICTIONARY 

Translated  and  Edited  by  ROBERT  P.  KEEP,  Ph.D.     New  Edition. 

Revised  by  ISAAC  FLAGG,  Ph.D. 

I2mo,  312  pages.     Illustrated.     Cloth        .         .         .         .       $1.10 


Copies  sent,  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  •  Cincinnati  •  Chicago 


TB 


[25m-9,'ll] 


